Home

High Performance Model QCPU(Q Mode) User`s Manual(Hardware

Contents

1. Connectors for sending and receiving signals from the main base unit or the other extension base units to which the extension cables are connected Do not remove the supplied connector cover connector For setting method refer to Section 6 4 Connectors for installing the power supply module I O modules and intelligent function module special function module To those connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed apply the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module to prevent entry of dirt Blank cover module applicable to Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B QG60 Blank cover module applicable to QA1S65B and QA1S68B A1SG60 Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit 5 Module fixing screw hole Q52B Q55B Q63B Q65B Q68B and Q612B Screw size M3 x 12 QA1S65B and QA1S68B Screw size M4 x 12 6 Extension cable connector 4 Module connector Hole for mounting this base unit on the panel of the control panel Base mounting hole Q52B Q55B Q65B Q68B and Q612B For M4 screw QA1S65B and QA1S68B For M5 screw DIN rail adapter e mounting hole DIN ra
2. nn Wa POWER DY Y YY YUU UU WOU VEU UY j Kal Oo lt PULL I MITSUBISHI 115 4 53 k 55 2 2 17 R Unit mm inch 3 Power Supply Module Q61SP F MELSEC mr o POWER INPUT Q61SP 100 240VAC SE AN Es ei o E 90 3 54 14 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch App 7 App 7 APPENDICES 4 Power Supply Module A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P A MELSEC Q 6 5 0 26 App 8 w 130 5 12 MELSEC A een 93 6 3 69 POWER MITSUBISHI O INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC DC 5V 5A 105VA 50 60Hz 54 5 2 15 Unit mm inch App 8 APPENDICES APPENDIX 2 3 Main base unit 1 Main Base Unit Q33B E screws M4 x14 T o c z A z D S E f A A i eh Eie AAA Zo i ih Ul olo 4 dh Hy qe CO Fpl Qo bows Sa roo Lenz LO T amp gL O V o 0
3. 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU CPU DUU e Individual information corresponding to error codes SDO is stored here File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABODEFGH IJK SD16 Drive b15 to b8 b7 to bO SD17 ae DI SD18 File name 44H D 43H C SD19 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD20 48H H 47H G SD21 Extension 2EH dont 2EH SD22 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD23 SD24 Vacant SD25 SD26 Time value actu1ally measured Number Meaning SD16 Time 1 us units 0 to 999 us SD17 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD18 SD19 SD20 SD21 SD22 Vacant SD23 SD24 SD25 SD26 Program error location Number Meaning SD16 SD17 File name Eitor ae ASCII code 8 characters Errorinoiyigual individual SD20 Extension 2EH S Error New O Rem information information SD21 ASCII code 3 characters SD22 Pattern SD23 Block No SD24 Step No transition No SD25 Sequence step No L SD26 Sequence step No H Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number 0 0
4. n ee CH Q CH 11 78 11 78 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding t rr ndin Number Name Meaning Explanation GE ACPU Ee E ding pI T Infi f SD381 nfonation from Configuration is identical to that for the first module Ethernet 2nd module instruction Information from iti SD382 Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial reception 3rd module status Information from SD383 e Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module Note The internal system software version may differ from the version indicated by the version symbol printed on the case Ina multiple PLC system configuration the PLC number of the spggs Multiple PLC Muttiple PLC SAPs y EW u 7 CHE Stores the internal system software version in ASCII code The data in the lower byte g position is indefinite Higher byte Lower byte The software version is stored Software Internal system in the higher byte position SD392 a ag d i ET S Initial version software version For version A for example 41H is stored host CPU is stored S Initial Ver B or later number number PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 3 System clocks counters Corresponding 8 7 Set by Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation When set ACPU CPU je Following programmable controller CPU
5. base unit Main base unit ei IN OUT Base cover H elZ e x 5 b To connect the extension cable to the next extension base unit remove the seal applied under the IN characters on the base cover IN side of extension base unit c When plugging the extension cable to any base unit hold the connector part of the extension cable Be d After fitting the extension cable always tighten the extension cable connector fixing screws Tightening torque 20N cm be 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION Z g MELSEC Q 3 Disconnection of extension cable When unplugging the extension cable hold and pull the connector part of the extension cable after making sure that the fixing screws have been removed completely 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 S 2 MELSEC Q 9 6 Wiring 9 6 1 The precautions on the wiring D DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or
6. a 2 2avoc osa LY oo Q H 3 Bes 4 Set S 10 IN Q61P A1 HELSEG Q62P 100 240VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 3A 24VDC 0 6A a Zen a 2 24G E E 24VDC 0 54 E rel W 3 ail i 4 De Op 12 A Q62P 8 1 E oven E H 100 120 200 240VAC oureursvocasa A K LW 2 2avoc o 5a HH CD rail O W 3 Be 4 Deene E 18 At GP Q64P 8 1 Ka 7 200 240VAC seca ra 4 Co 3 w 4 Dien E 11 ANE 9 7 6 Q61P A2 12 1 7 24VDC H 2avoc 05a LY le ra 4 D 3 wa 4 DI __ 4 INPUT sage L _ e i 3 Q63P oe 9 gt N EI 50 60Fz 40VA OUTPUT 5VDC 2A 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Application POWER LED 5VDC power indicator LED 1 Turned ON when the whole system operates normally 2 Turned OFF opened when a stop error occurs in the CPU module 2 ERR terminals 3 In a multiple CPU system configuration turned OFF when a stop error occurs in any of the CPU mo
7. TH35 15Fe 15 0 59 Es A A AC ESSENS CVE VT VO VET TAL YT OO DIN rail adaptor E 2 DIN rail TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al Q TH35 15Fe WU DU UU WII DDO UU Keep i S bech H 2 oO VON YE INDIVID E DQ o t A T Example de Q64P Power supply module 115 4 53 Ri Unit mm inch 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 2 Instructions for mounting the base unit When mounting the PLC to an enclosure or similar fully consider its operability maintainability and environmental resistance 1 Module mounting position For enhanced ventilation and ease of module replacement leave the following clearances between the module top bottom and structure parts a In case of main base unit or extension base unit Indicates the panel top wiring we duct or any part position LL g LLII E 30mm ol 1 18 inch or more x 1 Door 20mm 0 79 inch or more 3 7 TI SE AT My 7 Gg 77 7777777 DEE 5mm 0 20 inch or more 2 5mm 0 20 inch or more 2 x1 For wiring duct with 50mm 1 97 inch or less height 40mm 1 58 inch or more for other cases x2 20mm 0 79 inch or more when the adjacent module is not removed and the extension cable is connected 3 80mm 3 15 inch or more for the connector type 4 45mm 1 77 inch or more when the Q7BAT is mounted 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q
8. L R63 In the above table F indicates a forward loop line and R a reverse loop line The bit corresponding to the station number at which the forward or reverse loop error has occurred becomes 1 Example When the forward loop line of station 5 has an error b8 of SD1232 become 1 and when D1232 is monitored its value is 256 100H Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET11 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET 11 stations become 1 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET stations or unconnected become 0 Device Bit number b515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 be b5 b4 b3 b1 SD1202 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L2 SD1203 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L18 D1241 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L34 SD1242 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L50 H a local station goes down during the operation the contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to SD1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special regist
9. Wl i Second character of SD666 Third character of extension extension n 6 Instruction Related Registers Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU p g SD705 e During block operations turning SM705 ON makes it possible to use Mask pattern Mask pattern the mask pattern being stored at SD705 or at SD705 and SD706 if Sp706 double words are being used to operate on all data in the block with the masked values Number of vacant i sn Aa Stores the number of vacant blocks in the communications request i communicati S During SD714 ii Request area for remote terminal modules connected to the execution q MELSECNET MINI S3 registration areas Patterns masked by use of the IMASK instruction are stored in the SD715 following manner IMASK b15 to bi b instruction Mask pattern D715 115 11 2 During execution mask pattern SD716 131 117 SD717 SD717 e For use as replacement for accumulators used in A series programs su New Program No Program No f s Stores the program number of the program to be loaded by the SD720 E EE PLOAD instruction when designated for PLOAD or PLOAD Se S i Designation range 1 to 124 instruction instruction No of vacant registration Stores the number of vacant registration area for the request for area for CC to e a S q S During communication with the intellige
10. 7 0 28 y 0 61 189 7 44 7 5 0 30 44 1 1 74 155 169 0 3 6 65 0 01 Ne 2 Main Base Unit Q35B 4 mountiong screws M4 x14 ane rh Al Ay A TERIER UI a LEY Fees cru dd moot Lea S 98 3 86 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 LS om d i 44 1 1 74 15 5 g 224 5 0 3 8 85 0 01 0 61 245 9 65 3 Main Base Unit Q38B 4 mountiong screws M4 x 14 MELSEC Q Unit mm inch Unit mm inch 98 3 86 ATD G o o o o o o o xj e Ji i i r aye Ply PP Py PE sv Tal ee ey dd de ty 1 dilh qla Ae A A o a E power eeu oa mell mell molt F6 3 15 0 01 75 amp 0 30 T 444 155 308 0 3 12 14 0 01 1 74 P Ee 328 12 92 gt App 9 Unit mm inch App 9 APPENDICES E 4 Main Base Unit Q312B 4 mountiong screws M4 x14 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 m 419 0 3 16 51 0 01 439 17 30 ests E 0 30 44 1 SEH 15 5
11. Confirm memory space Confirm the writing destination specification NO YES Is it able to write a program Y Y 1 3 2 3 11 13 11 13 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Vv Format program memory 11 14 Y Is it able to write a program Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem y Completion MELSEC Q 11 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory card 11 15 The following shows the flowchart that must be followed when the boot operation of the CPU module cannot be performed using the memory card Unable to perform boot operation Is there CPU module error Remove the cause of the error Is it able to perform boot operation Is the drive that stores the parameter file specified Set the DIP switch 2 and 3 to the drive in which the parameter file is stored Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter boot file setup Set a file to boot file setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is a file set with parameter program setup Set a file to program setup Is it able to perform boot operation Is boot operation file stored in the memory card Write a file to the memory card Is it
12. POINTS 1 Always insert the module fixing latch of the module into the module fixing hole Forcing the hook into the hole will damage the module connector and module 2 When using the PLC in a place where there is large vibration or impact screw the CPU module to the base unit Module fixing screw M3 x 12 user prepared 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q b Removal from Q30B Q50B and Q60B Hold the module with both Base unit hands and push the unit fixing hook on the top of the module with a finger until it stops Module connector While pushing the unit fixing hook and using the bottom of the module as a support pull the module toward you Module fixing hole Lift the module upwards and remove the module fixing latch from the module fixing hole g Completion D When the module fixing screw is used always remove the module by removing the module fixing screw and then taking the module fixing latch off the module fixing hole of the base unit Do not try to remove the module forcibly since this may damage the module 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 2 Installation and removal of the module from QA1S60B The procedure for installing and removing the module from the QA1S60B base unit is described below a Installation of module on QA1S60B Insert the module fixing Base unit ye projections into the module Le SS fixing hole in the ba
13. Is the USB driver installed in the personal computer Install the USB driver into the personal computer Is the connection type RS 232 an the CPU communicat with the GX Developer Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Can the CPU Communicate with GX Developer by lowering the baud rate YES Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y explaining a detailed description Completion of the problem 11 12 11 12 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN See MELSEC Q 11 2 14 Flowchart for when unable to write a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when programs cannot be written in the CPU module Unable to write a program Is the DIP switch SW1 set to OFF ON Turn the DIP switch SW1 system protect to OFF ork NO YES Is it able to write a program YES Cancel the password using the GX Developer NO Is the password registered NO Is it able to write a program Perform the following ve Confirm whether the write protect switch is off or not Confirm if it is formatted Confirm the writing destination specification Is the memory program memory Program memory Perform the following Organize file YES Is it able to write a program
14. ON when PKEY instruction is being executed Goes OFF when CR is input or when input character string reaches 32 characters Goes ON when keyboard input is being conducted Goes when keyboard input has been stored at the CPU Instruction execution Instruction execution Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Status change S Status change S Instruction execution S Instruction execution S Instruction execution 11 52 11 SM738 MSG instruction reception flag PID bumpless SM774 processing for complete derivative Selection of link refresh SM775_ processing during COM instruction execution Enable disable SM776 _ Vocal device at CALL Enable disable SM777_ local device in interrupt program CC Link ewen dedicated instruction executable PID bumpless sm7g4 Processing for incomplete derivative 7 Debug SM800 Sampling trace preparation Trace start SM801 start in progress SM802 Sampling trace execution in progress SM803 Sampling trace trigger After trace trigger SM804 z Ori After sampling trace trigger Sate Trace completed OFF Sampling trace JON completed SM806 Status latch preparation TROUBLESHOOTING Meaning Instruction not executed Instruction execution Forces match Does not force match Performs link refresh Performs no
15. 3 Fail safe measures against failure of the PLC Power supply Failure of a CPU module or memory can be detected by the self diagnosis function However failure of I O control area may not be detected by the CPU module In such cases all I O points turn ON or OFF depending on a condition of problem and normal operating conditions and operating safety cannot sometimes be maintained Though Mitsubishi PLCs are manufactured under strict quality control they may cause failure or abnormal operations due to unspecific reasons To prevent the abnormal operation of the whole system machine breakdown and accidents fail safe circuitry against failure of the PLC must be constructed outside the PLC Examples of a system and its fail safe circuitry are described below lt System example gt CPU module Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Input 16 points Power supply Y80 to Y8F i module for fail safe purpose 1 1 The output module for fail safe purpose should be loaded in the last slot of the system Y80 to Y8F in the above system lt Fail safe circuit example gt ON delay timer Internal program Y80 O D SM412 OFF delay timer Ys0 T2 1s External load MC Y81 0 V 24V0 0 5s 0 5s E V d WO avoe f CPU module Output module x2 Ti T2 2 Y80 repeats turning ON and then OFF at 0 5s intervals Use a no contact output module transistor in
16. b In case of slim type main base unit Indicates the panel top wiring duct or any part position Cem I Ri a or more zl Panel gt i i Door e I ia L I 20 mm 20 mm 0 79 inch ol 1 18 inch or more 3 _ or more nT TN Hl Uf 7 TB mm 4 17 mm 0 67 inch or more 2 5 mm 0 20 inch or more 1 For wiring duct with 50 1 97 inch mm or less height 40 mm 1 58 inch or more for other cases 2 The cable of the power supply module of the slim type main base unit protrudes out of the left end of the module Install the module while reserving 17 mm 0 67 inch or more wiring space If the cable sheath is susceptible to damage caused by a structural object or part on the left side of the module take a protective measure with spiral tube or a similar insulator x3 80 mm 3 15 inch mm or more for the connector type 4 45mm 1 77 inch or more when the Q7BAT is mounted 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 3 MELSEC Q Module mounting orientation a Since the PLC generates heat it should be mounted on a well ventilated location in the orientation shown below Vertical Flat Installation surface Mount the base unit on a flat surface If the mounting surface is not even this may strain the printed circuit boards and cause malfunctions Installation of unit in an area where the other devices are installed Av
17. 24th character 23rd character 26th character 25th character 28th character 27th character 30th character 29th character 32nd character 31st character 34th character 33rd character 36th character 35th character 38th character 37th character 40th character 39th character 42nd character 41st character 44th character 43rd character 46th character 45th character 48th character 47th character 50th character 49th character 52nd character 51st character 54th character 53rd character 56th character 55th character 58th character 57th character 60th character 59th character 62nd character 61st character 64th character 63rd character Designate the limit for each PID loop as follows b15 to b1 SD774 Loop16 to Loop2 D775 Loop32 to Loop18 Selects whether or not the data is refreshed when the COM instruction is executed Designation of SD778 is made va id when SM775 turns ON MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Do Corresponding CPU S During execution b15b14 to b5b4 b3 b2 bi b SD778 1 0 0 TEE i UO refresh CC Link refresh MELSECNETHH refresh Automatic refresh of intelligent function modules b15 bit 0 General data processing executed 1 General data processing not executed processing se
18. Mar 2003 SH NA 080037 G Addition Operating Precautions Section 10 4 Section 10 5 Partial correction Safety Precautions About Manuals Chapter 1 Section 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 Section 4 3 5 1 1 5 1 2 6 5 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 6 8 1 3 8 1 5 9 1 9 2 Section 9 3 1 9 3 2 Chapter 10 Section 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 4 10 5 Section 11 2 16 11 2 17 11 3 2 11 6 11 7 Appendix 1 2 3 1 3 2 3 3 Jul 2003 SH NA 080037 H Addition Appendix 4 4 1 4 2 Partial correction Safety Precautions Section 2 1 Section 7 2 7 6 Section 9 3 1 9 3 2 Section 10 3 1 10 3 2 10 4 10 5 Section 11 3 2 11 7 This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent Japanese Manual Version SH 080019 K licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 1999 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series of General Purpose Programmable Controllers Please read this manual carefully so that equipment is used to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PREGAW TIONS ts aen unt eege engt edveratdedt cet eege ie eege ee ee let A 1 RIAA OIN e Ae esgeeggeg A EENE tech as ae he Bie ccna he thet uta Ee e EE et se bk eet is A 6 GONTIEN TS e EE EE ee A 7 AOU MIAME EE A 18 Howto Use
19. To use the slim type main base unit and slim type power supply module pay attention to the capacity of the 5VDC power supply 5VDC Rated output current Q61SP 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 3 When the base unit is of QA1S6DB Power supply module Base unit A1S61PN A1S62PN A1S63P QA1S65B and QA1S68B UO module A1SX10 A1SY10 etc Special function module peripheral devices A1SD61 A1SD75P1 S3 etc AD75TU 2 2 Select the power supply module also in consideration of the current consumption of the peripheral devices connected to the special function module For example when the AD75TU is connected to the A1SD75P1 S3 the current consumption of the AD75TU must also be taken into account 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power supply Be sure of the following terms when connecting the High Performance model QCPU system to the uninterruptive power supply abbreviated as UPS hereafter Use a UPS which employs the constant inverter power supply method with 5 or less voltage fluctuation Do not use a UPS with the constant commercial power supply method 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 2 Names of Parts and Settings MELSEC Q The names of the parts of each power supply module are described below 1 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P Q61SP 1 HELSEC Q81P A1 100 120VAC 50 60Hz 105VA OUTPUT 5VDC 6A
20. 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 4 Power supply module Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short circuiting them 8 1 5 When using QA1S6 L B type base unit 1 Cable a Earthing of shielded cable e Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the unit as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed e Take appropriate measures so the shield that was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel over a large contact surface area A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp St section Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Clamp fitting Paint mask Shielded cable Shielded cable Wire Crimp terminal 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q b Positioning modules Precautions to be followed when the machinery conforming to the EMC Directive is configured using the A1SD75P1 S3 A1SD75P2 S3 A1SD75P3 S3 hereafter referred to as the A1SD75 are described below 1 When wiring with a 2 m 6 56 ft or less cable e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable cl
21. Goes ON when measurement of step transition watchdog timer is commenced e Resets step transition watchdog timer when it goes OFF When Set Comes ON when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer e When this relay goes from OFF to ON clock data being stored from SD210 to SD213 after execution of END instruction for changed scan is written to the clock device Displays clock data as month day hour minute and second at the LED display at front of CPU module Enabled only for Q3ACPU and Q4ACPU MELSEC Q S Request M9026 Q3A U M9027 Q4A Q4AR Clock data read OFF Ignored e When this relay is ON clock data is read to SD210 to SE ON Read request D213 as BCD values E Ee EE SM240 No 1 CPU reset flag SM241 No 2 CPU reset flag SM242 No 3 CPU reset flag SM243 No 4 CPU reset flag SM244 No 1 CPU error flag 11 46 OFF No 1 CPU reset cancel ON No 1 CPU resetting OFF No 2 CPU reset cancel ON No 2 CPU resetting OFF No 3 CPU reset cancel ON No 3 CPU resetting OFF No 4 CPU reset cancel ON No 4 CPU resetting OFF No 1 CPU normal ON No 1 CPU during stop error Goes OFF when reset of the No 1 CPU is canceled Comes ON when the No 1 CPU is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs are also put in reset status Goes OFF when reset of the No 2 CPU is canceled e Comes ON when the No 2 CPU i
22. Insulation Main power PLC power transformer supply supply WE SE N AT 200VAC Or tO Oo CO S PLC l L_T1_ UO power supply MO OS gt O O gt O devices Main circuit device LON O O gt Main circuit device 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION S 2 MELSEC Q b Do not connect the 24VDC outputs of two or more power supply modules in parallel to supply power to one I O module Parallel connection will damage the power supply modules 2 gt 3 fe E Q O gt module O module ia Power supply 24VDC External power supply c 100VAC 200VAC and 24VDC wires should be twisted as dense as possible Connect the modules with the shortest distance Also to reduce the voltage drop to the minimum use the thickest wires possible maximum 2mm d Do not bundle the 100VAC and 24VDC wires with or run them close to the main circuit high voltage large current and I O signal lines Reserve a distance of at least 100 mm from adjacent wires e AS a countermeasure to power surge due to lightening connect a surge absorber for lightening as shown below 1 Separate the ground of the surge absorber for lightening E1 from that of the PLC E2 2 Select a surge absorber for lightening whose power supply voltage does no exceed the maximum allowable circuit voltage even at the time of maximum power supply voltage elevation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 S 2 MELSE
23. Slot No 00 20 40 60 80 ds 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F Power supply NS module CPU module System configuration k The above system assumes that each slot is loading with a 32 point module Maximum number of No extension allowed Extension Stages Maximum number of UO modules to be 5 modules installed Maximum number of A Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Extension base unit Cannot be connected 1 Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P or Q64P cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61SP for the power supply module 2 The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector The extension base unit and GOT cannot be connected Notes 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration This section describes hardware and software packages compatible with QCPU 1 Hardware a The number of modules to be installed and functions are limited depending on the type of the modules Applicable Module Up to 4 in total of inter PLC Q Series MELSECNET H network and remote I O network modules e QU71E71 ope Ethernet interface QJ71E71 B2 Up to 4 units e QU71E71 100 network module Q series CC Link system e QJ61BT11 master local module QU61BT11N No limit Weit os limit Ke E data LV e SS E setting of automatic refresh function not allowed A1SD51S AnS series special function e A1SD21 S1 f module shown on the righ
24. Unit mm inch App 10 Rp APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 4 Slim type main base unit 1 Main Base Unit Q32SB i 754 he d 0 30 441 8 5 101203 j 1 74 0 33 H 3 98 0 01 114 4 49 4 mounting screws M4 x 12 a 98 3 86 3 15 0 01 0 28 Unit mm inch 2 Main Base Unit Q33SB A T ei 2j S V A ES j Sg L l 7 5 0 30 44 i 85 129 0 3 5 08 0 01 1 74 0 33 142 5 59 A 3 Main Base Unit Q35SB 4 mounting screws M4 x12 3 15 0 01 0 28 Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws M4x 12 ry ab Oo Oo oO oo Oo Oo aed ab he Ki K Gel be be Ze A 5 o sv O ya power E men i I i l j 8 be S L Do 7 5 ig 0 30 S i 8 5 184 5 0 3 1 74 0 33 7 26 0 01 197 5 7 78 d Unit mm inch App 11 App 11 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 5 Extension base unit 1 Extension Base Unit Q52B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 WOO 4 31540 01 Unit mm inch 167 0 3 6 57 0 01 189 7 44 Unit mm inch 4 mounting screws M4 x14 o OUT S S NASA sv i HE e i
25. When SM701 is ON output conducted until NUL 00H code of ASCII code is encountered Number of output characters selection OFF Ascending order ON Descending order OFF 16 characters output ON Outputs until NUL 702 Search method e The sort instruction is used to designate whether data should be sorted in ascending order or in descending order SM701 SM703 SM704 SM710 SM712 SM715 SM721 SM722 SM730 SM736 SM737 11 Block comparison Selection of real number instruction processing type CHK instruction priority ranking flag Divided transmission status Transmission processing selection Communication request registration area BUSY signal El flag Comment read completion flag File being accessed BIN DBIN instruction error disabling flag BUSY signal for CC Link communication request registration area execution in progress flag Keyboard input reception flag for PKEY instruction 52 Non match found All match Speed oriented Accuracy oriented Conditions priority Pattern priority Other than during divided processing During divided processing Batch processing Divided processing Communication request to remote terminal module enabled Communication request to remote terminal module disabled During DI During El Comment read not completed Comment read completed File not accessed File being accessed
26. change function Ver B Max loaded I O OFF Ignored e When this relay goes from OFF to ON maximum loaded oe ON Read VO number is read to SD250 E New OeRem OFF No replacement VO change flag ON Replacement After the head VO number of the I O module being replaced is set in SD251 is set on line O module replace ment is enabled when this relay is ON Only one module can be replaced at each setting e To replace an I O module in the RUN status use the program or a peripheral device to turn this relay ON to replace an I O module in the STOP status turn this relay ON in the test mode of a peripheral device Do not switch between RUN and STOP status until WO module replacement is completed Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR U END M9094 sm252 VO change ok OFF Replacement prohibited Goes ON when VO replacement is OK S END ON Replacement enabled All stations OFF Refresh arrival station refresh command JON Refresh all stations OFF Operative network ON Standby network OFF Reads ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Operative network ON Standby network ON Does not read ON Does not write OFF Normal ON Error MELSECNET 10 module 1 information MELSECNET 10 module 2 information MELSECNET 10 module 3 informati
27. e High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations This manual uses the following general names and abbreviations in the descriptions of the High Performance model QCPU unless otherwise specified Generic Term Abbreviation High Performance model General name for QOD2CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU QCPU modules Abbreviation for Mitsubishi MELSEC Q Series Programmable Logic Controller EE for small types of Mitsubishi MELSEC A Series Programmable Logic GX Developer General name for GX Developer Version 4 or later General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B and Q312B type main base unit with High Q30B Performance model QCPU and Q Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable General name for Q32SB Q33SB and Q35SB slim type main base unit with High Q301SB Performance model QCPU and slim type power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable and intelligent function module attachable Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable power supply module I O module and special function module attachable General name for Q33B Q35B Q38B and Q312B type main base unit with High Main base unit Performance model QCPU and Q Series power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable General name for Q32SB Q33SB and Q35SB sli
28. CAN T SET I Program error location x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 4100 OPERATION ERROR Program error location Flicker continue When instruction is executed 2 The CPU operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly ee E OPERATION ERROR Program error location i 4101 continue When instruction is executed 2 Stop When instruction is executed When instruction is executed When instruction is executed When instruction is executed When instruction is executed Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4200 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location 4201 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location 4202 4203 FOR NEXT ERROR Program error location 4210 4211 4212 4213 4220 CAN T EXECUTE P Program error location 4221 CAN T EXECUTE I Program error location 4223 4230 4231 INST FORMAT ERR Program error location 4235 EA 4021 4030 _ on zm EH E E 4230 EI L 201 11 33 11 33 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSE Ci wn 1 The program contains an instruction code that cannot be 4000 decoded 2 An unusable instruction is included in the program not an SFC program 1 The extension instruction designated by the program has an 4002 incorrect instruction name 2 The extension instruction specified in the program cannot be R g A executed by th
29. Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch SWITZERLAND GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 Kat 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net TURKEY CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St EL 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua Electrotechnical RUSSIA Systems Siberia Shetinkina St 33 Office 116 RU 630088 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 22 03 05 Fax 7 3832 22 03 05 e mail info eltechsystems ru Elektrostyle ul Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscow Phone 7 095 514 9316 Fax 7 095 514 9317 e mail info estl ru Elektrostyle Krasnij Prospekt 220 1 Office No 312 RU 630049 Novosibirsk Phone 7 3832 10 66 18 Fax 7 3832 10 66 26 e mail info estl ru ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mail mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra ul Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru SSMP Rosgidromontazh Ltd 23 Lesoparkovaya Str RU 344041 Rostov On Don Phone 7 8632 36 00 22 Fax 7 8632 36 00 26 e mail STC Drive Technique RUSSIA ul Bajkalskaja 239 Office 2 23 RU 664075 Irkutsk Phone 7 3952 24 38 16 Fax 7 3952 23 02 98 e mai
30. Fileregister 11 68 11 68 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Explanation Time value set SD6 Number Meaning SD7 SD5 Time 1 ue units 0 to 999 us SD8 SD6 Time 1 ms units 0 to 65535 ms SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant D12 SD12 SD13 SD14 D14 SD15 Program error location Number Meaning SD5 SD6 File name S Error New O Rem SD7 ASCII code 8 characters SD8 SD9 Extension 2EH SD10 ASCII code 3 characters SD11 Pattern x4 SD12 Block No SD13 Step No transition No SD14 Sequence step No L SD15 Sequence step No H 4 Contents of pattern data Error 1514 too 43210 le Bit number Error common olo to 0 O se se sk ee information __SFC block designati t information Not used a absent 0 ek SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 SD15 Switch cause Number Meaning Switch cause 0 automatic switch 1 manual switch Switch direction 0 standby system to control system 1 control system to standby system Tracking flag 5 Vacant S Error New Q4AR 5 Tracking flag contents Shows whether or not the tracking data is valid 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bitnumber ojo to ojoj kl Invalid work data Not used invalid 0 valid 1 System data SFC active step information invalid 0 valid 1 Switching cause invalid 0 valid 1 11 69 11 69
31. MITSUBISHI CABLE INDUSTRIES LTD 5C 2V CCY for the coaxial cables MELSECNET H module Radiated noise in the range of 30MHz or higher can be suppressed by use of the double shielded coaxial cables Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet module FL net module Web server module Precautions for using AUI cables twisted pair cables and coaxial cables are described below a Always earth the AUI cables connected to the 10BASE5 connectors Because the AUI cable is of the shielded type strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below AUI cable Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield b Use shielded twisted pair cables as the twisted pair cables connected to the 10BASE T 100BASE TX connectors For the shielded twisted pair cables strip part of the outer cover and earth the exposed shield section to the ground on the widest contact surface as shown below Shielded twisted pair cables Shield Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield c Always use double shielded coaxial cables as the coaxial cables connected to the 10BASE2 connectors Earth the double shielded coaxial cable by connecting its outer shield to the ground Shield here Refer to 1 for the earthing of the shield Ethernet is the
32. PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop GER or ON Resey PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number At power ON Reset PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number At poer ON TESSY LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number At power ON Reset x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 29 11 29 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Scie The automatic refresh range of the multiple CPU system exceeded the file register capacity The number of devices set at the parameter device settings exceeds the possible CPU module range 3004 The parameter file is incorrect Alternatively the contents of the file are not parameters 1 The high speed interrupt parameter is set in a QO2CPU 2 The high speed parameter is set in a multiple CPU system 3 a high speed interrupt parameter is set when a QA1SLIB or B is used 4 No module is installed at the I O address designated by the high speed interrupt parameter In a multiple CPU system the modules for AnS A Q2AS and QnA have been set to multiple control CPUs 3010 The parameter set number of CPU modules differs from the actual number in a multiple CPU system 3012 Multiple CPU setting or control CPU setting differs from that of the reference CPU in a multiple CPU system Multiple CPU automatic re
33. SM51 and SM52 are energized To identify the specific battery of the memory of which voltage is lowered check the contents of the special resisters SD51 and SD52 When the voltage of the battery of each memory is lowered the bit corresponding to each of SD51 and SD52 memories is turned on Bit No of SD51 and SD52 CPU module Bit 1 2 SRAM card POINTS The relation between the backups of the memories preformed by the batteries which are installed on the CPU module and SRAM card is described below The items that must be considered are the following two points 1 The battery installed on the CPU module cannot backup the memory of the SRAM card 2 The battery installed on the SRAM card cannot backup the memory of the CPU module Power supply Battery of CPU Battery of Memory of CPU Memory of Module Module SRAM Card Module SRAM Card Connection Unconnection Connection Unconnection O Backup enable X Backup unable The standard service life and replacement procedures of the battery is described on the next page 10 4 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 1 Battery life 1 Battery Q6BAT Q7BAT lives of CPU modules The battery lives change depending on the serial No first five digits and type of the CPU module a The following table indicates the battery lives of the CPU modules 1 CPU modules whose first five digits of serial No are 05011 or later SEL CPU Module Type Time Ratio G
34. SUPPLY RUN STOP circuit Oil interlocked with SM403 CG H HEUSE Set time for DC power supply to be established run monitor relay Voltage relay is recommended T Low battery alarm at Lamp or buzzer In awd meee Le mre seen OFF at stop error POWER SUPPLY ERR from ERR MODULE H GA tee ened OUTPUT MODULE Luc Eme Interlock circuits asnecessary Ny A Provide external interlock Power to output equipment circuits for conflicting operations switched OFF when ERR such as forward rotation and if 7 contact turns OFF reverse rotation and for parts MC2 that could damage the machine 4 0 4 fic l In the case of an or cause accidents if no interlock MT emergency stop or a stop were used hb MC1 caused by a limit switch t fic 4 The power ON procedure is as follows For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5s 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q
35. The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Not used Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Device comments QCD Not used Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File R QDR Not used Trace QTS Not used Not used Not used Not used Not used Drive 3 4 use Drive 3 4 use conditions conditions S Status change SD624 T The use conditions for memory card B are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Simulation data QDS Memory card Memory card Parameters QPA CPU fault history QFD Buse Buse Device comments QCD SFC trace QTR conditions conditions Device initial value QDI Local device QDL File R QDR Not used Sampling trace QTS Not used Status latch QTL Not used b Program trace QTP Not used 7 Fil i D640 Stores drive number being used by file register S Initial D641 Stores file register file name with extension selected at parameters D642 or by use of QDRSET instruction as ASCII code D643 b15 to b8 b7 to bO SD641 Second character First character D644 File register File register SD642 Fourth character Third character 7 D645 file name file name SD643 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial New SD644 Eighth character Seventh character SD645 First character of extension 2EH i Second character of
36. eecececeeceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeaeeeeeeaecaecaeeseeeaesaesaeseeesaeeaesaeseeesaeeeseateaeas 11 43 11 6 Special Relay iSt iroi secu iesse dE Eden Edge aoa EES 11 44 14 7 Special Register List ci aved ct ved ia eins Gl Win ave a rave SUE dative AUR av 11 66 APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing s ssssssssssnessrerneennrenenne App 1 APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation cccecceceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeaeeesaaeeeeaeeeeeeeeseeeaes App 1 APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH ssssssssssssessessnesenesees App 2 APPENDIX 2 External DIMENSIONS cinien ieaiai atina ina iiai App 6 APPENDIX 2 T GRU Mi OGUIG r r a Sie eet e iere ete a a etter ee D App 6 APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module cceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeaeeeeeaeeeueeseaeeeeaeeeeaaeseeaeeeeaeeseaeeseeees App 6 APPENDIX 2 3 Mam base unt App 9 APPENDIX 2 4 Slim type Main base unt App 11 APPENDIX 2 5 Extension base un App 12 APPENDIX 3 Upgraded Functions of High Performance Model OCL App 15 APPENDIX 3 1 Specification comparison cceccesseeseceseceseeeeesececeaeesaeecaeesseeeaeeseeesaeesieesneesieeeeeees App 15 APPENDIX 3 2 Function comparison aaa aaaea a aaa Ta aaa aa TaN aeaa a aa aaaea aiiaA App 15 APPENDIX 3 3 Added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions App 16 APPENDIX 4 Transportation Precautions 0 ceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeae
37. i Q4A Memory card B gt OFF eeh ene enabled Goes ON when memory card B cannot be inserted or remove insert ON Remove insert U d Q4AR prohibit flag prohibited remove sM640 File registeruse OFF Fie register notused Goes ON when file register is in use Se New ON File register in use change SM650 Commentuse OFF File register notused Goes ON when comment file is in use S Status New ON File register in use change OFF Internal memory SM660_ Boot operation execution Goes ON while boot operation is in process S Status New ON Boot operation in Goes OFF if boot designation switch is OFF change progress Goes ON when access is made to area outside the range OFF Within access range of file register R of memory card A ON Outside access range Set within END processing e Reset at user program Goes ON when access is made outside the range of file Q2A S1 OFF Within access range registers R of memory card B Q3A ON Outside access range Set within END processing Q4A Reset at user program Q4AR Memory card A file register access range flag Memory card B file register access range flag 11 51 11 51 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 6 Instruction Related Special Relays Meaning Explanation When Set OFF Carry OFF SM700 Carry flag ON Carry ON e Carry flag used in application instruction Instruction execution e When SM701 is OFF 16 characters of ASCII code are output
38. le Stores the wait time for constant scan setting into SD542 Constant scan time in 1 ms units and SD543 Measurement is made in 100us units wait time Constant scan wait SD542 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 time in 100 us units SD543 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Maximum scan time Maximum scan time in 100 us units END processing time in 100 us units processing 11 80 11 80 11 Sve execution type programs Cumulative execution time for low speed S S S Execution time for low speed execution type rograms sps47 P9 SD548 Scan execution type program D549 execution time Service interval D550 measurement module S S D544 D545 D546 551 Service interval time 11 81 TROUBLESHOOTING Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Cumulative execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 1 ms units Execution time for low speed execution type programs in 100 us units Scan execution type program execution time in 1 ms units Scan execution type program execution time in 100 us units Unit module No Module service interval in 1 ms units Module service interval in 100 us units MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding ACPU DU Set by When set Corres
39. perform reset operation Local station Stores conditions for Stores the local station numbers which are in STOP or D1212 p up to numbers 1 to PAUSE mode operation status 1 6 Device ge number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 bi Stores conditions sp1212 Lt6 L15 L14 L13 L12 L41 L10 L7 L6 L5 L2 Local station SD1213 up to numbers 17 D1213 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L23 L22 L21 L18 operation status D1214 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 42 L471 L40 L39 L38 L37 L34 32 D1215 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L55 L54 L53 L50 Stores conditions for When a local station is switched to STOP or PAUSE D1214 Local station up to numbers 33 i i i i operation status p mode the bit corresponding to the station number in 48 the register becomes 1 di Example When station 7 switches to STOP mode Stores conditions for fj Za Local station b6 in SD1212 becomes 1 and when D9215 SD1215 i up to numbers 49 to f z WCS operation status 64 D1212 is monitored its value is 64 40H D9205 D9206 Stores the number of retry times due to transmission D9210 SD1210 Number of Stored as cumulative error retries value Count stops at maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation D9211 D9212 D9213 D9214 11 96 11 96 11 ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D9222 SD12
40. since the LG terminals have potential the operator may receive an electric shock when touching metal parts 3 1 An error cannot be output from the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the extension base To output an error use the ERR terminal of the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION D DANGER Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of a battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Turn the power off when cleaning the module or tightening the terminal screws or module mounting screws Conducting these operations when the power is on could result in electric shock Loose terminal screws may cause short circuits or malfunctions Failure to mount the module properly will result in short circuit malfunction or in the module falling CAUTION In order to ensure safe operation read the manual carefully to acquaint yourself with procedures for program change forced outputs RUN STOP and PAUSE operations etc while operation is in progress Operation mistakes could cause damage to the equipment and other problems Never try to disassemble of modify module It may cause product failure malfunction fire or ca
41. the provided QCPU QnACPU special relay When W is provided the converted special relay can be used for the device number When Ais provided the device number does not work with QCPU QnACPU Special Relay List ACPU Special Special Applicable Special Relay after Relay for Name Meaning Details CPU Relay Conversion Modification e Turned on when there is one or more output units of which fuse has been blown M9000 Leven Fuse blown Normal e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal Module with blown fuse thereafter Output modules of remote I O stations are also checked fore fuse condition e Turned on if the status of I O module is different form entered status when power is turned on e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal UO module Normal thereafter M9002 SE verification error Error e UO module verification is done also to remote I O station modules e Reset is enabled only when special registers SD1116 to SD1123 are reset Goes ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even one of the installed AJ71PT32 S3 modules M90947 SM11004 Zeene e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module e Reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within M9005 SM1005 AG DOWN PAO DOWN notdetected 10ms occurs dur
42. the wire itself carries a large noise content and thus short wiring means that the wire is prevented from acting as an antenna b The earth wire led from the earthing point must be twisted with the power supply wires By twisting with the earthing wire noise flowing from the power supply wires can be relieved to the earthing However if a filter is installed on the power supply wires the wires and the earthing wire may not need to be twisted 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 3 Cables MELSEC Q The cables extracted from the control panel contain a high frequency noise component On the outside of the control panel therefore they serve as antennas to emit noise To prevent noise emission use shielded cable for the cables which are connected to the I O modules and intelligent function modules and may be extracted to the outside of the control panel The use of a shielded cable also increases noise resistance The signal lines connected to the PLC I O modules and intelligent function modules use shielded cables to assure noise resistance under the conditions where the shield is earthed If a shielded cable is not used or not earthed correctly the noise resistance will not meet the specified requirements When the shield of a shielded cable is earthed to the cabinet body please ensure that the shield contact with the body is over a large surface area If the cabinet body is painted it will be necessary to remove paint from the
43. which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by executing or instruction or moving INDICATOR RESET switch on CPU module front to ON position If another F number has been detected clearing of SD62 stores the next F number into SD62 When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Thereafter each time operation error occurs the contents of SD1010 are renewed 11 89 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Special Correspondin Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details p 9 8 ae CPU Conversion Conversion Modification When operation error has occurred during execution of application instruction the step number at which Step number at g D9011 SD1011 Eirorsie Which operation the error has occurred is stored in BIN code Since p teg GE o c tred the step number is stored into SD1011 when SM1011 turns from OFF to ON the data of SD1011 is not updated unless SM1011 is cleared by a user program NG The I O control mode set is returned in any of the following numbers UO control mode D9014 D1014 UO control mode Luten 0 Both input and output in direct mode 1 Input in refresh mode output in direct mode 3 Both input and output in refresh mode The operation status of CPU as shown
44. 00 years 5 00 years 2 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 4 days 1 The power on time ratio indicates the ratio of PLC power on time to one day 24 hours When the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 2 The guaranteed value is a value at the storage ambient temperature of 25 to 75 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C 3 The actual operation value is a value at the storage ambient temperature of 40 C operating ambient temperature of 25 C b When the battery Q6BAT Q7BAT is not connected to the CPU module its service life is five years c When the battery low special relay SM52 turns on immediately change the battery However if the alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to change the battery periodically according to the operating condition 10 6 10 6 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 2 SRAM card battery life The SRAM card battery life changes depending on the combination of the serial number first 5 digits of the CPU module and the manufacturing control number of the memory card The SRAM card battery life is indicated below a CPU module whose serial number s first 5 digits are 04012 or later Energization Battery life After SM52 1 ized SRAM card Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use a Geen Guaranteed time after 4 MIN TYP alarm occurrence Q2MEM 1MBS d 690hr 6336hr Manufacturing 0 0 07year
45. 11 64 11 64 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued R 3 Set by ACPU Applicable S M1734 SM1734 Block 23 M1735 SM1735 Block 24 M1736 M1736 Block 25 M1737 M1737 Block 26 M1738 M1738 Block 27 M1739 M1739 Block 28 M1740 M1740 Block 29 M1741 M1741 Block 30 M1742 M1742 Block 31 M1743 M1743 Block 32 M1744 M1744 Block 33 M1745 M1745 Block 34 M1746 M1746 Block 35 M1747 M1747 Block 36 M1748 M1748 Block 37 M1749 SM1749 Block 38 M1750 SM1750 Block 39 M1751 SM1751 Block 40 M1752 SM1752 Block 41 M1753 OFF Transmission SM1753 Block 42 Oneiscan tums on when the M1754 Transmission trigger uncompleted SM1754 Block 43 EN S status New Q4AR M1755 lend flag ON Transmission SM1755 Ee data transmission change pleted M1756 end SM1756 M1757 SM1757 M1758 SM1758 M1759 SM1759 M1760 SM1760 M1761 SM1761 M1762 SM1762 M1763 SM1763 M1764 SM1764 M1765 SM1765 M1766 SM1766 M1767 SM1767 M1768 SM1768 M1769 SM1769 M1770 SM1770 M1771 SM1771 M1772 SM1772 M1773 SM1773 M1774 SM1774 M1775 SM1775 11 65 11 65 SM1734 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 7 Special Register List 11 66 The special registers SD are internal registers with fixed applications in the PLC For this reason it is not possible to use these registers in sequence programs in the same way that normal registers are used However data can be written as needed in order to control the CPU modules an
46. 11 A 11 4 8 4 Real numbers floating decimal point data 4 9 Character String Data 5 ASSIGNMENT OF I O NUMBERS 5 1 Relationship Between the Number of Stages and Slots of the Extension Base Unit 5 2 Installing Extension Base Units and Setting the Number of Stages 5 3 Base Unit Assignment Base Mode 5 4 What are I O Numbers 5 5 Concept of I O Number Assignment 5 5 1 WO numbers of main base unit and extension base units 5 5 2 Remote station UO number 5 6 I O Assignment by GX Developer 5 6 1 Purpose of I O assignment by GX Developer 5 6 2 Concept of I O assignment using GX Developer 5 7 Examples of I O Number Assignment 5 8 Checking the I O Numbers 6 MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 6 1 About the High Performance model QCPU s Memory 6 2 Program Memory 6 3 About the Standard ROM 6 4 About the Standard RAM 6 5 Memory Card 6 6 Writing Data to the Standard ROM or the Flash Card 6 6 1 Writing Data to the standard ROM or to the Flash card using GX Developer 6 6 2 Automatic write to standard ROM Auto Down load all data from Memory card to standard ROM 6 7 Executing Standard ROM Memory Card Programs Boot Run 6 8 Program File Configuration 6 9 GX Developer File Operation and File Handling Precautions 6 9 1 File operation 6 9 2 File handling precautions 6 9 3 File capacity 6 9 4 Memory capacity for files 7 FUNCTION 7 1 Function List 7 2 Constant Scan 7 3 Latch Functions 7 4 Setting the Output Y Status w
47. 2nd S extensi 5 stage ZS a 3rd extension stage In this system 32 point modules are loaded on slots 0 to 25 For the I O number setting method using GX Developer refer to the Operating Manual of GX Developer For details of I O number allocation refer to the following manual e High Performance Model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals For the extension using the Q50B Q6BOB and QA1S6LB allocate the I O numbers on the modules starting from the Q series module installed on the Q50B Q6LB base unit lt Example gt Where 32 modules are installed in all slots with the configuration shown below Q38B main base unit 00 to FF oe extension base unit 100 to 1FF QA1S68B extension base unit 200 to 2FF H QA1S68B extension base unit 300 to 3FF 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 5 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units Q50B Since the Q5DB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module on the main base unit a voltage drop occurs at extension cables Improper I O may be provided if the specified voltage 4 75VDC or higher is not supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B When using the Q50B make sure that the IN connector of the Q5DB is supplied with 4 75VDC or higher And it is recommend to connect it with the shortest possible extension cable right after connecting the main base unit so as to minimize th
48. 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS Performance specification of PLC is as follows Specifications Operating ambient temperature Storage ambient temperature Operating ambient 3 S 5 to 95 RH 4 non condensing humidity Storage ambient Pa 5 to 95 RH 4 non condensing humidity Frequency Acceleration Amplitude Under 0 075mm Conforming 10 to 57Hz l intermittent 0 003inch to D 2 10 times each in Vibration resistance vibration 57to150Hz ans JIS B 3502 57 to 150Hz m s X Y Z directions continuous 0 001 inch vibration 5710150Hz aus Conforming to JIS B 3502 IEC 61131 2 147 me 3 times in each of 3 directions X Y Z No corrosive gases 2000m 6562ft max Installation location Inside control panel Overvoltage Il max category 1 Pollution level x2 x1 This indicates the section of the power supply to which the equipment is assumed to be connected between the public electrical power distribution network and the machinery within premises Category II applies to equipment for which electrical power is supplied from fixed facilities The surge voltage withstand level for up to the rated voltage of 300 V is 2500 V 2 This index indicates the degree to which conductive material is generated in terms of the environment in which the equipment is used Pollution level 2 is when only non conductive pollution occurs A temporary conductivity caused by condensing must be expected occasionall
49. 9 d F 10 JL 13 14 15 11 1 12 When opening the front cover put your finger here Side face 16 i x1 Not provided for Q02CPU 4 4 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Application Module fixing hook Hook used to fix the module to the base unit Single motion installation Indicates the mode of the CPU module 2 Mode LED ON green Q mode ON orange A mode Flicker green Enforced ON OFF for external I O registered Indicates the operating status of the CPU module ON During operation with the RUN STOP switch set to RUN OFF During a stop with the RUN STOP switch set to STOP Flicker When parameter program is written at STOP and RUN STOP switch is changed from STOP to RUN To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the program carry out the following steps e Set the RUN STOP switch from RUN gt STOP RUN 3 VRUN LED e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power To turn ON the RUN LED after writing the parameters carry out the following steps e Reset with the RESET L CLR switch e Restart the PLC power If the RUN STOP switch is set from RUN gt STOP gt RUN after changing the par
50. A1SJ71QE71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Ethernet interface module A1SJ71E71 B2 S3 B5 S3 Serial communication module i A1SJ71QC24 N A1SJ71UC24 R2 R4 PRF computer link module CC Link master local module A1SJ61QBT11 A1SJ61BT11 Modem interface module A1SJ71CMO S3 ME NET interface module A1SJ71ME81 e A dedicated instruction for the next module which was present in the QnA A series program instruction cannot be used for the High Performance model QCPU Re writing using FROM TO instruction is required f Some system configurations and functions are restricted when writing the parameter of the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting Refer to the following manual for the restrictions when the parameter of the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting has been written e High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Note that the above restrictions do not apply to the High Performance model QCPU of serial number 04011 or earlier since it ignores the High speed interrupt fixed scan interval setting 2 Software package GX Developer that can use the functions added to the High Performance model QCPU changes depending on the function version serial number of the CPU module Serial Number GX Developer AL Version 4 SWAD5C GPPW E or later Functions added to 02092 Version 6 SW6D5C GPPW E or later Functions added to 03052 Version 7 SW
51. CLR switch or run the LEDR instruction and the BAT LED will turns off 11 8 11 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering 11 9 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the BOOT LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation BOOT LED flickering Power off the PLC Remove the memory card Move the DIP switches SW2 and SW3 of the CPU module to ON Power on the PLC Is the BOOT LED turned on CPU module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion of automatic write from memory card to standard ROM Perform boot operation from standard ROM 11 9 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on 11 10 The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output module LED does not turn on during PLC operation Output module LED not turned on NO Flickering Is the MODE LED on Refer to Section 11 2 3 YES Is the LED on when it is monitored on GX Developer NO Reexamine the program YES Check the input output number on the GX Developer system monitor Does the output number match NO a Change the output number j
52. Error detection performed Error detection not performed Request for communication with intelligent device station enabled Request for communication with intelligent device station disabled Instruction not executed Instruction execution Keyboard input reception enabled ON Keyboard input reception disabled Goes ON when all data conditions have been met for the BKCMP instruction e When SM707 is OFF real number instructions are processed at high speed e When it is ON real number instructions are processed with high accuracy Remains as originally set when OFF e CHK priorities updated when ON In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when screen is split for transfer and goes OFF when split processing is completed In processing of AD57 S1 goes ON when canvas screen is divided for transfer e Used to determine whether communications requests to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 can be executed or not e ON when EIl instruction is being executed Turns on only during one scan when the processing of the COMRD or PRC instruction is completed Switches ON while a file is being accessed by the S FWRITE S FREAD COMRD PRC or LEDC instruction e Turned ON when OPERATION ERROR is suppressed for BIN or DBIN instruction e Used for determination whether to enable or disable the communication request for the intelligent device station connected with CC Link module
53. Number Name Meaning Explanation y ACPU Gedeelt When set Dal N f S SD302 Device umber of points Stores the number of points currently set for D devices allocated for D allocation DEER mber of points es SD303 Same as a P Stores the number of points currently set for W devices S Initial allocated for W parameter Nambr oibo mber of points SD304 contents pal Stores the number of points currently set for SW devices allocated for SW Reserves the designated time for communication processing with GX Developer or other units The greater the value is designated the shorter the response time reserved for Time reserved for for communication with other devices GX Developer serial communicat communication communication units becomes Setting range 1 to 100 ms If the designated value is out of the range above it is assumed to no setting The scan time becomes longer by the designated time D342 e Network No of mounted Ethernet module D343 e Group No of mounted Ethernet module D344 e Station No of mounted Ethernet module S Initial tion of 1st SE D345 to D346 END processing n Ethernet With QCPU the Ethernet IP address of the 1st module is stored information in buffer memory n D347 With QCPU the Ethernet error code of the 1st module is read with the ERRORRD instruction D34 Inf ion from 2 348 lo Nformatiori trom 2nd Configuration is identical to that for the first modul
54. O station modules M9007 Goes ON if even one annunciator F goes ON Instruction execution Goes ON if error is detected by CHK instruction S e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal Instruction thereafter execution 11 45 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Number SM90 SM91 SM92 Startup of SM93__ watchdog timer for step transition Enabled only when SFC program exists Meaning OFF Not started watchdog timer reset ON Started watchdog timer started 2 System information LED OFF e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the LEDs SE e corresponding to the individual bits at SD202 go off SM203 STOP contact _ STOP status Goes ON at STOP status Sg M9042 S Status SM204 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Goes ON at PAUSE status change M9041 SM205 SEEDER STEP RUN status Goes ON at STEP RUN status S Status M9054 contact change PAUSE enable OFF PAUSE disabled PAUSE status is entered if this relay is ON when the coil ON PAUSE enabled remote PAUSE contact goes ON SM206 Device test request acceptance status SM210 Clock data set request SM211 Clock data error OFF No error ON when error is generated in clock data SD210 to ON Error SD213 value and OFF if no error is detected SM212 Clock data display OFF Device test not yet executed ON Device test executed OFF Ignored ON Set request Special Relay List Continued Explanation Corresponds to SD91
55. SD646 Third character of extension extension D647 e Stores the data capacity of the currently selected file register in 1 k capacity capacity word units change block number block number change drive drive number the QCDSET instruction change S Status change Oil wn Ue n 11 83 11 83 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN ee MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU SE g Do EO Stores the comment file name with extension selected at the parameters or by the QCDSET instruction in ASCII code b15 to b8 b7 to b SD651 Second character First character Comment file Comment file SD652 Fourth character Third character S Status SD653 Sixth character Fifth character change SD654 Eighth character Seventh character SD655 First character of extension 2Ex j Second character of SD656 Third character of extension extension Stores the drive number where the boot designation file QBT i being stored S Initial Boot Stores the file name of the boot designation file QBT operation SD661 S Ju s Fi s z econd character irst character ignation designatio SD662 Fourth character Third character file SD663 Sixth character Fifth character S Initial SD664 Eighth character Seventh character SD665 First character of extension 2Ex n n n el a Q oO n
56. YES Is the LED turned on when another output module is forcibly turned on NO YES CPU module base unit extension NO cable hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Is the LED turned on when the output module is changed for another output module which is then forcibly turned on YES Output module hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 10 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN EE MELSEC Q 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the output load of the output module does not turn on during PLC operation The output load does not turn on Is the operation indicator of output module turned on NO Check output conditions with the monitor mode of the GX Developer YES Is voltage for the power supply load added Is the operation indicator of input module turned on Off Voltage measurement among the modules input and COM terminals OV hat is the voltag among the various output COM terminals of the output module Set the GX Developer in the monitor mode and check that the input signal is OFF Supply voltage Is it reaching the supply voltage
57. a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current When the PLC power supply is switched ON OFF correct control output may not be performed temporarily due to differences in delay time and starting time between the PLC power supply and the external power supply for the controlled object especially DC For example if the external power supply for the controlled object is switched on in a DC output module and then the PLC power supply is switched on the DC output module may provide false output instantaneously at power on of the PLC Therefore it is necessary to make up a circuit that can switch on the PLC power supply first Also an abnormal operation may be performed if an external power supply fault or PLC failure takes place To prevent any of these abnormal operations from lea
58. a voltage becomes unstable we cannot guarantee the operation 5 When an extension cable is used do not bind the cable together with the main circuit high voltage heavy current line or lay them close to each other 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION SE gt 2 MELSEC Q 6 Install the main base unit by screwing in the following procedure 1 Fit the two base unit top mounting screws into the enclosure Panel 2 Place the right hand side notch of the base unit onto the right hand side screw Panel 3 Place the left hand side pear shaped hole onto the left hand side screw UD C 0 Panel 4 Fit the mounting screws into the mounting screw holes in the base unit bottom and retighten the four mounting screws Note1 Install the main base unit to a panel with no module loaded in the right end slot Remove the base unit after unloading the module from the right end slot Note2 The mounting screws that included with the slim type main base unit differ from those included with other types of the base unit When ordering mounting screws for the slim type main base unit specify cross recessed head bind screw M4 x 12 black 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 7 Note the following points when mounting a DIN rail Mounting a DIN rail needs special adaptors optional which are to be user prepared a Applicable adaptor types For Q38B Q312B Q68B Q612B Q
59. and so on that are necessary to create the MELSAP L type SFC programs QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual Structured Text This manual describes the structured text language programming methods sold separately sold separately sold separately sold separately sold separately sold separately Manual Number Model Code SH 080038 13JL98 SH 080039 13JF58 SH 080040 13JF59 SH 080041 13JF60 SH 080076 13JF61 SH 080366E 13JF68 How to Use This Manual This manual is prepared for users to understand the hardware specifications of those modules such as the CPU modules power supply modules and base units maintenance and inspections of the system and troubleshooting required when you use MELSEC Q series PLCs The manual is classified roughly into three sections as shown below 1 Chapters 1 and 2 Describe the outline of the CPU module and the system configuration The basics of the system configuration of CPU module are described 2 Chapters 3to 7 Describe the general specifications indicating the operating environments of the CPU module power supply module and base units and the performance specifications of these modules 3 Chapters 8 to 10 Describe the overall maintenance such as the installation of the CPU module daily inspections and troubleshooting This manual does not explain the functions of the CPU module For these functions refer to the manual shown below
60. any cause found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi chance losses lost profits incurred to the user by Failures of Mitsubishi products damages and secondary damages caused from special reasons regardless of Mitsubishi s expectations compensation for accidents and compensation for damages to products other than Mitsubishi products and other duties 5 Changes in product specifications The specifications given in the catalogs manuals or technical documents are subject to change without prior notice 6 Product application 1 In using the Mitsubishi MELSEC programmable logic controller the usage conditions shall be that the application will not lead to a major accident even if any problem or fault should occur in the programmable logic controller device and that backup and fail safe functions are systematically provided outside of the device for any problem or fault 2 The Mitsubishi general purpose programmable logic controller has been designed and manufactured for applications in general industries etc Thus applications in which the public could be affected such as in nuclear power plants and other power plants operated by respective power companies and applications in which a special quality assurance system is required such as for Railway companies or National Defense purposes shall be excluded from the programmable logic controller applications Note that even with these applications if the user approves that the applicatio
61. control box must be equipped with a lock so that only the personnel who has studied about the electric facility and have enough knowledge can open it b The control box must have a structure which automatically stops the power supply when the box is opened 2 Dustproof and waterproof features The control box also has the dustproof and waterproof functions Insufficient dustproof and waterproof features lower the insulation withstand voltage resulting in insulation destruction The insulation in our PLC is designed to cope with the pollution level 2 so use in an environment with pollustion level 2 or below Pollution level 1 An environment where the air is dry and conductive dust does not exist Pollution level 2 An environment where conductive dust does not usually exist but occasional temporary conductivity occurs due to the accumulated dust Generally this is the level for inside the control box equivalent to IP54 in acontrol room or on the floor of a typical factory Pollution level 3 An environment where conductive dust exits and conductivity may be generated due to the accumulated dust An environment for a typical factory floor Pollution level 4 Continuous conductivity may occur due to rain snow etc An outdoor environment As shown above the PLC can realize the pollution level 2 when stored in a control box equivalent to IP54 8 13 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 5 Grounding MELSEC Q There are the followin
62. control system and the redundant system is not the same standby system e This is a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi 6100 A CPU module tracking memory error was detected during initial representative e When replacing the CPU modules change the standby system CPU first then the control system CPU 6101 e module detected an error during the handshake for Check the condition of the other stations The standby system in a redundant system is switched to the 6200 control system Check the control system condition The control system in a redundant system is switched to the iti 6210 standby system Check the control system condition Q4AR The standby system in a redundant system could not be switched 6220 from the control system to the standby system because of an error Check the standby system condition status or other reason This is a bus switching module hardware fault Therefore change 6221 Switching is disabled because of a bus switching module error the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Switching is disabled because a multiplexed master station of a A 6222 remote I O network was installed in the standby station during initial Check the remote I O network setting The link module mounted on the standby type CPU is the remote x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual i
63. drive Insert or reinsert the memory card Check the memory card type 1 Set to the related station the routing parameter for making access to the specified station 2 Retry after a while or start communication after confirming that the system that will relay the data has started and make a correction Check if an error has occurred in the network module and if the module is offline Check if an error has occurred in the specified access destination or in a relay station to the access station and if so take countermeasures App 5 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 2 External Dimensions APPENDIX 2 1 CPU module nn 98 3 86 89 3 3 52 27 4 1 08 Unit mm inch APPENDIX 2 2 Power supply module 1 Power Supply Module Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q61P A1 POWER 98 3 86 lt PULL MITSUBISHI 55 2 2 17 Unit mm inch App 6 App 6 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 2 Power Supply Module Q64P
64. during initial processing stage When error is generated the head WO number of the special function This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively module that corresponds to the common information is stored The special function module was accessed during the execution of The intelligent function module was accessed in the program but there was no response 1402 a FROM TO instruction set but there was no response When an error is generated the program error location corresponding to the individual information is stored 1 There was no response from the intelligent function module 1403 when the END instruction is executed 2 An error is detected at the intelligent function module When performing a parameter I O allocation a special function 1411 module could not be accessed during initial communications On error occurring the head I O number of the corresponding special function module is stored in the common information The FROM TO instruction set could not be executed due to a 1412 system bus error with a special function module On error occurring the program error location is stored in the individual information In a multiple CPU system configuration the High Performance model
65. erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation The precautions on the connection of the power cables are described below 1 Power supply wiring a Separate the PLC s power supply line from the lines for I O devices and power devices as shown below When there is much noise connect an insulation transformer
66. fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the intelligent function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as a system for the occurrence of a data communication fault should be predetermined between the external device and PLC CPU A CAUTION Do not bunch the control wires or communication cables with the
67. from the battery holder Before installing the SRAM card into the CPU module set the battery holder in the following procedure Model name Set the battery holder s locking switch on this side Battery holder s locking switch to the RELEASE position OC _ KT RELEASE position Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card Set the battery onto the battery holder with the plus face up Insert the battery holder with which the battery is installed firmly into the SRAM card Confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position LOCK position The battery holder s locking switch is set Completion automatically to the LOCK position when the battery holder is removed In its position insert the battery holder firmly 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE For the products sold in European countries the conformance to the EMC Directive which is one of the European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1996 Also conformance to the Low Voltage Directive another European Directive has been a legal obligation since 1997 Manufacturers who recognize their products must conform to the EMC and Low Voltage Directive required to declare that their products conform to these Directives and put a CE mark on their products 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive The EMC Directive specifie
68. guidelines Comply with IATA Dangerous Goods Regulations IMDG code and the local transport regulations when transporting products after unpacking or repacking while Mitsubishi ships products with packages to comply with the transport regulations Also contact the transporters App 17 App 17 INDEX Ind A Allowable momentary power failure period 4 3 ANS SENES vo enee Eed A 12 B Base unit EXt NSlON etade niia 2 3 6 5 6 6 External dimensions diagram App 9 to App 13 Installation and removal of the module sssssseeseeeesnneeeeen 9 14 to 9 17 Installation dimensions sssseessesneeeeeeea 9 12 Installation drechon 9 13 Installation position eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeene 9 12 Names Of parts aneer a 6 3 Dpechtcattons eener 6 1 Battery EC UE IB 7 6 Replacement procedure GPU MOdUIe vices ance ees ces 10 6 Replacement procedure SRAM Gard 10 7 Replacement standard 10 5 Boot operation ccccceseeeeeeeetees 4 7 11 13 C Circuit Fails SANG asen rarere peT Eessen EE 9 5 System design 9 3 9 4 Clock function ccccceseeceseeceseecesseeesseeesseeees 4 3 Constant SCAN ecserin 4 1 Control Method sekserne etureunasta 4 1 CPU Installation and removal ssessesseeseeeenen 9 14 P rOrmanCe e scceehesscuseccedsesei saseeseizesdasce 4 1 D DIN rail installation adapter AAA 9 11 Applicable AAA 9 11 Intervals of installation screws 9 11 E Extension B
69. inputs and LG FG across outputs Dielectric withstand voltage Insulation resistance and FG LG 10Mo or more by insulation resistance tester e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise Noise durability frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU module for CPU module operating status output R I ated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A Geer Minimum Minimum switching load load Pv IMA 1mA GE Life Mechanical More than 20 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current Surge suppressor Applicable wire size 0 75 to 2mm Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89Necm Ho 98mm 3 86inch External ce Iw O 27 4mm 1 08inch dimensions In 104mm 4 09inch Weight 0 18kg Application Contact 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Power Supply Module Specifications Continued E EE 100 to 240VAC ee 24VDC SC 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC 50 60Hz 5 Ma input apparentpower J OVAL CT Max inputpower Le ow Oe Inrush current 20A within 8ms 81A within 1ms Rated output current aoo ww gt i O Overcurrent protection Jang Armored Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Within 4
70. is being stored 11 22 11 22 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating EAR ak Error Messages Information Information peels Siatuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 Al SD16 to 26 x1 RUN ERROR Stop Sr UNIT VERIFY ERR i IR OffOn Flicker On Continue W hen an END instruction is 42 2100 2101 2102 2103 SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit No Off Flicker Stop IA power ON At reset 2104 2105 2106 2107 x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x2 The CPU operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 23 11 23 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SDO x1 The High Performance model QCPU of function version A was loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration 2000 I O module information power ON is changed UO module or special function module not installed properly or installed on the base unit Slot loaded with the QI60 is set to other than the Inteli intelligent function module or Interrupt interrupt module in the parameter I O assignment Error Contents and Cause 1 In the parameter I O allocation settings an Inteli intelligent function module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module or vice versa 2 In the parameter I O allocation settings a module other than CPU or nothing
71. main circuit or power wires or install them close to each other They should be installed 100 mm 3 94 inch or more from each other Not doing so could result in noise that would cause erroneous operation When controlling items like lamp load heater or solenoid valve using an output module large current approximately ten times greater than that present in normal circumstances may flow when the output is turned OFF to ON Take measures such as replacing the module with one having sufficient rated current INSTALLATION PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing extension cables be sure that the connectors of base unit are installed correctly Af
72. new features 1 Controllable multiple I O points All High Performance model QCPUs support 4096 points X YO to FFF as the number of actual I O points capable of getting access to the I O module installed on the base unit They also support 8192 points max X YO to 1FFF as the number of I O devices which can be used in the remote I O stations such as MELSECNET H remote I O NET CC Link data link and MELSECNET MINI S3 data link 2 Lineup according to program capacity The optimum CPU module for the program capacity to be used can be selected QO02CPU QO2HCPU 28k step QO6HCPU 60k step Q12HCPU 124k step Q25HCPU 252k step 3 Realised high speed processing Depending on the type of the sequencer high speed processing has been realized Example when LD instruction is used Q02CPU 0 0794s Q02HCPU Q06HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 0 0344s The newly developed base unit high speed system bus has achieved faster access to an intelligent function module and link refresh with a network module Access to the intelligent function module 20 xus word approx 7 times 1 MELSECNET H link refresh processing 4 6ms 8k word approx 4 3 times 1 1 Where Q02HCPU is compared with Q2ASHCPU S1 4 Increase in debugging efficiency through high speed communication with GX Developer In the High Performance model QCPU a time required for writing reading of a program or monitoring has been reduced through the high speed communication
73. of the terminal block Module fixing screw Used to fix the module to the base unit 9 M4 screw tightening torque 66 to 89Necm POINTS 1 Do not wire to those terminals for which NC is stamped on the terminal block 2 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE This section describes the specifications of the extension cables for the base units main slim type and extension base unit used in the PLC system and the specification standards of the extension base unit 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table Main base unit specifications Number of I O modules i 3 5 installed Dee of extension Extendable Applicable module module Q series modules VDE imternalcurrent 0 105A 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A Kee Mounting hole size hole size M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw oH 98mm 3 86inch w 189mm 7 44inch 245mm 9 65inch 328mm 12 92inch 439mm 17 30inch 44 1mm 1 74inch 0 21kg 0 25 kg 0 35 kg 0 45 kg ttachment Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately DIN rail i el Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 2 Slim type main base unit specifications SH Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Number of I O modules Gees Ge of extension Cannot connect extension modules Applicable module module Q series modules 5 VDC internal current 0 086A 0 086A 0 091A consumption Mounting hole s
74. on YES RESET position After making a reset with the RESET L CLR switch set the RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Is the CPU module RESET L CLR switch in the neutral position Neutral position 4 Exchange the power supply module and confirm that the POWER LED turns on YES NO Can MODE LED YES be turned on Can MODE LED bat Sen Hardware fault of power supply module e turned on NO A hardware fault may have occurred in any of the following modules units x and cable Completion A CPU module 2 Main base unit extension base unit R Extension cable 4 Network module Perform operations in due order starting from the minimum system where the main base unit is mounted with the power supply module and CPU module If the module will not work please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem 11 3 11 3 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 3 F 11 4 lowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation MODE LED is flickering Did you make forced ON OFF setting Cancel forced ON OFF Is the MODE LED turned on Is the RESET L CLR switch of the CPU module in the neutral posit
75. present SM604 Memory care A E Not used Goes ON when memory card A is in use 3 tals in use flag In use change Meinory cara A OFF eler deeg i Goes ON when memory card A cannot be inserted or remove insert ON Remove insert E prohibit flag prohibited e Turned ON by user to enable the removal insertion of memory card e Turned OFF by the system after the memory card is removed e This contact can be used only when SM604 and SM605 are OFF Always ON Memory card OFF Remove insert remove insert prohibited enable flag ON Remove insert enabled Q2A S1 Q3A Q4A Q4AR Memory card B OFF Unusable usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card B is ready for use by user S Initial Drive 3 4 protect OFF No protect V flag ON Protect Always OFF S Initia Memory card B OFF No protect protect flag ON Protect Goes ON when memory card B protect switch is ON S Initial 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ee ove ES Always ON S Initial QCPU SM622 Drive 3 flag EE X ON Drive 3 present Goes ON when drive 3 card 2 RAM area is present S Initial New SM623 Drive 4 flag OFF No dive Always ON S Initial QCPU ON Drive 4 present Goes ON when drive 4 card 2 ROM area is present S Initial i 2A S1 SM624 Memory card B f OFF Not used Goes ON when memory card B is in use S status New Q2A S1 in use flag ON In use change Q3A New
76. registered trademark of XEROX Co LTD 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 4 Positioning module channel isolated pulse input module Use shielded cables for the external wiring and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control box with the AD75CK cable clamp Mitsubishi Electric make Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module Inside control box A UI The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the shielded cable is about 7mm 5 Temperature control module Use shielded cables for the external wiring and ground the shields of the external wiring cables to the control box with the AD75CK cable clamp Mitsubishi Electric make Ground the shields 20 to 30cm away from the module Inside control box The AD75CK allows up to four cables to be grounded if the outside diameter of the shielded cable is about 7mm 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q The required number of AD75CKs is indicated below When cables of 7mm outside diameter are used for all wiring N f h Required Number of AD75CKs Ke 2 Ipe TA Channels Number of used CT channels 6 WO signal cables and other communication cables For the I O signal cables and other communication cables RS 232 RS 422 CC Link etc always ground the shields of the shield cables as in 1 if they are pulled out of the control box
77. request forcibly Or reexecute the request after the processing from the other location has ended The keyword specification set in the Access by specifying the keyword set in the corresponding drive memory is required corresponding drive memory he specified range exceeds the file range Check the specified range and access within that range Forcefully execute the request forcibly Or reexecute after changing the file name Revise the specified file contents The specified file capacity cannot be obtained Or reexecute after cleaning up and reorganizing the specified drive memory The request contents cannot be executed in the Do not execute a request for a specified drive memory in specified drive memory which an error has occurred Currently the request contents cannot be executed The specified file is processing the request from a different location The same file already exists Reexecute after the free wait time has passed App 2 APPENDICES MELSEC Q Error code Error Son 8 Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item The specified device name cannot be handled Check the specified device name The specified device No is outside the range _ Check the specified device No EE e Ge OS in the specified device Writing cannot be done because the specified device is for system use turn on or off The request contents cannot be executed in the specified intelligent function module function module in wh
78. specification misee TT SM1566 Block47 S TRUCK M1567 SM1567 M1568 SM1568 M1569 SM1569 M1570 SM1570 M1571 SM1571 M1572 SM1572 M1573 SM1573 M1574 SM1574 M1575 SM1575 M1576 SM1576 M1577 SM1577 M1578 SM1578 M1579 SM1579 M1580 SM1580 M1581 SM1581 M1582 SM1582 M1583 SM1583 OFF Normal e Turns ON when switching could not be executed normally ON Switching if the network module had detected a network fault and unsuccessful issued a switching request to the host CPU module Switching status from the network module S Error SM1590 ocurrs SM1546 11 63 11 63 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 11 For redundant system Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SM1600 to SM1650 only valid for the CPU redundant system backup mode so they cannot be refreshed during the separate mode Either the backup mode or the separate mode is valid for the SM4651 to SM1699 SM1600 to SM1699 are all turned off for standalone system Set by Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set OFF No error e Turns on if a error occurs in the diagnosis results s SM1600 Diagnosis error i Including external diagnosis New ON Error i Each END e Remains on even if returns to normal thereafter OFF No self d e Turns on when an error occurs in the self diagnosis Self diagnosis error diagnosis error results S New ON Self diagnosis Each END errar e Remains on even if returns to normal t
79. steps described below The USER LED turns on when an error is detected by the CHK instruction or the annunciator F turns on If the USER LED is on monitor the special relays SM62 and SM80 in the monitor mode of GX Developer e When M62 has turned ON The annunciator F is ON Using SD62 to SD79 check the error cause e When SM80 has turned ON The USER LED was on by the execution of the CHK instruction Using SD80 check the error cause Eliminate the error cause after confirming it The USER LED can be turned off by e Making a reset with the RESET L CLR switch or e Executing the LEDR instruction in the sequence program When the RESET L CLR switch is tilted to L CLR several times for latch clear operation the USER LED flickers to indicate that the latch clear processing is under operation When the RESET L CLR switch is further tilted to L CLR while the USER LED flickers the USER LED turns off and terminates the latch clear processing 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned on If the BAT LED turns on follow the steps described below The BAT LED turns on when a low battery capacity is detected If the BAT LED is on monitor the special relays and special registers in the monitor mode of GX Developer to check which of the CPU module and SRAM card batteries was lowered in capacity SM51 to SM52 SD51 to SD52 After confirmation replace the battery with a new one and reset the CPU module with the RESET L
80. the MODE LED is not turned on 11 3 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering cccceceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaee 11 4 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off cccccccsccessecessecesseeceseeeeseecesseeesseeseees 11 5 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned oft 11 6 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering AAA 11 7 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on fflickering AAA 11 7 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned om 11 8 11 2 9 When the BAT LED is turned on 11 8 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is fickemng 11 9 11 2 11 Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned ON 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeateaeeeaeeeaeeeas 11 10 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module does not turn om 11 11 11 2 13 Flowchart for when Unable to read a program 11 12 11 2 14 Flowchart for when unable to Write a program 11 13 11 2 15 Flowchart for when it is unable to perform boot operation from memory Car 11 15 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR oceurs 11 16 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs s ansnannnennnennnennsnnnnnnsrinsrnnsrnnsrnnnrnnsrnnnennne 11 17 WAS tege EE 11 18 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error Codes AA 11 18 11 3 2 Error code ei 11 19 UNE Ne ue Beigl Er 11 39 11 5 WO Module Troubleshoot AAA 11 40 11 5 1 Input Circuit troUDIESNOOTING AAA 11 40 11 5 2 Output Circuit troubleshooting
81. the unit fixing hook securely Check for loose terminal Screws should not EEN Retighten terminal screws screws 2 Check distance between The proper clearance should be provided Connecting conditions Solderless terminals between Solderless terminals Correct Check connectors of Connections should ne beloose Retighten connector extension cable mounting screws Power supply The LED must be ON Abnormal if the POWER LED Check that the LED is ON LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is ON The LED must be ON Abnormal if the RUN LED in RUN status LED is OFF CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the ERR LED OFF LED is ON or flickering CPU Check that the LED is The LED must be OFF Abnormal if the BAT LED OFF LED is ON The LED must be ON when the input power is turned ON Follow Section 10 2 Check that the LED turns The LED must be extinguished when the ON and OFF input power is turned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above The LED turns ON when the output power is turned ON Check that the LED turns The LED must be extinguished when the ON and OFF output power is turned OFF Abnormal if the LED does not turn ON or turn OFF as indicated above Input LED Module indication LED 10 10 2 10 2 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 2 Periodic Inspection The items that must be inspected one or two times every 6 months to 1 year ar
82. time limit error occurs rem SD92 Corresponds to SM92 D9110 Step transition b15 to b8 b7 to bO sp94_ timer setting F number for value timer set value F number setting Timer time limit U SD95 Enabled only Land time over 0 to 255 setting program 1 s units SS EES Turning ON any of SM90 to SM99 during an New active step starts the timer and if the transition condition next to the corresponding SD99 step is not met within the timer time limit the New set annunciator F turns ON H1 Ge EE 3 300bps 6 600bps 24 2400bps 48 4800bps QCPU 96 9600bps 192 19 2kbps 384 38 4kbps New speed setting speed when Remote 576 57 6kbps 1152 115 2kbps RS232 GX Developer is used D g CH oa 11 72 11 72 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 2 System information Set by Number Name Meanin Explanation EE RE ee Set The switch status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format b15 to b4b3 to b T T T S Always Remote 4 Vacant Se 1 Remote I O module switch status Always 1 STOP e The CPU switch status is stored in the following format b15 to b12 b11 to D b7 to b4 b3 to bO q L 1 1 L 1 L gt lt L Sa L gt lt Vacant CPU switch status S Every END processing b8 through b12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 0 OFF 1 ON b13 through b15 are vacant
83. to 0 O k __SFC block designation present Not used 1 absent 0 SFC step designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 Parameter number Annunciator Intelligent function number CHK module parameter instruction error malfunction for QCPU only number Number Meaning Number Meaning Number Meaning SD16 Parameter No 6 SD16 No SD16 Parameter No 6 SD17 SD17 SD17 Error code for intelligent SD18 SD18 function module SD26 Sp SD19 Sp SD20 SD20 SD19 SD21 SD21 SD20 5D22 Vacant 5D22 Vacant Spe SD23 SD23 SD22 Vacant SD24 SD24 SD23 SD25 SD25 SD24 SD26 SD26 SD25 SD26 6 For details of the parameter numbers refer to the user s manual of the CPU module used n n n n n n n n n n iw g E g g el el el el el N bi N N N N E a A wo N o N o 11 70 11 70 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding h Set b Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation Dee a ACPU SCH ng Do E Error number that e All corresponding bits go 1 ON when battery voltage drops Subsequently these remain 1 ON even after battery voltage has been returned to normal b4 b3 b2 bi b x CPU error Bit pattern Memory card A alarm Battery low indicating where Memory card A error New batt
84. to the GX Developer manual Precautions for the battery 1 Operation after storing PLC without battery When starting the PLC operation after being stored with the High Performance model QCPU Q mode battery removed the user memories must be formatted using GX Developer Refer to Section 10 4 2 When battery has gone flat during storage of PLC When the High Performance model QCPU Q mode battery has gone flat during storage of the PLC the user memories must be formatted using GX Developer Refer to Section 10 5 MEMO 1 OVERVIEW 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q This Manual describes the hardware specifications and handling methods of the High Performance model QCPU The Manual also describes those items related to the specifications of the power supply module main base unit extension base unit extension cable memory card and battery Functions are added when the High Performance model QCPU is updated The added functions can be discriminated by the function version serial number of the CPU module Table 1 1 gives the added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions When using the added function confirm the function version serial number and the GX Developer version Table 1 1 List of Functions Added to High Performance Model QCPU and Function Versions Serial Numbers Update Details of High Performance Model QCPU Corresponding Function Serial No Added functions GX Developer version e Automatic write to st
85. tty OE EF POWER 1700 44 Woh Wohl o Fe Q UD wa 167 0 3 6 57 0 01 0 61 189 7 44 7 5 0 30 44 1 1 74 Unit mm inch App 12 App 12 APPENDICES MELSEC Q 4 Extension Base Unit Q65B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 Ir or ey Ry PE TE Y Mey E E T Wl ze yn POWER WOO 4 VOT 4 102 4 103 4 VO4 o re a Q lf L 98 3 86 J 800 3 3 15 0 01 15 5 222 5 0 3 8 77 0 01 0 61 245 9 65 Unit mm inch 5 Extension Base Unit Q68B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 s E JEE S SI i le Oo 0 7 5 WC 0 30 44 4 a 1 74 15 55 306 0 3 12 06 0 01 d S 328 12 92 R Unit mm inch 6 Extension Base Unit Q612B 4 mounting screws M4 x14 KE emm o OUT ANA IE Me oUt j 7 o Togi roni S 2 98 3 86 80 0 3 3 15 0 01 7 0 7 5 eS 0 30 T 44 4 g 417 0 3 16 43 0 01 na ee 439 17 30 Unit mm inch App 13 App 13 APPENDICES
86. used for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 Configuration of peripheral devices et Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2MEM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU G RS 232 cable QC30R2 Personal Computer GX Developer Version 4 or later SW4D5C GPPW E or later PC card adapter Q2MEM ADP MELSEC Q P USB cable 1 To be procured yourself Only Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU can be used SI For how to write data to the memory card and the details of the USB cable refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM System configuration Maximum number of Extension Stages Maximum number of I O modules to be installed Maximum number of occupied I O points Extension base unit Extension cable MELSEC Q 3 Outline of system configuration a If the main base unit Q3OB is used Main base unit Q312B Power supply module 0123 4 5 67 8 9 1011 Slot No 00 20 40 60 80 Ao Co Teo 100 120 140 160 1F 3F 5F 7F 9F BF DF FF 11F 13FH5F 17F CPU module Extension base unit Q612B Power supply module 4 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 oo 180 1A0 1C0 1E0 200 220 240 260 280 2A0 2c0 2E0 whe
87. value Output module failure y Check the external wiring and external input devices Monitor signal off Replace the output module Check the power supply load wire and recover the power supply Check the load wire and load and recover the power supply Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative y Confirm rush current when the load is at the maximum simultaneous on Change the output relay number and let the load maximum simultaneous on current to within the specification explaining a detailed description of the problem For the trouble that the input signal to the input module is not turned off troubleshoot referring to Section 11 5 Examples of I O Modules Troubleshooting 11 11 11 11 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program The following shows the flowchart to be followed when communication with GX Developer cannot be made during PLC power on The CPU cannot communicate with the GX Developer Is the memory to be read correct Select the correct memory Can the CPU communicate with the GX Developer Is the connection cable connected properly Connect the connection cable properly an the CPU communicat with the GX Developer YES communicate with the GX Developer by replacing the connection cable
88. value module No reading There is an output module with a blown fuse Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 When a display device is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the earth status of the display device e Check ERR LED of the output modules and replace the fuse of the module whose LED is lit e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading There is an output module with a blown fuse Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 e When a display device is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the earth status of the display device e Check ERR LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical value module No reading Alternatively monitor special registers SD1300 to SD1331 with the peripheral device and change the fuse of the output module whose bit has a value of 1 Ch
89. x 24 x 32 x 1 3 07 W h Power consumption of the power supply section of the intelligent function module Ws 0 W i Power consumption of overall system W 3 84 8 97 0 0 3 07 0 15 88 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 Module Installation 9 3 1 Precaution on installation Ab CAUTION Use the PLC in an environment that meets the general specifications contained in this manual Using this PLC in an environment outside the range of the general specifications could result in electric shock fire erroneous operation and damage to or deterioration of the product Hold down the module loading lever at the module bottom and securely insert the module fixing latch into the fixing hole in the base unit Incorrect loading of the module can cause a malfunction failure or drop When using the PLC in the environment of much vibration tighten the module with a screw Tighten the screw in the specified torque range Undertightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction Overtightening can cause a drop short circuit or malfunction due to damage to the screw or module When installing more cables be sure that the base unit and the module connectors are installed correctly After installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card by pushing it into the memory card loading slot Check for insecure loading after loading the mem
90. 00 number with blown fuse with the blown fuse SD60 ed Eet e The lowest I O number of the module where the I O module SD61 verification verification error oe S Error D9002 verification number took place error number module number A e S epes Annunciator Annunciator e The first annunciator number F number to be detected is stored Instruction D9009 number number here S execution SD63 S Number of Mumbar t Stores the number of annunciators searched Instruction D9124 annunciators annunciators execution 11 71 11 71 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding t Name Meaning Explanation Deeg ACPU rene DUT When F goes ON due to or SET F the F numbers which D9125 go progressively ON from SD64 through SD79 are registered The F numbers turned OFF by are deleted from SD64 SD79 and the F numbers stored after the deleted F numbers are shifted to the preceding registers Execution of the instruction shifts the contents of SD64 to SD79 up by one This can also be done by using the INDICATOR RESET switch on Number SD64 SD65 D9126 SD66 D9127 n D67 D9128 D D912 SE the of the Q3A Q4ACPU 9129 SD69 After 16 annunciators have been detected detection of the 17th will D9130 not be stored from SD64 through SD79 SET SET SET RST SET SET SET S
91. 1 Access cannot be made to the specified station since the routing parameter has not been set to the start source CPU or relay CPU to be executed the control CPU of the network module that will relay the data has not started The network with the No set in the routing parameter does not exist Link related error Cannot access the specified station An error occurred in the access destination or in a relay station App 5 2 When routing via the multiple CPU system is MELSEC Q Countermeasure Since the target drive cannot be formatted do not format Since the target file cannot be deleted do not delete it Secure the area for the multiple block online change system file during formatting Increase the free space of the specified drive Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free areas Specify the correct file pointer Change the file name Cancel the write protection of the disk and execute again Execute again after some time Check the length of the path name Change the specified drive Optimize the specified drive to increase continuous free areas Check the specified drive Format it for RAM Reduce the size of either the program already written or the program to be written newly so that program write does not go beyond the sequence execution region Check if it is being processed by another application Execute again after dismounting the drive Erase the specified
92. 1 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 17 Flowchart for wnen CONTROL BUS ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation This flow chart can be confirmed only when a specific slot oase unit can be detected by the error code CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Check the slot base unit where error occurred with the GX Developer Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly Is the extension cable of the applicable base unit installed properly NO Install the module and cable properly Is the ERR LED YES turned off YES NO Are all the extension cables of the base unit connected properly Install the extension cable properly YES Is the ERR LED YES turned off NO Has noise in excess YES of the specified value been generated Take measures against noise NO Proper operation Replace the applicable module Error detection Proper operation Replace the CPU module Error detection Proper operation Replace the applicable base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem a Completion 11 17 11 17 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 Error Code L
93. 22 D9224 SD1224 D9225 SD1225 D9226 SD1226 D9227 SD1227 D9228 SD1228 D9229 SD1229 D9230 SD1230 D9231 SD1231 11 97 Special Register for Modification TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue Local station error detect Local station parameters non conforming remote I O station I O allocation error Local station and remote I O station initial communications underway Local station and remote I O station error Meaning Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 Stores conditions for up to numbers Stores conditions for up to numbers e Corresponding Detail etails CPU Stores the local station numbers which are in error Device number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L64 L63 L62
94. 414 Default n 30 M9034 SM1034 1 minute hds n Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even lock seconds during scan if corresponding time has elapsed eee e Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed en bm ben Oe Used as dummy contacts of initialization and application instruction in sequence program ON e SM1038 and SM1037 are turned on and off without M9037 SM1037 Always OFF OFF regard to position of key switch on CPU module front SM1038 and SM1039 are under the same condition as ON for 1 scan ON RUN status except when the key switch is at STOP SM1038 only after RUN Brel l scan position and turned off and on Switched off if the key switch is in STOP position SM1038 is on for one scan RUN flag After Von TT scan only and SM1039 is off for one scan only if the key switch K rie See ee scan only SM206 ele enable e When RUN key switch is at PAUSE position or remote USE status OFF PAUSE notin effect pause contact has turned on and if SM204 is on PAUSE contact ON STOP in effect switch is in STOP position OFF Sampling trace in e Turned on upon completion of sampling trace performed i the number of times preset by parameter after STRA SM1043 Man Sampling trace i progress i niger p yp completed ON Sampling trace instruction is executed completed Reset when STRAR instruction is executed e Turning on off SM803 can execute
95. 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SD0 ai Error Contents and Cause 1 Network module A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71AP21 been installed the Q2AS has been installed A 1S J71LP21 or A 1S J71BR11 for use with the AnUCPU network module has been installed 2109 6 Station not loaded was specified using the instruction whose target was the CPU share memory 1 The location designated by the FROM TO instruction set is not a special function module 2 The special function module Network module being accessed is faulty The location designated by a link direct device J is nota network module 2111 The module other than special function module is specified by the special function module dedicated instruction Or it is not the corresponding special function module The module model specified by the special function module dedicated instruction and that specified by the parameter WO assignment is different The module other than intelligent function module is specified by the intelligent function module dedicated instruction Or it is not the corresponding intelligent function module 2 There is no network No specified by the network dedicated instruction Or the relay target network does not exit 3 The model is incorrectly registered by the dedicated instruction The module other than network module is specified bythe network dedicated instruction An instruction which on execution spe
96. 6DIN1 For Q35B Q65B Q6DIN2 For Q33B Q52B Q55B Q63B Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q6DIN3 b Adaptor installation method The way to install the adaptors for mounting a DIN rail to the base unit is given below Base unit rear O EZ EH j o i OO Seats Place the hook of the adaptor Push the top of the adaptor small in the lower hole small far enough until it clicks Insert the adaptor large into the grooves Push the bottom of the adaptor large far of the base unit from below enough until it clicks c Applicable DIN rail types JIS C 2812 TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al TH35 15Fe d DIN rail mounting screw intervals When using a TH35 7 5Fe or TH35 7 5Al DIN rail rail mounting screws should be tightened at a pitch of 200 mm 7 88 inch or less in order to ensure that the rail has sufficient strength DIN rail DIN rail mounting screw b 35mm 1 38 inch _ P 200mm 7 88 inch or less 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q e Side dimensions when DIN rail is attached Board side DIN rail depth D TH35 7 5Fe TH35 7 5Al 7 5 0 30 7 5 Base unit Power supply module
97. 7D5C GPPW E or later Functions added to 04012 Version 7 10L SW7D5C GPPW E or later Functions added to 04122 Version 8 SW8D5C GPPW or later Functions added to 05032 Version 8 03D SW8D5C GPPW or later Refer to Section 2 3 to confirm the function version and serial number of the High Performance model QCPU 2 7 2 7 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version The CPU module serial No can be confirmed on the rated plate and GX Developer s system monitor 1 Confirming the serial No on the rated plate The serial No and function version can be confirmed on the rating plate MITSUBISHI MODEL 7 Function version SERIAL_05032 00000000006 80M1 IND CONT EQ d US LISTED A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MADE IN JAPAN 2 Confirming the serial No on the system monitor list of product information The CPU module serial No and function version can be confirmed with the list of product information on the GX Developer Version 6 or later system monitor Serial Nos and function versions of the intelligent function module and CPU module can also be confirmed Serial number Function version Product Information List Intelli Q QU71LP21 25 32pt 0000 020810000000000 e None lt bi None 8 None None 8 CSV file creating Close 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q
98. 8mm 12 92inch 12 Slot Main Base Unit 439mm 17 30inch depth 98mm 3 86inch 7 Connection of up to seven extension base units a The High Performance model QCPU can connect to seven extension base units eight base units including the main and accept up to 64 modules b The overall distance of the extension cables is up to 13 2m to ensure high degree of extension base unit arrangement 8 Memory extension by memory card The High Performance model QCPU is provided with a memory card installation connector to which a memory card of 32 Mbyte max can be connected 32 Mbyte is available when a ATA card is used When a memory card of large capacity is installed a large capacity of file can be controlled comments to all data devices can be set up and the programs in the past can be stored in the memory as they are in the form of the corrected histories If a memory card is not installed a program can be stored onto the standard ROM built in the CPU module and file registers can be handled by the standard RAM e The number of file registers that can be handled changes depending on the function version serial number of the CPU module used CPU Module Type Number of File Registers Q02CPU 32k points QO2HCPU First 5 digits of serial number are 04011 or earlier 32k points QO6HCPU Piret 5 digits of serial number are 04012 or later 64k points Q12HCPU First 5 digits of serial number are 02091 or earlie
99. 9 1 Password registration 7 19 2 Remote password 7 20 Monitoring High Performance model QCPU System Status from GX Developer System Monitor 7 21 LED Display 7 21 1 LED display 7 21 2 Priority setting 7 22 High Speed Interrupt Function 7 23 Module Service Interval Time Reading 8 COMMUNICATION WITH INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULE SPECIAL FUNCTION MODULE 8 1 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and Q series Intelligent Function Modules 8 1 1 Initial setting and automatic refresh setting using GX Configurator 8 1 2 Communication using device initial value 8 1 3 Communication using FROM TO instruction 8 1 4 Communication using the intelligent function module device 8 1 5 Communication using the instructions dedicated for intelligent function modules 8 2 Request from Intelligent Function Module to High Performance model QCPU 8 2 1 Interrupt from the intelligent function module 8 3 Communication Between High Performance model QCPU and AnS Series Special Function Modules 8 3 1 Communication using device initial value 8 3 2 Communication using FROM TO instruction 8 3 3 Communication using the intelligent function module device 8 3 4 Effects of quicker access to the special function module and countermeasures against them 9 PARAMETER LIST 10 DEVICES 10 1 Device List 10 2 Internal User Devices 10 2 1 Inputs X 10 2 2 Outputs Y 10 2 3 Internal relays M 10 2 4 Latch relays L 10 2 5 Anunciators F 10 2 6 Edge relay V 10 2 7 Lin
100. 9091 M9094 M9100 M9101 M9102 Special Relay for Name Meaning Details Modification Sub program P set completion Sub program 2 P set request Sub program 3 P set request Divided processing execution detection Divided processing request flag A8UPU A8PUJre quired search time o E D aS S mal fa Ax Communication request registration area BUSY signal X F Instruction error flag K N SM251 Presence absenc SM320 e of SFC program SM321 Start stop SFC program SM322 SFC program start status VO change flag completion completion completion Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Other than when P set being requested P set being requested Divided processing not underway During divided processing Batch processing Divided processing Read time not shortened Read time shortened Empty spaces in communication request registration area No empty spaces in communication request registration area Error check executed No error check No error Error Replacement No replacement SFC programs not used SFC programs used SFC programs stop SFC programs start Initial Start Continue e Turned ON once when the P set has been completed and then turned OFF again e Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main pro
101. A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSEC System Q Programmable Logic Controllers User s Manual Hardware amp Maintenance CPU Modules Q02 H CPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Art no 130000 01 07 2003 Be A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Version H ersion SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Read these precautions before using When using Mitsubishi equipment thoroughly read this manual and the associated manuals introduced in this manual Also pay careful attention to safety and handle the module properly These SAFETY PRECAUTIONS classify the safety precautions into two categories DANGER and CAUTION 7 s 1 D DANGER Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in death or severe injury A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage N A Depending on circumstances procedures indicated by P CAUTION may also be linked to serious results In any case it is important to follow the directions for usage Store this manual in a safe place so that you can take it out and read it whenever necessary Always forward it to the end user DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Install a safety circuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from errone
102. ASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table The list below shows the specifications of the extension cables which can be used for the High Performance model QCPU system cone QC05B QCO06B QC30B QC50B QC100B Cable length 0 45m 1 48ft 0 6m 1 97ft 1 2m 3 93ft 3 0m 9 84ft 5 0m 16 39ft 10 0m 32 79ft Application Connection across the main base unit and extension base unit or across the extension base units 0 15 kg 0 16 kg 0 22 kg 0 40 kg 0 60 kg 1 11 kg When the extension cables are used in combination limit the overall distance of the combined cable to 13 2 m 43 28 ft 6 3 Parts Names of Base Unit The names of the parts of the base unit are described below 1 Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B Application 1 Extension cable Connector for sending and receiving signals from the extension base unit to which the connector extension cables are connected Protective cover of extension cable connector Before an extension cable is connected 2 Base cover the area of the base cover surrounded by the groove under the word OUT on the base cover must be removed with a tool such as nippers Connector for installing the power supply module CPU modul
103. Allowable momentary power failure Within 20ms ithin Omg period 3 at 24VDC input DEE Across inputs LG and outputs FG 500VAC across primary and g 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft 5VDC Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs Insulation resistance and LG FG across outputs and FG LG 10MO or more by insulation resistance tester 5MQ or more by insulation resistance tester By noise simulator of 500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 66 to B9Necm In o y 130mm 5 12inch e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width Noise durability and 25 to 60Hz noise frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV dimensions H External 55mm 2 17inch 93 6mm 3 69inch 0 60kg 0 50kg 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q POINTS 1 Overcurrent protection The overcurrent protection device shuts off the 5 V 24 VDC circuit and stops the system if the current flowing in the circuit exceeds the specified value The LED of the power supply module is unlit or lit dimly upon a voltage drop If this device is activated switch the input power supply off and eliminate the cause such as insufficient current capacity or short Then a few minutes later switch it on to restart the system The initial start for the system takes place when the current value becomes normal Overvoltage protection The overvoltage protection device shuts
104. B V Spanish Branch Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V UK Branch Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 e mail automation meuk mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC JAPAN CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics Ltd Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_me netvision net il ISRAEL GEVA AUSTRIA UAB UTU POWEL LITHUANIA Avtomatika Sever Ltd RUSSIA Wiener Stra e 89 Savanoriu pr 187 Lva Tolstogo St 7 Off 311 AT 2500 Baden LT 2053 Vilnius RU 197376 St Petersburg Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Phone 370 0 52323 101 Phone 7 812 11 83 238 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 Fax 370 0 52322 980 Fax 7 812 11 83 239 e mail office geva at e mail powel utu lt e mail as avtsev spb ru TEHNIKON BELARUS INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA CONSYS RUSSIA Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 Cuza Voda 36 1 81 Promyshlennaya St 42 BY 220030 Minsk MD 2061 Chisinau RU 198099 St Petersb
105. C Q 2 Wiring of UO equipment a Insulation sleeved crimping terminals cannot be used with the terminal block It is recommended to cover the wire connections of the crimping terminals with mark or insulation tubes b The wires used for connection to the terminal block should be 0 3 to 0 75mm in core and 2 8mm 0 11 inch max in outside diameter c Run the input and output lines away from each other d When the wiring cannot be run away from the main circuit and power lines use a batch shielded cable and ground it on the PLC side In some cases ground it in the opposite side PLC Shielded cable Input Output e Where wiring runs through piping ground the piping without fail f Run the 24VDC input line away from the 100VAC and 200VAC lines g Wiring of 200m 686 67 ft or longer distance will give rise to leakage currents due to the line capacity resulting in a fault Refer to Section 11 5 for details 3 Grounding To ground the cable follow the steps a to c shown below a Use the dedicated grounding as far as possible b When a dedicated grounding cannot be performed use 2 Common Grounding shown below PLC Another Another Another equipment equipment equipment grounding grounding 1 Independent grounding Best 2 Common grounding Good 3 Joint grounding Not allowed c For grounding a cable use the cable of 2 mm or more Posi
106. C used on the Q52B or Q55B For example either of the following power supply modules must be mounted on the main base unit when the current consumption on the main base unit is 3A and that on the Q52B or Q55B is 1A 5VDC Rated output current 6A Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q63P 8 5A Q64P 2 Since 5VDC is supplied to the Q52B or Q55B through the extension cable a voltage drop occurs at the extension cable You must select the power supply module and extension cable length to ensure that the IN connector voltage of the Q52B or Q55B is 4 75VDC or more For details of a voltage drop refer to Section 6 6 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q b Ideas for reducing voltage drops The following methods are effective to reduce voltage drops at the extension cables 1 Changing the module loading positions Load large current consumption modules on the main base unit Load small current consumption modules on the extension base unit 2 Using short extension cables The shorter the extension cable is the smaller the resistance and voltage drops are Use the shortest possible extension cables 2 When the base unit is of Q30SB Slim type Power Slim type main base unit supply module 2SB B B Q61SP Q32SB Q33SB Q35S Peripheral devices converter SCH GE QO6HCPU cables etc for connection H i S between CPU module and PC __ O module QX10 QY10 etc __ Intelligent function module Q64AD QJ71LP21 25 etc
107. CC Link dedicated instructions that can be executed simultaneously reaches 32 Switches OFF when the number goes below 32 U Status change QCPU serial No 05032 or Specifies whether the set value SV will be matched with the process value PV in the manual mode Explanation When Set NC a e Switches ON when the trace preparation is completed 9 Status Goes ON when sampling trace is ready S Statis change e Trace is started when this relay switches ON U M9047 Trace is suspended when this relay switches OFF U M9047 QnA QCPU All related special Ms switches OFF Sampling trace started when this goes ON QnA e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF S Status change e Switches ON during execution of trace QCPU M9046 S Status change M9046 e Switches ON after trace is triggered Status change N Goes ON during execution of sampling trace QnA e Trace is triggered when this relay switches from OFF to ON Identical to TRACE instruction execution status e Sampling trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF to ON Identical to STRA instruction execution status QCPU QnA QnA QCPU ew 3 S Status Goes ON after sampling trace trigger change lew e Switches ON at completion of trace Stents 9043 change 9043 ew ew n n QCPU n n QnA Goes ON at completion of sampling trace S Status change QnA e Runs status latch c
108. CPU of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system is set to other than CPU No 1 2150 2200 There is no parameter file at the drive designated by DIP switches as a valid drive Remove the module installed at 65th or later slot Remove the module installed at the slot later than the number of slots specified with base allocation setting Remove the module installed at the I O points later than the 4 096th point Change the last module to a module which does not exceed the 4 096th point Install a usable module The intelligent function module is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Eliminate empty slots between the CPU modules Set empty slots on the right side of the CPU modules Dismount the module other than the QCPU mounted between the High Performance model QCPUs Process CPUs and replace it with the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU Load the motion controller on the right side of the QCPUs e Change the intelligent function module for the one compatible with the multiple CPU system function version B Change the setting of the control CPU of the intelligent function module incompatible with the multiple CPU system to CPU No 1 Check and correct the setting of the parameter enabled drive switch Put a parameter file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled dri
109. D 2 digit code b15 to b8 b7 to bo Example Minutes 0 to 59 Seconds 0 to 59 85 min 48 sec past the hour 3548H Category codes which help indicate what type of information is being stored in the common information areas SD5 through SD15 and the individual information areas SD16 through SD26 are stored here b15 to b8 b7 to bO Individual information Common information O Rem category codes category codes The common information category codes store the following codes 0 No error Unit module No PLC No Base No File name Drive name Time value set Program error location Switch cause for Q4AR only information information x Fora multiple PLC system the module number or PLC New categories category code number is stored depending on the error that occurred Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has been stored PLC No 1 1 PLC No 2 2 PLC No 3 3 PLC No 4 4 The individual information category codes store the following codes 0 No error 1 Open 2 File name Drive name 3 Time value actually measured 4 Program error location 5 Parameter number 6 Annunciator number 7 Check instruction malfunction number 11 67 11 67 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Set by Corresponding Corresponding Explanation p CPU Common information corresponding to the error codes SD0 is stored here The following four types of information
110. D1028 SD526 1 second counter Clock data dt D213 D9019 D9020 D9021 D9022 D9025 D9026 D9027 D9028 Clock data Clock data Clock data Maximum scan time 10 ms units Constant scan time User sets in 10 ms units Scan time 1 ms units Count in units of 1s Clock data year month Clock data day hour Clock data minute second Clock data day of week Corresponding CPU If scan time is larger than the content of SD526 the value is newly stored at each END Namely the maximum value of scan time is stored into SD526 in BIN code Sets the interval between consecutive program starts in multiples of 10 ms 0 No setting 1 to 200 Set Program is executed at intervals of set value x 10 ms e Scan time is stored and updated in BIN code after every END When the PC CPU starts running it starts counting 1 every second e It starts counting up from 0 to 32767 then down to 32768 and then again up to 0 Counting repeats this routine e Stores the year 2 lower digits and month in BCD b15 to bi2b11_ to b8b7 to pop Example L H8707 Month Stores the day and hour in BCD to bi2b11_ to b8b7 to b4 b3 b0 Example 31th 10 o clock H3110 e Stores the Minute and second in BCD bi5 to b1i2b11_ to b8 b7 to b4 b3 ae SE Minute Stores the day of the week in BCD Example 35 minutes 48 seconds Second H3548 to bi2b11 to b8b7 to b4 b3 ro Sun
111. D209 Priority 8 1 Priority 7 T Priority 10 Priority 9 Default Value L SD207 4321H SD208 8765H SD207 00A9H No display is made if 0 is set However even if 0 has been set information concerning CPU module operation stop including parameter settings errors will be indicated by the LEDs without conditions See Section 7 9 5 REMARK for the priority order The year last two digits and month are stored as BCD code at SD210 as shown below b15 b12b11 b8 b7 ranking SD210 Clock data Clock data Clock data Priorities 9 to 10 LLT D9038 D3039 format change U New D9025 S U Request pee pene D9027 S U QCPU l Sie D9028 QnA Request 11 75 vo Example July 1993 9307H to to Clock data year month The day and hour are stored as BCD code at SD211 as shown below to T vo Example 31st 10 a m The minutes and seconds after the hour are stored as BCD code at SD212 as shown below b12b11 to b8 b7 T Clock data SD211 day hour to T 1 1 1 Clock data minute second to SD212 e Stores the year two digits and the day of the week in SD213 in the BCD code format as shown below b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4 b3 T Example 1993 Friday 1905H a ae Day of week Sunday to T 1 1 1 Higher digits of year 0 to 99 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursda
112. Detail mode S Ini 0 Main base only 1 to 7 No of extension bases Stores the maximum number of the extension bases being installed b7 b2 bi bO ma Te T Main base 1st expansion base Base type differentiation 0 QA Bis installed A mode 1 Q Bis to installed Q mode 2nd expansion base 0 fixed when the base is not installed 7th expansion base b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b Expansion 3 Expansion 2 Expansion 1 Main SD243 SD244 As shown above each area stores the number of slots being installed Expansion 7 Expansion 6 Expansion 5 Expansion 4 e When SM250 goes from OFF to ON the upper 2 digits of the final I O number plus 1 of the modules loaded are stored as BIN values Head I O No for module replacement e Stores the upper two digits of the first UO number of an I O module that is removed replaced in the online status default value 100p RS422 one e Stores transmission speed of RS422 transmission 0 9600bps 1 19 2kbps 2 38 4kbps Number of Indicates the number of mounted MELSECNET 10 modules or modules installed MELSECNET H modules MELSECNET H module Network Network No of mounted MELSECNET 10 module or No MELSECNET H module Group Group No of mounted MELSECNET 10 module or MELSECNET H number module Station Station No of mounted MELSECNET 10 module or MELSECNET H No module In the cas
113. EL QCPU PROCESSING TIME 11 1 Reading High Performance model QCPU s Scan Time 11 2 Factors Responsible for Extended Scan Time Factors Responsible for Shortened Scan Time 12 PROCEDURE FOR WRITING PROGRAMS TO HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU 12 1 Writing Procedure for 1 Program 12 1 1 Items to consider when creating one program 12 1 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU 12 2 Procedure for Multiple Programs 12 2 1 Items to consider when creating multiple programs 12 2 2 Procedure for writing programs to the High Performance model QCPU 13 OUTLINE OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 13 1 Features 13 2 Outline of Multiple CPU Systems 13 3 Differences with Single CPU Systems 14 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION OF MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEMS 14 1 System Configuration 14 2 Precautions During Multiple CPU System Configuration 14 2 1 Function versions of High Performance model QCPU motion CPUs and PC CPU module that can be sued and their mounting positions 14 2 2 Precautions when using Q series corresponding I O modules and intelligent function modules 14 2 3 Limitations when mounting AnS series corresponding I O modules and special function modules 14 2 4 Modules that have mounting restrictions 14 2 5 Usable GX Developers and GX Configurators 14 2 6 Parameters that enable the use of multiple CPU systems 14 2 7 Resetting the multiple CPU system 14 2 8 Processing when High Performance model QCPU stop errors occur 14 2 9 Reducing the time required for
114. EM 2MBF Q2MEM 4MBF Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA High Performance model QCPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Battery Q6BAT ii i noon Battery holder LITHIUM BATTERY Be Battery Q7BAT Q7BAT SET S H Power supply module UO module Intelligent function module of the Q Series Main base unit Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B x2 Extension of the Q Series module Extension of the AnS Series module Q50B extension base unit Extension cable Q52B Q55B ON Se QC05B QC06B QC12B Q6LB extension base unit SE Q63B Q65B Q68B 06128 Fi HEE Power supply module Power supply module 3 4 UO module Intelligent function WO module Intelligent function module of the AnS Series module of the Q Series POINTS 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM card Flash card and ATA card according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured 2 QA1S65B and QA1S68B extension base units are used for the power supply module UO module and special function module of t
115. ESHOOTING Error Code SDO 1 The contents of the boot file are incorrect 2210 There is no boot file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch even though the Boot DIP switch is ON 1 A memory card was removed without switching the memory card in out switch OFF 2 The memory card in out switch is turned ON although a memory card is not actually installed 1 The memory card has not been formatted 2 Memory card format status is incorrect 2302 Automatic write to standard ROM was performed on the CPU module that is incompatible with automatic write to standard ROM Memory card where automatic write to standard ROM was selected in the boot file was fitted and the parameter enable drive was set to the memory card be found The Ethernet parameter that was added for QnACPU with the function version B has been set to QnACPU without the function version B Program memory capacity was exceeded by performing boot operation or automatic write to standard ROM The file designated at the parameter PLC RAS settings fault history area has not been created Though the file register has been set in the pairing setting tracking setting the file register does not exist The specified program does not exist in the program memory This error may occur when the ECALL EFCALL PSTOP PSCAN POFF or PLOW instruction is executed The specified program exists in the program memory but has not b
116. ET L CLR switch of the CPU module need not be operated At this time the device memory data are not cleared 1 Before writing a program to the CPU module perform the following operation e Set the system protect setting switch SW1 of the CPU module to OFF not protected e Cancel the registered password on GX Developer For details refer to the GX Developer Operating Manual 2 1 When a program was written to the program memory during boot operation also write the program to the boot source memory If the program is not written to the boot source memory the old program will be executed at the next boot operation 3 2 When online change is performed in the ladder mode the program changed online is written to the program memory When performing boot operation also write the program to the boot source memory after online change If the program is not written to the boot source memory the old program will be executed at the next boot operation For details of boot operation refer to the High Performance Model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 When the CPU module is placed in the STOP status by the remote STOP operation of GX Developer it is put in the RUN status by the remote RUN operation of GX Developer after program write In that case the RUN STOP switch and RESET L CLR switch of the CPU module need not be operated 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 4
117. ET SET SET SET SD70 F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110F151F210 LEDR D9131 Table of A A A A A A A A A A A A Numb H 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 Number SD71 detected Annunciator sDe2 9 detected S D9132 BEE detection spesfo 1 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 8 Number of Instruction detected i SD72 numbers number sD64 0 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 execution New SD65 0 O 25 25 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 99 15 SD73 epes o o o 99 0 15 15 15 15 15 15 15 70 New SD67 0 0 0 0 0 O 70 70 70 70 70 70 65 SD74 Spee 0 0 0 0 0 0 o 65 65 65 65 65 38 New SD69 0 0 0 0 0 0 4 0 O 38 38 38 38 110 SD70 0 0 0 0 0 0 40 0 O 110 110 110 151 SD75 SD71 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 151 151 210 Kihi New sD72 o o olololololo olol o 2100 Pe SD76 sDoz3 o o olo olololololololo o New SD74 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 o o0 0 0 SD77 so7s5 o oloflojlolo lojojfo lojofojo New O SD76 0 0 0 0 0 o jo olo o 0 0 0 SD78 SD77 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0o o0 0 0 New SD78 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0o 0 0 0 SD79 0 0 0 D 0 0 0 0 0 0 o0 0 0 SD79 New S Error codes detected by the CHK instruction are stored as BCD S SD80 CHK number CHK number y Instruction New code execution SD90 e Set the annunciator number F number that will be turned ON when the step transition SD91 watchdog timer setting or watchdog timer Corresponds to auer
118. L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 he bit corresponding to SD1216 SD1217 D1218 D1219 If a local station detects an error the station number becomes 1 Example When station 6 and 12 detect an error b5 and 11 in SD1216 become 1 and when SD1216 is monitored its value is 2080 820n Stores the local station numbers which contain mismatched parameters or of remote station numbers for which incorrect I O assignment has been made Device Bit number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 SD1220 SD1221 SD1222 SD1223 If a local station acting as the master station of tier three detects a parameter error or a remote I O station whose UO assignment is abnormal the bit of the device number corresponding to the station number of that local station or remote I O station turns to 1 Example When local station 5 and remote I O station 14 detect an error b4 and b13 in SD1220 become 1 and when SD1220 is monitored its value is 8208 2010H Stores the local or remote station numbers while they are communicat
119. Latch Clear Operation To perform latch clear operate the RESET L CLR switch in the following procedure 1 RUN STOP switch STOP 2 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR several times until the USER LED flickers USER LED Flicker Ready for latch clear 3 RESET L CLR switch Move the switch to L CLR once more USER LED OFF Latch clear complete POINTS 1 The ineffective range for latch clear can be set for each device by the device setting parameter 2 In addition to the way of using the RESET L CLR switch for latch clear remote latch clear may be performed from GX Developer For details of the remote latch clear operation using GX Developer refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard ROM 1 Order of execution for automatic write to standard ROM Automatic write to the standard ROM is carried out with the following procedures a Operation with GX Developer setting automatic write to standard ROM 1 Check the Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM item in the PLC parameter boot file setting Set the parameter and program to be booted at the Boot file setting section Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM Qn H Parameter x PLC name Puc system Puc file Puc RAS Device Program Boot file ke o assignment Check Auto Download all Data from Memory card to pose
120. MC EMC nterlock circuits as A necessary Provide vz i N Power to output external interlock equipment eer e circuits for conflicting O switched OFF operations such as i when the STOP forward rotation and MC2 signal is given reverse rotation and L o ec In th EN parts that SC pa EA Slop amage the machine or cause accidents if eae wc l or a stop caused no interlock were used by a limit switch db _ The power ON procedure is as follows For AC For AC DC 1 Switch power ON 1 Switch power ON 2 Set CPU to RUN 2 Set CPU to RUN 3 Turn ON the start switch 3 When DC power is established RA2 goes ON 4 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output 4 Timer TM times out after the DC power reaches 100 equipment is powered and may be driven by the program The TM set value should be the period of time from when RA2 goes ON to the establishment of 100 DC voltage Set this value to approximately 0 5 seconds 5 Turn ON the start switch 6 When the magnetic contactor MC comes on the output equipment is powered and may be driven by the program If a voltage relay is used at RA2 no timer TM is required in the program 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 2 System design circuit example when using ERR contact of power supply module POWER SS FOR AC DC TRANSFORMER sec RANSFORMER Input switched FUSED j when power supply U MODULE established ll D SM52 POWER Gm
121. MELSEC Q 7 Extension Base Unit QA1S65B 4 mounting screws M5 x25 Dez QA1S65B 130 5 12 295 0 3 11 62 0 01 315 12 41 Unit mm inch 8 Extension Base Unit QA1S68B 4 mounting screws M5 x25 ebe hl oF Al RP OA OW II II II a ul ul Ul ul Ui y D 700 ron rog roa rog rog e e 16 4 S CH 10 65 51 2 Si Got 10 400 0 3 15 76 0 01 I 0 39 420 16 55 Unit mm inch App 14 App 14 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 Upgraded Functions of High Performance Model QCPU The High Performance model QCPU is upgraded to add functions and change the specifications The functions and specifications that can be used by the High Performance model QCPU change depending on the function version serial number APPENDIX 3 1 Specification comparison Serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B ats 02091 02092 03051 04012 Specifications or earlier or later or later or later Q02CPU 64kbyte QO2HCPU 64kbyte 128kbyte Standard RAM capacity QO6HCPU 64kbyte 128kby
122. NET H remote I O modules Each CPU type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU e g Q4AARCPU Q3ACPU Set by When set For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual e SFC QCPU Q mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC POINT 1 SD1200 to SD1255 are used for QnACPU These relays are vacant with High Performance model QCPU 2 Special register SD1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU 11 66 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 1 Diagnostic Information oe Corresponding ACPU DTT Corresponding CPU PS Se errors error code e Contents identical to latest fault history information change e Year last two digits and month that SDO data was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit code bp to b8 b7 to bO Example Year 0 to 99 Month 1 to 12 October 1995 9510H The day and hour that SDO was updated is stored as BCD 2 digit Clock time for Clock time for Kee code diagnosis error 7 H us to mp to bo Example New occurrence Sie Day 1 to 31 Hour 0 to 23 10 p m on 25th occurrence 2510H The minute and second that SDO data was updated is stored as BC
123. No NEXT instruction was executed following the execution of a 4200 FOR instruction Alternatively there are fewer NEXT instructions than FOR instructions A NEXT instruction was executed although no FOR instruction has 4201 been executed Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Read the common information of the error using the peripheral i z device check error step corresponding to its numerical value er there are more NEXT instructions than FOR program error location and correct the problem 4202 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under Read the common information of the error using the peripheral A PEAR pstuotoniwar o eoltod although no FOR instruction device check error step corresponding to its numerical value p program error location and correct the problem 4210 The CALL instruction is executed but there is no subroutine at the j l j specified pointer Read the common information of the error using the peripheral 4211 here was no RET instruction in the executed sub routine program device check error step corresponding to its numerical value 4213 More than 16 nesting levels are programmed Keep nesting levels at 16 or under The RET instruction was before the FEND instruction in the main program error location and correct the
124. OP gt RUN 4411 4420 4421 CAN T SET S Program error location Flicker STOP RUN 4500 4501 4502 SFCP FORMAT ERR Program error location Off Flicker STOP RUN 4503 4504 4600 Stop 4601 SFCP OPE ERROR Program error location Flicker On Continue When instruction is executed SFCP EXE ERROR Program error location 4611 4620 O E O E Continue STOP RUN When instruction is executed Flicker Stop When instruction is executed 4633 5000 es WDT ERROR Time value set ER Flicker Always soot 5010 PRG TIME OVER Time value set SE aa Continue Always J son 1 At power on E MEMORY ERR Continue Reset STOP RUN When END instruction executed 6200 CONTROL EXE 4 Cause of switch ae a C Continue Aways 6220 6221 SINT EXE CHANGE Cause of switch On On Continue At switching request 6222 x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 3 Can only be detected in a redundant system Can be detected either in the control system or the standby system x4 Can only be detected in the control system of a redundant system x5 Can only be detected in the standby system of a redundant system D S ei BLOCK EXE ERROR Program error location 4621 4630 4631 STEP EXE ERROR Program error location 4632 Wal ES bel ne a 11 35 11 35 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres Read common informa
125. QCPU function Ver B or later Reset the CPU module SES e Check the network parameters and mounting status and if they differ match the network parameters and mounting status If any network parameter has been corrected write it to the CPU module Confirm the setting of the number of extension stages of the extension base units Check the connection status of the extension base units and connectors When a display device is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status e If the error occurs after the above checks 1 to 3 have been made it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative QCPU function Ver B Correct the type or station number of the MELSECNET H module in ei or later eck the network parameters and mounting status and if they differ match the network parameters and mounting status If any network parameter has been corrected write it to the CPU module Confirm the setting of the number of extension stages of the extension base units Check the connection status of the extension base units and connectors When a display device is connected to the main base unit or ext
126. QCPU of function version A was mounted 1413 An error is detected on the system bus 1 Self diagnosis error of the system bus 2 Self diagnosis error of the CPU module 1 Fault of the loaded module was detected 2 In a multiple PLC system configuration the High Performance model QCPU of function version A was mounted An error is detected on the system bus 1415 Fault of the main or extension base unit was detected 1416 System bus fault was detected at PLC power on or CPU module reset 1421 Hardware fault at the system management module AS92R contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again the intelligent function module special function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function versio
127. QLP21 amp AJ71QBR11 modules are installed 3 or more AJ71AP21 R21 amp AJ71AT21B modules are installed The total number of installed AJ71QLP21 AJ71QBR11 AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules exceeds 5 5 8 10 the MELSECNET 10 network system 5 2 or more master or load stations exist simultaneously at the MELSECNET II or MELSECNET B data link system Reset the parameter MELSECNET MINI auto refresh unit module allocation setting so that it conforms to the station number of the QnA module that is actually linked Reduce the number of special function modules installed x When the expansion mode is used e Reduce the MELSECNET H modules to 4 or less in the whole multiple CPU system Reduce the Q series Ethernet modules to 4 or less in the whole multiple CPU system QCPU function Ver B or later e Reduce the MELSECNET H modules to 4 or less e Reduce the Q series Ethernet modules to 4 or less e Check the network numbers and station numbers e Reduce the AJ71QLP21 and AJ71QBR11 modules to 4 or less e Reduce the AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules to 2 or less e Reduce the AJ71QLP21 AJ71QBR11 AJ71AP21 R21 and AJ71AT21B modules to a total of 4 or less e Check the network Nos and station Nos Check the station Nos 2107 Head X Y set in the parameter I O allocation settings is also the Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual QO head X Y for another module status of the speci
128. QnA Rem QCPU function Ver B or later 2 or more QI60 A1SI61 interrupt modules have been installed Install only 1 QI60 A 1S I61 module The QI60 is loaded Remove the QI60 2 or more A1SI61 interrupt modules have been installed Install only 1 AGT module At the MELSECNET MINI auto refresh parameter settings the 2104 module allocation that was set is different from the actual module models at the station numbers in the link system There are too many special function modules that can use dedicated instructions allocated number of modules installed The total of the figures indicated below is above 1344 Number of AD59 modules installed x Number of AD57 S1 AD58 modules installed x Number of AJ71C24 S3 S6 S8 modules installed x Number of AJ71UC24 modules installed x 10 Number of AJ71C21 S1 modules installed x 29 Number of AJ71PT32 S3 AJ71T32 S3 modules installed x 125 x Number of AJ71QC24 R2 R4 modules installed x 29 Number of AJ71ID1 2 R4 modules installed x 8 Number of AD75 modules installed x__12 Total gt 1344 5 or more MELSECNET H modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system 5 or more Q series Ethernet interface modules are loaded in a whole multiple CPU system 1 5 or more MELSECNET H modules have been installed 2 5 or more Q series Ethernet interface modules have been installed 3 The same network numbers or station numbers exist in the MELSECNET 10 network system 5 or more AJ 1
129. RUN At power ON Reset STOP RUN When an END instruction is executed At power ON Reset STOP RUN At power ON Reset STOP RUN STOP RUN At power ON Reset STOP RUN When an END instruction is executed At power ON Reset STOP RUN At power ON Reset STOP RUN At power ON Reset STOP RUN 11 31 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Error Code SDO ai Error Contents and Cause An error was discovered when the network parameter check was made at the network module The parameters specific to MELSECNET H and MELSECNET 10 are not normal In a multiple CPU system the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station is specified as the head I O number of the Ethernet setting parameter 1 Though the number of Ethernet module is set to one or more in the parameter the actually mounted number of units is zero 2 The head I O number for the Ethernet module set parameter is different from that of the actually mounted module 1 AJ71QE 1 does not exist in the position of O number set by the parameter 2 VO number designation is overlapping 3 Numbers of the parameter and loaded AJ71QE71 are different 4 Ethernet parameter dedicated instruction is set to more than 5 1 Ethernet and MELSECNET 10 use the same network number 2 Network number station number or group number set by the parameter is out of range 3 The I O No is specified for the used CPU modul
130. STRA STRAR instruction OFF gt ON STRA SM803 is forcibly turned on off by a peripheral device Same as execution When switched from OFF to ON STRA instruction SE Sege ON gt OFF STRAR When switched from ON to OFF STRAR instruction Same as execution The value stored in SD1044 is used as the condition for the sampling trace At scanning at time gt Time 10 ms unit The SM1015 relay is turned on to reset the WDT when Watchdog timer OFF Does not reset WDT the ZCOM instruction and data communication request WDT reset ON Resets WDT batch processing are executed used when the scan time SM1045 exceeds 200 ms OFF Trace not in progress ei g SM1046 SM802 Sampling trace ON Trace in progress Switched on during sampling trace Sampling trace OFF Sampling trace e Sampling trace is not executed unless SM801 is turned SM1047 SM801 ping suspended ON preparations ON Sampling trace started e Sampling trace is suspended when SM801 goes OFF Selection of OFF Output until NULL code e When SM701 is OFF characters up to NULL 00H code are output M9049 RIES SE number or en ountered e When SM701 is ON ASCII codes of 16 characters are characters output ON 16 characters output output e Switched ON to disable the CHG instruction Switched ON when program transfer is requested Automatically switched OFF when transfer is complete e When SM1052
131. Standard ROM I Clear program memory System area assured steps p K steps 0 15K step I Auto Download all Data from Memory card to Standard ROM Set the Transfer from to Standard ROM r Boot file setting aaa type Dataname Transfer tom ZT Transferto l El Program MAIN Parameter PARAM Standard ROM e Program memory MAINT Sequence MAIN Standard ROM Program memory E Device com Sequence MAINT Standard ROM Program memory COMME Ee El Parameter Insert Delete Acknowledge XY assignment lv Default Check End Cancel 2 Store the set parameters and programs to be booted in the memory card 4 8 4 8 Aultiple PLC settings 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q b Operations with CPU module automatic write to standard ROM 1 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 2 Mount the memory card that contains the parameters and programs to be booted onto the CPU module 3 Set the parameter s valid drive in the mounted memory card with the CPU module s dip switches e When a SRAM card is mounted SW2 ON SW3 OFF e When a Flash card ATA card is mounted SW2 OFF SW3 ON 4 Switch on the power supply to the PLC 5 BOOT LED will flicker when automatic write to standard ROM has been completed and the CPU module will assume a suspension error status 6 Switch OFF the power supply to the PLC 7 Remove the memo
132. TA card GE Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA Memory capacity after format 7940 kbyte 15932 e 31854 kbyte Storable number of files Number of insertions and extractions 5000 times Number of writings 1000000 times 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Card 1 For CPU module Classification Manganese dioxide lithium primary battery Initial voltage 3 0V Nominal current 1800mAh 5000mAh Storage life Actually 5 years room temperature Total power failure time Refer to Section 10 3 1 Application 2 For SRAM card Power failure backup for program memory standard RAM and latch devices Classification Graphite fluoride primary battery Initial voltage Nominal current 3 0V 48mAh Storage life Actually 5 years room temperature Total power failure time Refer to Section 10 3 1 Application Power failure backup for SRAM card Refer to Section 10 3 1 for the battery life 7 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 1 Formatting of memory card Any SRAM or ATA card must have been formatted to use on the High Performance model QCPU Since the SRAM or ATA card purchased is not yet formatted format it using GX Developer before use The Flash card need not be formatted For the fo
133. TING 3 System clocks counters Corresponding v9 OL Special Relay List z S SM400 Always ON Normally is ON Every END M9036 processing ON S SM401 Always OFF OFF e Normally is OFF Every END M9037 processing ON for 1 scan only after RUN After RUN OFF for 1 scan only Low speed execution type program ON for 1 scan only after RUN Low speed execution type program After RUN OFF for 1 scan only 0 01 second 0 005 sec clock 0 005 sec 0 05 sec 0 1sec 0 5 7 1 3 n sec n sec n ms SM413 414 2n second clock M415 L n ms clock Pe d m pa 11 49 After RUN ON for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only ON dscanofscan execution execution type type program program e After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for scan execution type programs only ON Initial 1 scan of scan execution type Initial execution e After RUN ON for 1 scan only This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only e After RUN OFF for 1 scan only e This connection can be used for low speed execution type programs only e Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at 5 ms interval When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when th
134. This Manuals e iwwasieban bee EENS Ae A 19 About the Generic Terms and Abbreviations A 20 Getters ee ee A 21 1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 4 EAN Er 18 E Seana a EE 1 2 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1to2 8 21 System Contig ratON RE 2 1 2 2 Precaution on System Configuration cccceccecceseceeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeseeesaecaeseeeeaesaesaeeeeseaesaseeseaeeaees 2 6 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version 2 8 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS 3 1to3 2 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1t04 9 4 1 Guten Eelere E 4 1 4 2 Part Names and Settings cecccscecceceeeeeceeceeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaecaecaeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseesaeeaeseeseaeeaees 4 4 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program 4 7 4 4 latch Clear Operation WEEN 4 8 4 5 Executing Automatic Write to Standard DON 4 8 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1to5 11 Bs TS PSCIICAUOM DEE 5 1 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications A 5 1 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply mocdule 5 6 5 1 3 Precaution when connecting the uninterruptive power Supply ssessssssessssissrssrssrssrsrrsrsnsrnsrnsenss 5 8 5 2 Names of Parts and SettingS A 5 9 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE 6 1to6 11 6 1 Base Unit Specification Table 6 1 6 2 Extension Cable Specification Table cccceeccecceseeseseeceeeeseeseeaeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaesaeseeseaesaeseseaesaseeseneeaees 6 3 6 3 Parts Names of Base Un 6 3 6 4 Setting the Extensi
135. VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC When the Q50B is connected to Extension stage 2 Extension Cable Extension Cable Main base unit Q30B Type Conductor Power Resistance Q supply module QC05B QC06B QC12B Extension stage 1 QC30B QC50B QC100B Extension base unit Q60B Extension base unit OSCH Extension stage 2 Symbol V Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 6 n Extension No of Q60B connected Sum total of current consumed by OST and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B Extension cable resistance between the main base unit or the extension base unit Q60B and the extension base unit Q60B Extension cable resistance between the extension base unit Q60B and extension base unit OST 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables when connecting Q6LB between Q30B and Q50B Position of extension base unit Voltage drop caused by extension cable from the main base unit to the Q6UB Qs501B Q5DB IN connector V Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 V R1 R
136. able to perform boot operation Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description P 9 H Completion of the problem 11 15 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs The following shows the flowchart to be followed when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs at PLC power on or during operation UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs Check the slot where error occurred with the GX Developer Has the module on the corresponding slot been dismounted mounted during operation YES gt Reset the CPU module Has the error disappeared Is the module of the applicable slot installed properly Install the module properly Replace the corresponding module Is the ERR LED YES turned off Are all the extension cables of the base module connected properly Install the extension cable properly Is the ERR LED turned off Proper operation Replace the applicable module Error detection Proper operation Replace the CPU module Error detection Replace the applicable Proper operation base unit Error detection Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem y 11 16 11 16 1
137. al function modules Rem x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 24 11 24 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating EES ak Error Messages Information Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 Ai SD16 to 26 1 ERROR CPU 2108 D SP UNIT LAY ERR Unit No Off Flicker Stop Ai power ON At reset 2109 6 2110 SP UNIT ERROR Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue When instruction executed Stop 2111 Program error location Off On Flicker On conihue wnen instruction executed x2 2112 Unit No Program error location Off On Flicker On Continue Anen mstucion executed 2 2113 SP UNIT ERROR FFFFu fixed 2114 2115 2116 2117 2118 Program error location Off On Flicker On GE When instruction is executed 2120 2121 2122 Flicker Stop At power ON At reset SP UNIT LAY ERR a 2150 SP UNIT VER ERR At power ON At reset 2200 MISSING PARA File name drive name o Ines stp At power ON At reset Off Off Off Off x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x2 The CPU operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly x6 This can only be detected in the redundant system standby system 11 25 11 2
138. allation of Battery for CPU Module and Memory Card 1 Q6BAT battery installation procedure The battery for the CPU module is shipped with its connector disconnected Connect the connector as follows Refer to Section 10 3 for the service life of the battery and how to replace the battery Open the cover at the CPU module s bottom Side of the CPU module Confirm that the battery is loaded correctly Front Insert the battery connector into the connector pin on the case Be sure that the insertion direction is correct Completion A Connector Bottom Battery 2 Q7BAT SET battery setting method When changing the battery for the CPU module from the Q6BAT battery to the Q7BAT battery set the battery and connect its connector in the following procedure Open the cover at the CPU module s bottom Side of the CPU module Disconnect the connector connecting the Q6BAT to the CPU module Remove the Q6BAT and cover from the CPU module li See Connect the Q7BAT SET to the battery connector of the CPU module and set it into the connector holder of the battery holder Set the Q7BAT SET in the CPU module Completion 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 3 SRAM card battery installation procedure The battery for the SRAM card is shipped separately
139. am file into the PLC Edit the parameter program setting to yes Alternatively delete unneeded programs heck whether the program version is zz gt QPG and check the file contents to be sure they are for a sequence program e Check program configuration Check parameters and program configuration Specify the head I O number of the intelligent function module under control of the host CPU Delete the interrupt pointer setting of the parameter function Ver B or later Read the detailed information of the error using the peripheral device check the parameter items corresponding to those numerical values parameter numbers and correct when necessary e If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings the possible cause is the memory error of the CPU module s built in RAM or program memory or the memory card Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 28 11 28 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LEDStatus Operating o Error Code Error Messages information Information LED Status Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SDO x1 SD5 to 15 1 SD16 to 26 1 ERROR CPU PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Off Flicker Stop Ven an END SH
140. ameters the parameters related to the intelligent function module such as the network parameters will not be reflected Detection of self diagnosis error which will not stop operation except battery error When operation continued at error detection is set in the parameter setting 4 ERR LED Normal Detection of error whose occurrence stops operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally BOOT LED also flickers Error detected by CHK instruction or annunciator ON 5 USER LED Normal Execution of latch clear Occurrence of battery error due to reduction in battery voltages of CPU module 6 BAT LED or memory card Normal Start of boot operation 7 Non execution of boot operation When automatic write to standard ROM is completed normally ERR LED also flickers Module loading lever Used to load the module to the base unit BOOT LED 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Memory card EJECT button Used to eject the memory card from the CPU module M loadi DEE Connector used to load the memory card to the CPU module connector Connector for connection with USB compatible peripheral device Connector type B 11 USB connector 1 Can be connected by USB dedicated cable Not available for Q02CPU Connector for RS 232 connection 12 RS 232 1 Can be connected by RS 232 connection cable QC30R2 Used to set the items for operation of the CPU mo
141. amp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the shortest practicable length of cable e Install the drive unit in the same panel External wiring connector Cable clamp External wiring cable within 2 m 6 56 ft Pa Drive unit 2 When wiring with cable that exceeds 2 m 6 56 ft but is 10 m 32 79 ft or less Power supply module e Ground the shield section of the external wiring cable with the cable clamp Ground the shield at the closest location to the A1SD75 external wiring connector e Install a ferrite core e Wire the external wiring cable to the drive unit and external device with the shortest practicable length of cable External wiring connector Ferrite core Power supply module Cable clamp wee External wiring cable 2 m to 10 m 6 56 ft to 32 79 ft Drive unit 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 3 Ferrite core and cable clamp types and required quantities e Cable clamp Type AD75CK Mitsubishi Electric e Ferrite core Type ZCAT3035 1330 TDK ferrite core e Required quantity Required Qty Ganslensih Preparedpat RequiredQiy _ ESR PoR p P 1 axis 2 axes 3 axes 2 m 6 56 ft to 10m 3 32 79ft ZCAT3035 1330 1 2 4 Cable clamp mounting position Inside control box 20 to 30c
142. and Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV 25 to 60Hz noise frequency Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output F Built in Unchangeable by user Application ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU pP module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A current SN Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max Life Mechanical More than 20 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current Esch REES diriensiong We 5h S D OBS o O 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Power Supply Module Specifications Continued Performance Specifications l Item Q64P Base loading position Power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q30B Q60B 10 15 85V to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC Within 5 refer to section 5 1 3 Rated output current avoe Pe Overcurrent 9 9A or more protection 1 Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 Allowable momentary power failure Within 20ms period 3 Dielectric withstand voltade Across inputs LG and outputs FG S 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft i Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and LG FG across outputs Insulation resistance g and FG LG 10M9 or more by insulation resistance tester 100 to 120VAC 200 to 240VAC Input power supply e By noise simula
143. andard ROM e Enforced ON OFF for external I O e Remote password setting e Increased standard RAM capacity of Q12HCPU Q25HCPU e Compatibility with MELSECNET H remote I O network e Interrupt module QI60 compatibility e Compatibility with the multiple CPU system Version 6 or later i e Installation of PC CPU module into the 03051 or later multiple CPU system Version 7 or later e High speed interrupt function e Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction e Selection of refresh item for COM 04012 or later instruction e Extended life battery of SRAM card e Compatibility with 2Mbyte SRAM card e Increased standard RAM capacity of QO02HCPU QO6HCPU D n e SFC program online batch change Y 04122 or later File memory capacity change Version 8 or later e CC Link remote network additional mode e Incomplete derivative PID operation 05032 or later function e Floating point comparison instruction speedup 02092 or later Version 6 or later For the details of the added functions in Table 1 1 refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals Refer to Section 2 3 for the serial No and function version of the High Performance model QCPU Refer to Appendix 3 3 for details of compatible GX Developer in Table 1 1 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 1 1 Features High Performance model QCPU has the following
144. aracter 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 1st character of extension 2EH 3rd character of 2nd character of extension extension b15 to D910 Stored in sequence that PU key code was entered b8 b7 to bO 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character 18th character 17th character 20th character 19th character 22nd character 21st character 24th character 23rd character 26th character 25th character 28th character 27th character 30th character 29th character 32nd character 31st character MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU DTT Corresponding CPU S Status change S Status change New S During execution 11 87 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences ACPU special registers D9000 to D9255 correspond to the special registers SD1000 to SD1255 after A series to the Q QnA series conversion These special registers are all set by the system and users cannot use them to set program data Users who need to set data with these registers should edit the special registers for the Q QnA However before conversio
145. are stored here Slot No Number Meaning SD5 Slot No PLC No Base No 1 2 SD6 VO No Not used for base No SD7 SD8 SD9 SD10 SD11 Vacant SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 1 For a multiple CPU system the slot number or CPU number is stored depending on the error that occurred Slot 0 in the multiple CPU system is the one on the slot on the right of the rightmost CPU module Refer to the corresponding error code for which number has Error Error common been stored common information No 1 CPU 1 No 2 CPU 2 No 3 CPU 3 No 4 CPU 4 information If a fuse blown or I O verify error occurred in the module loaded in the MELSECNET H remote I O station the network number is stored into the upper 8 bits and the station number into the lower 8 bits Use the I O No to check the module where the fuse blown or I O verify error occurred File name Drive name Example Number Meaning ABCDEFGH IJK SD5 Drive b15 to b8 b7 to b0 Spe 42H B 41H A SD7 File name 444 D 43H C SD8 ASCII code 8 characters 46H F 45H E SD9 48H H 47H G SD10 Extension 3 2EH aen 2EH SD11 ASCII code 3 characters 4BH K 4AH J SD12 SD13 SD14 SD15 Vacant 3 Refer to REMARK 1 Extensions are shown below SD10 ST Se EN Higher8 bits Lowers bits Higher8 bits xtensionname retype Pp SIH THT AH LI oD Deviceinitialvalue po STH aH n QDR
146. ase E 6 2 Index 1 Cablen sna fet tiassasnaia atte a tenets 6 3 9 19 EE CN 2 4 6 7 External dimensions CPU module c cececeeeeeseeeee App 7 4 3 Base um App 9 6 1 Power supply mocdule App 7 5 1 G GX Developer A 12 H High Performance model QCPU A 12 1 1 I VO control mode ecceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeeaes 4 1 Installation and removal 9 9 Intelligent function module Direct deviece 4 3 LIM he teehee ee ee See 2 6 Internal current CONSUMPTION eee eee 4 3 L tatth range ana AA 4 3 LED BAT iS turned on 11 8 BOOT is flickering c e 11 9 ERR is turned on flickering 11 7 MODE is not turned om 11 3 MODE is flickering s s s 11 4 POWER is turned oft 11 5 RUN is turned off flickering 11 6 USER is turned ON essees 11 8 N MO S 2 caccetieccaetihistescadecte iaiia 4 4 Bu EE 2 6 Link direct device eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeteteeees 4 3 M Maximum number of extension stages 2 4 Memory G pacity irnn a ia 4 1 Card E 7 1 N Number of device I O points 4 1 Number of occupied I O points 4 1 Index 1 P POrfOrimane ceeeceeeceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeneteeeteeeteees 4 1 Power supply module External dimensions dagram App 7 Example Of wiring ceeeeeeeseeneeeteeeeees 9 25 INStANAtION AA 9 14 Names of parts and settings eee 5 8 Specifications ninsis aei
147. at a speed of 115 2kbps max by the RS 232 and a communication time efficiency at the time of debugging has been increased In the Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU and Q25HCPU a high speed communication at a speed of 12Mbps is allowed through the USB 26k step program transfer time Q25HCPU USB 12 Q25HCPU RS 232 30 Q2ASHCPU i 86 A2USHCPU S1 94 ee O S O a E 0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 Unit s 5 AnS series I O module or special function module are available For Q series if an appropriate module is not available the AnS series UO module or special function module can also be used for the High Performance model QCPU through the use of the QA1S65B QA1S68B extension base unit 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 6 Saved space by a reduction in size The installation space for Q series has been reduced by approx 60 of the space for AnS series Comparison of installation space MELSEC Atseap MELSEC AiSHeeu e PERG RUN ICL yal RUN Bd C RESET MITSUBISHI MITSUBISI M ere oxp 3 86 lt PULL PULL L USB ae Y PULL AIA S oo e 00 Joe or zl tal es Pr s o eoa ofo0 Josee rale il ES CS CGS OSs KEE SSCS CS ESS MITSUBISHI D 5 Slot Main Base Unit 245mm 9 65inch X 8 Slot Main Base Unit 32
148. ated below Boot operation QBT Parameters QPA Device comments QCD Device initial value QDI File register R QDR Sampling trace QTS Status latch QTL Program trace QTP Memory card A use conditions Indicates the drive 3 4 models b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 Simulation data QDS CPU fault history QFD SFC trace QTR Local device QDL Not used Not used Not used Not used to b 0 A Drive 3 Fixed at 1 11 82 Standrd RAM Drive 4 Fixed at 3 Stanga Rom Trei gd S Status change S Status change S Initial 11 82 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU SE g Do E e Indicates memory card B models installed b15 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to b 0 Memory card Memory card Drive 1 0 Does not exist Si B models B models RAM model 1 SRAM S Initial New Drive 2 0 Does not exist BOM adel 2 E7PROM ROM model ch ROM S Ini Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units QCPU Q2A S1 SD622 e Se ne Q3A e Drive 3 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units ial New Q4A Q4AR e Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units i d Q2A S1 Drive 4 SD623 e l kp Q3A capacity Drive 4 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units Q4A Q4AR The conditions for usage for drive 3 4 are stored as bit patterns In use when ON
149. aulty Refer to Section 10 3 2 2 y Completion 10 9 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 2 CPU module Q7BAT battery replacement procedure When the Q6BAT Q7BAT battery of the CPU module has been exhausted replace the battery in the following procedure The PLC power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the battery Even when the battery is dismounted the memories are backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value specified in the table below the contents stored in the memories may be erased To prevent this trouble replace the battery speedily Backup time by capacitor Replacing battery Backup time by capacitor min Turn off the PLC power supply j 3 Remove the CPU module from the base unit Remove the battery holder at the CPU module s bottom x1 When disconnecting the battery connector hold the connector part being careful not to damage the Q7BAT to be _ battery cable replaced by Q7BAT Disconnect the battery connector and pull out the Q6BAT Q7BAT being used Battery holder Confirm the type of the old battery Q6BAT to be replaced by Q7BAT Insert the new Q7BAT into the holder Connect the Q7BAT to the battery connector of the CPU module and set it into the connector holder of the battery holder Set the batt
150. b D9105 D1306 Fuse blown modules whose D9106 1 1 Error Rem D1307 module fuses have blown D1300 wea va SENEN D9107 SE D1308 0 No blown fuse 51301 vo 0 0 1 Blown fuse CH EE CC 4 present D1331 H H Joe H D New to New ae Indicates a blown fuse Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one New This flag is cleared by error resetting operation Bit pattern in units The module number in units of 16 points whose external power of 16 points supply has been disconnected is input as a bit pattern indicating the If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set Ext modules whose numbers are used xternal external power b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b4 b3 b2 bi bO power SUPPY Lech hasbeen L psen o oloinlaeloininloig o o disconnected 1 E N QCPU rode disconnected D1351 ololololilolololo olo S Error ew Remote 0 External power A Ces For future yar eer ee supply LEE se SS expansion disconnected 11 99 o n 1 External power supply is not disconnected EE Indicates a blown fuse URL RRE Wd 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue 12 I O module verification Colresponding Correspondin Number Name Meaning Explanation ACPU as 9 e When the I O modules whose I O mod
151. below are stored in SD203 b15 to bi2b11 to be b7 to Remote RUN STOP CPU key switch b ti E o R of av Operating status Operating status of s D9015 ema Ge ee STEP RUN Remains the same in remote RUN STOP mode Status in program Remote RUN STOP 0 Except below ey parameter seina STOP 1 instruction execution PAUSE 341 x 1 When the CPU mdoule is in RUN mode and SM1040 is off the CPU module remains in RUN mode if changed to PAUSE mode Main program ROM Main program RAM Subprogram 1 RAM Subprogram 2 RAM Subprogram 3 RAM Subprogram 1 ROM Indicates which sequence program is run presently D016 SR Subprogram 2 One value of 0 to B is stored in BIN code ROM Subprogram 3 ROM Main program E PROM Subprogram 1 E PROM Subprogram 2 E PROM Subprogram 3 E PROM If scan time is smaller than the content of SD520 the D9017 SD1017 SD520 Sean tine Minimum Apel time value is newly stored at each END Namely the l 10 ms units minimum value of scan time is stored into SD520 in BIN code n tim n time i red in BIN h END an D9018 SD1018 SD524 Scan time Scan ti e Scan time E stored i code at eac and 10 ms units always rewritten 11 90 11 90 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification D1019 D1020 D1021
152. ce be designated by the SFC program A 3 Th 7 mult jive Slaps in all blocks that check error step corresponding to its numerical value program can be designated Program scan time for initial execution type programs exceeds the 5000 initial execution WDT time setting designated in the PLC RAS Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral parameter device check the numerical value time there and shorten scan parameter PLC RAS parameter 1 The scan time of the program exceeded the constant scan e Review the constant scan setting time 5010 setting time specified in the PLC RAS setting parameter e Review the constant scan time and low speed program execution 2 The low speed program execution time specified in the PC RAS time in the parameter so that the margin time of constant scan setting parameter exceeded the margin time of constant scan may be fully reserved Read the individual intormation of the error using the peripheral Low speed execution type program scan time goes over the low A 5011 speed execution WDT set in the parameter PLC RAS settings ee numerical value time there and shorten scan 6000 The control system and standby system in the redundant system do Synchronise the programs and parameters of the control system not have the same programs and parameters and standby system Q4AR 6010 The operational status of the control system and standby system in Synchronise the operation statuses of the
153. ce j W 1 is not set correctly The module No network No character string count specified by the extension instruction is outside the setting range The character string specified by the extension instruction is unusable 4103 The configuration of the PID dedicated instruction is incorrect Read the common information of the error using peripheral device 4104 The number of settings is beyond the range and check and correct the program corresponding to that value program error location Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Using the multiple CPU dedicated instruction completion bit provide interlocks to prevent one CPU module from executing 32 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions Numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction are beyond 32 SE numbers of execution to the CC Link instruction to 32 or 4108 The CC Link parameter is not set when the CC Link instruction is Execute the CC Link instruction after setting the CC Link executed parameter With high speed interrupt setting execute PR PRC UDCNT1 Delete the high speed interrupt parameter setting When using high speed interrupt delete the PR PRC UDCNT1 le DEE oer UDCNT2 PLSY PWM SPD PLOAD PUNLOAD and PSWAP instructions 33 or more multiple CPU dedicated instructions were executed from one CPU module
154. cial Relay List SE e Diagnostic errors Self diagnosis error Error common information Error individual information Battery low latch SM16 SM51 AC DC DOWN detection MINI link errors Operation Errors Blown fuse detection WO module verification error Annunciator detection CHK detection 11 45 No error Error No self diagnosis errors Self diagnosis No error common information Error common information No error common information Error common information Battery low AC DC DOWN not detected AC DC DOWN detected Normal Error Normal Operation error Normal Module with blown fuse Normal Error Not detected Detected Not detected e Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis Includes when an annunciator is ON and when an error is detected with CHK instruction E New e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter e Turns ON if an error occurs as a result of diagnosis Does not include when an annunciator is ON or when an error is detected by the CHK instruction S Error M9008 e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter SR TE SS e When SM0 is ON ON if there is error common S Error e e information When SM0 is ON ON if there is error individual W 8 W information W e Conducts error reset operation i N ror reset Ee See secti
155. cifies other stations has been used for specifying the host CPU An instruction that does not allow the host CPU to be specified An instruction which on execution specifies the host CPU has been used for specifying other CPUs An instruction that does not allow other stations to be specified 1 An instruction that does not allow the under the control of another CPU to be specified is being used for a similar task 2 Instruction was executed for the A or QnA module under control of another CPU 2113 2114 2115 2116 2117 When the online module change setting has been set to enable in the parameter of the Process CPU in a multiple PLC system the intelligent function module controlled by another PLC has been specified in the FROM instruction intelligent function module device ULNGL A1SJ71AR21 or A1SJ71AT2B dedicated for the AZUSCPU has 2 Network module A1SJ71QLP21 or A1SJ71QBR11 dedicated for A CPU module that cannot be specified in the instruction dedicated to the multiple CPU system was specified MELSEC Q orres Corrective Action ponding CPU Change network module to MELSECNET H module Change network module to A 1S J71QLP21 or A 1S J71QBR11 The control system and standby system module configurations are different when a redundant system is in the backup mode Check the module configuration of the standby system Read the individual information of the error usi
156. contact area All fastenings must be metallic and the shield and earthing contact must be made over the largest available surface area If the contact surfaces are too uneven for optimal contact to be made either use washers to correct for surface inconsistencies or use an abrasive to level the surfaces The following diagrams show examples of how to provide good surface contact of shield earthing by use of a cable clamp 1 Earthing of shielded of shield cable a Earth the shield of the shielded cable as near the module as possible taking care so that the earthed cables are not induced electromagnetically by the cable to be earthed b Take an appropriate measures so that the shield section of the shielded cable from which the outer cover was partly removed for exposure is earthed to the control panel on an increased contact surface A clamp may also be used as shown in the figure below In this case however apply a cover to the painted inner wall surface of the control panel which comes in contact with the clamp section Note The method of earthing by soldering a wire onto the shield section of the shielded cable as shown below is not recommended The high frequency impedance will increase and the shield will be ineffective Clamp fitting Paint mask Shielded cable Shielded cable Wire Crimp terminal 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 2 MELSEC Q MELSECNET H module Always use a double shielded coaxial cable
157. could result in electric shock Undertightening of terminal screws can cause a short circuit or malfunction Overtightening of screws can cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER The online operations conducted for the CPU module being operated connecting the peripheral device especially when changing data or operation status shall be conducted after the manual has been carefully read and a sufficient check of safety has been conducted Operation mistakes could cause damage or problems with of the module Do not disassemble or modify the modules Doing so could cause trouble erroneous operation injury or fire Use any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone more than 25cm 9 85 inch away from the PLC Not doing so can cause a malfunction Switch all phases of the external power supply off before mounting or removing the module If you do not switch off the external power supply it will cause failure or malfunction of the module Do not drop or give an impact to the battery installed in the module Otherwise the battery will be broken possibly causing internal leakage of electrolyte Do not use but dispose of the battery if it has fallen or an impact is given to it Always make sure to touch the grounded metal to discharge the electricity charged in the electricity charged in th
158. d ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion Special Register for Modification For sampling trace D9044 SD1044 D9049 SD1049 D9050 SD1050 D9051 SD1051 D9052 SD1052 Work area for SFC SFC program error number Error transition D9053 SD1053 D9054 SD1054 D9055 SD1055 D9060 SD1060 D9072 SD1072 D9081 SD1081 11 92 Error sequence step Status latch Software version PLC communications check Number of empty blocks in communications request registrtion area WM TT Ill CL Error block Meaning Step or time during sampling trace Block number of extension file register Error code generated by SFC program Block number where error occurred Step number where error occurred Transition condition number where error occurred Sequence step number where error occurred Status latch step Software version of internal software Computer link data check Number of empty blocks in communications request registration area Corresponding Detail etails CPU Turned on off with a peripheral device At scanning At time Time 10 msec unit Stores the value in BIN code Stores the block number of the expansion file register which is used as the work area for the execution of a SFC program in a binary value Stores 0 if an empty area of 16K bytes or smaller which cannot be expansion file register No 1 is used or if SM320 is OFF e Stores
159. d The specified program does not est Jeck the specified file name and make a correction program Check the specified file name and make a correction App 4 App 4 APPENDICES Error description Error code Error hexadecimal item 4150H 41511 An attempt was made to format the drive protected by the system An attempt was made to delete the file protected by the system The multiple block online change system file does not exist 41654 41D0x 41D1H 41D5H A1 Du A1E9H A1EBu A1ECH 41EDH 41F24 A1EAu A1EBu 41FCH 41FDH A1FEx A1FFH 4A001 4A01H 4A02H AED Object related error The route directory has no free space The file pointer is insufficient The file of the same name exists The disk is write protected The drive does not respond The address or sector is not found The file cannot be accessed properly The drive f is illegal File related e drive format data is illegal errors At the time of file access time out occurred The disk is logically broken An attempt to make a file continuous failed There are enough free file areas which cannot be taken continuously The specified drive is ROM Program write was performed beyond the sequence execution region The same starting source has already opened An attempt was made to erase the mounted drive The Flash ROM is not formatted The memory card is not inserted The memory card type differs
160. d main module 2 Battery holder Battery holder fixing Locked at LOCK position write protect switch side switch LOCK Locked RELEASE Unlocked SRAM card only Used to set write inhibit in the memory At the time of shipping it is set at OFF Write protect switch SRAM card and Flash card only ON Data write inhibited OFF Data write enabled The battery holder fixing switch is returned automatically from RELEASE to LOCK when the battery holder is disconnected 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures 1 To install the memory card Install the memory card into the CPU module while paying attention to the orientation of the memory card Insert the memory card securely into the connector until the height of the memory card reaches that of the memory card EJECT button Memory card EJECT button CPU Memory card module Insert it in this Precautions direction on this side 2 To remove the memory card To remove the memory card from the CPU module press the memory card EJECT button to push out the card Memory card EJECT button lt q Duch Memory card CPU module Remove the card in this direction H 3 To extract the memory card while the power is turned on Before removing the memory card make sure that the special relays SM604 SM605 are OFF e When SM604 is ON the memory card cannot be removed since the CPU m
161. d remote I O modules Data stored in the special registers are stored as BIN values if no special designation has been made to the contrary The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user Sequence programs or test operations from GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt Indicated only for registers set by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Error Set when error occurs Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates corresponding special register in ACPU D9 _ _ _ Change and notation when Corresponding ACPU there has been a change in contents Mal III e New indicates the item that has been newly added to the High Performance model QCPU QnACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU module QCPU Can be applied to High Performance model QCPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU series Remote Can be applied to the MELSEC
162. day e Saturday Example Friday H0005 0 must be set E ion fil he block No of th ion fil i D9035 SD1035 SD648 xtension ile Use block No Stores t e bloc o of the extension file register register being used in BCD code Extension file registerfor designation of device number D9036 SD1036 X D9037 SD1037 ba D9038 D1038 SD207 D9039 SD1039 SD208 11 91 LED display priority ranking Device number when individual devices from extension file register are directly accessed Priorities 1 to 4 Priorities 5 to 7 Designate the device number for the extension file register for direct read and write in 2 words at SD1036 and SD1037 in BIN data Use consecutive numbers beginning with RO of block No 1 to designate device numbers Exetension file register oin e ea to 16383 16384 to Block No 1 area Block No 2 area D1037 SD1036 Device No BIN data Sets priority of ERROR LEDs which illuminate or flicker to indicate errors with error code numbers Configuration of the priority setting areas is as shown below b15 to b12b11 to Priority 4 Priority 3 b8b7__ to Priority 2 b4 b3 to Priority 1 b D207 SD208 For details refer to the applicable CPUs User s Manual and the ACPU Programming manual Fundamentals Priority 7 Priority 6 Priority 5 11 91 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue
163. de Input signal Figure below does not Input modul turn OFF rr 1O 2 a E o Ee LI Input module Change response time setting Example ims 5ms Setting of a shorter response time may produce a higher effect on periodic excessive noise If no Depending on response time setting noise is effects are produced by the above take basic imported as input actions to prevent excessive noise form entering e g avoid bundling the power and I O cables and suppress noise by adding surge absorbers to such noise sources as relays and conductors used with the same power supply False input due to noise Example 6 11 41 11 41 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q lt Calculation example of Example 4 gt QX40 Leakage current 2 33mA If a switch with an LED display Input module je connected to QX40 and current of 2 33 mA is leaked 24VDC Voltage Vtg across the terminal and common base is VTB 2 33 MA X5 6 kQ 13 V Ignore the voltage drop caused by the LED Because the condition for the OFF voltage lt 11 V is not satisfied the input does not turn off To correct this connect a resistor as shown below QX40 H Input impedance 5 6kQ H zeie 24VDC Calculation of current for resistor R The voltage of QX40 across the terminals must be reduced to 11 V or less The required current 24 11 V 4 7 kQ 2 77 mA Therefore resistor R of flowing current o
164. device points Device having a direct access to link device MELSECNET 10 H use only Specified form JOO XOO JOO YOO JOO Woo JOO BOO JOO SwWOo JOO sBooO i Device having a direct access to the buffer memory of the intelligent Intelligent function module device 8 ES function module Specified form UOO GOO LO to 8191 default Latch range can be set for B F V T ST C D and W Set parameter values RUN and PAUSE contacts can be set from among X0 to 1FFF respectively Link direct device Latch power failure compensation range Remote RUN PAUSE contact Year month day hour minute second day of the week leap year automatic distinction Clock function Accuracy 3 18 to 5 25s TYP 2 12s d at 0 C Accuracy 3 93 to 5 25s TYP 1 90s d at 25 C Accuracy 14 69 to 3 53s TYP 3 67s d at 55 C Allowable momentary power failure period Varies according to the type of power supply module 5VDC internal current consumption 0 60A 0 64A 0 64A 0 64A 0 64A 98mm 3 86inch External dimensions 27 4mm 1 08inch ob 89 3mm 3 52inch ommes o O 020g aa o2og aa vam x6 The step relays are devices for the SFC function 7 In a program only FXO to FX4 and FYO to FY4 can be used 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 2 Part Names and Settings This section explains the part names and settings of the module With front cover open Front face P
165. dicates the number of slave stations in one loop device stations slave stations D9245 SD1245 11 98 Special Register for Modification Local station and remote UO station loop error Number of times communications errors detected Local station link type Station number information for host station Number of times communications errors detected Meaning Stores conditions or up to numbers 1to8 Stores conditions or up to numbers 9 to 16 Stores conditions or up to numbers 17 to 24 Stores conditions or up to numbers 25 to 32 Stores conditions or up to numbers 33 to 40 Stores conditions or up to numbers 41 to 48 Stores conditions or up to numbers 49 to 56 Stores conditions or up to numbers 57 to 64 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Stores conditions for up to numbers 33 to 48 Stores conditions for up to numbers 49 to 64 Stores station number 0 to 64 Stores cumulative total of receive errors Details Stores the local or remote station number at which a forward or reverse loop error has occurred Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 bs b7 b6 F RIF nlrinir D1232 L R7 RIF Re D1233 L R15 RIF Gs D1234 L R23 RIF DIE D1235 L R31 RIF HIE D1236 L R39 Pir HIE D1237 L R47 HIE HIE D1238 L R55 HIE HIE D1239
166. ding to the abnormal operation of the whole system and in a fail safe viewpoint areas which can result in machine breakdown and accidents due to abnormal operations e g emergency stop protective and interlock circuits should be constructed outside the PLC The following page gives examples of system designing in the above viewpoint 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 1 System design circuit example when not using ERR contact of power supply module POWER SUPPLY power FORAC FOR AC DC SUPPLY S Ee Input switched E TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER TRANSFORMER oe 500 H FUSE established RUSE PUSE H V CPU MODULE T E G D king 7 q SM52 POWER PEH RUN STOP circuit SM403 f G interlocked with RA1 ee El run monitor relay M H FUSE r NS i Set time for DC l power supply to be established SEN rae aaa C1 j pan See eH 3 JGRAN i GM eo eo Lo O QO OUTPUT MODULE Low battery alarm Ym Lamp or buzzer Voltage relay is RA1 switched ON by recommended SM403 ch Yn A run monitor relay L u Low battery alarm OUTPUT MODULE MC wer ee Lamp or buzzer d GE w Power to output equipment es yall ON when run by MC switched OFF when the A SM403 STOP signal is given Yn In the case of an D RAI 7 emergency stop or a l stop caused by a limit Se EE OUTPUT MODULE
167. dule For system protection and parameter valid drive functions refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals SW1 Used to set system protection Batch inhibits write and control directives to the CPU module Shipped in OFF position OFF No protection ON Protection SW2 SW3 Used to specify parameter valid drive Both SW2 and SW3 are shipped in OFF position Program memory Drive 0 Standard ROM Drive 4 Note Parameters cannot be stored in standard RAM Drive 3 RUN STOP switch RUN Executes sequence program operation STOP Stops sequence program operation RESET Used to perform hardware reset operation fault rest operation initialization etc If this switch is left in the RESET position the whole system will be reset and 15 DIP switches RESET L CLR switch the system will not operate properly After performing reset always return this switch to the neutral position L CLR Used to turn OFF or zero all data in the parameter set latch area Used to clear the sampling trace and status latch registration Module fixing screw hole Hole for the screw used to fix to the base unit M3 X 12 screw Module fixing latch Hook used to fix to the base unit For connection of battery lead wires 18 Battery connector pin When shipped from the factory the lead wires are disconnected from the connecto
168. dule may not work normally if the above intermediate voltage is applied 3 Ensure that the earth terminals LG and FG are grounded 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 2 A1S61PN A1S62PN and A1S63P 9 9 9 MELSECAtse61PN MELSECAtse2Pn MELSECA ise3P POWER O POWER O4 1 MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI MITSUBISHI INPUT OUTPUT INPUT TPUT INPUT OUTPUT 100 240VAC 5VDC 5A 100 240VAC C 3A DC15 6 31 2V DC 5V 5A 24VDC 0 6A 50 60Hz 50 60Hz E F p C ele Dua Dua es lei ei zllel ele TINPUT INPUT Si vleit ei ele ole _ 100 240VAC te _ 100 240VAC A1S61PN A1S62PN D I A1S62PN Application 5VDC power indicator LED Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module using external wiring Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board 4 LG terminals Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of A1S61PN or A1S62PN terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage Power input terminals Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply Power input terminals Used to connect a 24 VDC power supply 7 Terminal screw M3 5 X 7 screw GE Protective cover
169. dules Normally off when loaded in an extension base unit FG terminal Ground terminal connected to the shield pattern of the printed circuit board r UG ierninal Grounding for the power supply filter The potential of Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q64P and Q61SP terminal is 1 2 of the input voltage S 24V 24G terminals Used to supply 24VDC power to inside the output module using external wiring 6 Terminal screw M3 5 x 7 screw Terminal cover Protective cover of the terminal block a Medi ting screw roie Used to fix the module to the base unit M3 x 12 screw user prepared 8 Module fixing screw hole Tightening torque 36 to 48Necm Used to load the module into the base unit Used to connect a 100VAC power supply Used to connect a 200VAC power supply Used to connect a 100VAC to 200VAC power supply 13 Used to connect a 24VAC power supply 14 Used to connect a 100VAC 200VAC power supply POINTS 1 The Q61P A1 is dedicated for inputting a voltage of 100 VAC Do not input a voltage of 200 VAC into it or trouble may occur on the Q61P A1 Power Supply power voltage module type 100VAC 200VAC P l l Q61P A1 Operates normally EE S Power supply module does not cause trouble 1P A2 lly so CPU module cannot be Operates morally operated 2 Q64P automatically switches the input range 100 200VAC Therefore it is not compatible with the intermediate voltage 133 to 169VAC The CPU mo
170. e 4 The Ethernet specific parameter setting is not normal namultiple CPU system the Q series CC Link module under control of another station is specified as the head I O number of the CC Link setting parameter Though the number of CC Link module set in the network parameters is one or more the actually mounted number of units is zero The head I O number in the common parameters is different from that of the actually mounted module The station class for the CC Link module quantity set parameters is different from that of the actually mounted station 3102 The CC Link link refresh range exceeded the file register capacity The network refresh parameter for CC Link is out of range 1 The CC Link parameter setting is incorrect 2 The set mode is not be allowed for the version of the mounted CC Link module The parameter setting is illegal 1 Though Block 0 was set to Automatic start in the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box Block 0 does not exist 3107 3200 EI the number used by the program other than the scan execution type 3300 The head I O number in the intelligent function module parameter set on GX Configurator differs from the actual I O number The refresh setting of the intelligent function module exceeded the file register capacity 3301 The intelligent function module s refresh parameter setting is outside the available range 3302 The intelligent function module s re
171. e D354 module S Initial New nn D Information from 3r 335 10 See e Configuration is identical to that for the first module D361 module D362 Information from pia ormanon Mo Configuration is identical to that for the first module 4th module D341 DEER number of mounted Ethernet module D342 eene of mounted Ethemetmodie No of mounted Ethernet module information nn nn g wo Q HI e 4 psilo IP address 1 IP address of mounted Ethernet module D346 S Ee code of mounted Ethernet module D347 ne is identical to that for the first module NIN Oo D348 to D354 D355 to D361 2 to Ethernet Information from 4th Fass 8 Gs D362 to Configuration is identical to that for the first module S Initial New D368 information module b15 to b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO o to 0 Not used L Instruction reception status of channel 1 Instruction reception status of channel 2 Ethernet Instruction reception status of channel 3 instruction Instruction reception L Instruction reception status of channel 4 reception status of 1st module L Instruction reception status of channel 5 S Initial L Instruction reception status of channel 6 status L Instruction reception status of channel 7 Instruction reception status of channel 8 ON Received Channel is used OFF Not received Channel is not used nn Coniguatonistentcltothtforhefistmeie is identical to that for the first module nn
172. e I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt 4 Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3 x 12 5 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw DIN rail adapter Module connector Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 2 Slim type main base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Connector for installing the power supply module CPU module I O modules and intelligent function module To the connectors located in the spare space where these modules are not installed attach the supplied connector cover or the blank cover module QG60 to prevent entry of dirt oy Module fixing screw hole Screw hole for fixing the module to the base unit Screw size M3 x 12 3 Base mounting hole Hole for mounting this base unit onto the panel of the control panel for M4 screw DIN rail adapter 7 4 f Hole for mounting DIN rail adapter mounting hole 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 3 Extension base unit Q5 L B Q6 L B QA1S6 L B
173. e designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e Repeatedly changes between ON and OFF at each designated time interval When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program e This relay alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time unit s specified in SD414 When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program This relay alternates between ON and OFF at intervals of the time unit ms specified in SD415 When PLC power supply is turned OFF or a CPU module reset is performed goes from OFF to start e Note that the ON OFF status changes when the designated time has elapsed during the execution of the program S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Every END processing S Status change S Status change S Status change S Status change M9034 format change 11 49 MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Peace e v9 OOL SM420 User timing clock wen No 0 SM421 User timing clock e Relay repeats ON OFF switching at fixed scan intervals No 1 When PLC power supp
174. e monitoring timer starts If the transfer condition following a step which corresponds to the timer is not established within set time set annunciator F is tuned on 11 93 11 ACPU Special Special Register after Conversion Conversion D1125 D1126 D1127 D1128 D1129 D1130 D1131 D1132 11 94 Special Register for Modification TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued UO module verification error Annunciator detection quantity Annunciator detection number Meaning Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules with verification errors Annunciator detection quantity Annunciator detection number Corresponding Details CPU e When I O modules of which data are different from those entered at power on have been detected the VO unit numbers in units of 16 points are entered in bit pattern Preset I O unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b T SD1116 0 0j0 ojo 0 0 0 0 0 O eg 1 D1117 0 0 0 0 0 0jojojojojo 0 SD1123 0 0 0 exy 0 ojojojojojo 0 780 oe V O module verify error e UO module verify check is executed also to remo UO station modules If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program When one of FO to 255 FO to 2047
175. e 8 13 8 2 4 Control box 8 13 8 25 EROTUTA O BEE 8 14 CET ue E 8 14 9 1 General Safety Heouirements AA 9 1 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by DU 9 6 Ee HERE 9 9 9 3 1 Precaution on RL E Ee e EE 9 9 9 3 2 Instructions for Mounting the base unit oo ee eee eee ene cent eeaeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeesas 9 13 9 3 3 Installation and removal Of module AA 9 16 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Un 9 20 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable ccccecceceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaesaeeeeeeeeeaeeaeeeeseeeaees 9 21 CW Olne E 9 24 9 6 1 The precautions on the wimg ceeeeeceeeeneeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeeeaeesaeeneeeaeeeaeenas 9 24 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module 9 27 LOA Dally Ig DO CtOM EE 10 2 10 2 ee el Oe et BEE 10 3 10 3 Battery Replacement asrnane A AAAA AAA 10 4 10 9 Battery Horr e E a nde wet E E TEA 10 5 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure s ssessessssresrssrernssnsrnssnerunnnernsnnenannnnnasnnnnanennnnsanenannnnnanannnannnnannnnt 10 9 10 4 When Resuming Operation after Storage of PLC without Battery c cccesesseeeseeeseeeeseeeeeeeneeaes 10 13 10 5 When Resuming PLC Operation after Storage of PLC with Battery Gone Flat 10 14 A 8 A 8 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 1 to 11 101 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics AAA 11 1 1122 TrOUDIES MOOTING DEE 11 2 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart AAA 11 2 11 2 2 Flowchart for when
176. e The CPU switch status is stored in the following format b15 to b12b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b L L L Ka il Sa L Ka Vacant CPU key Status of switch Memory cards switch b4 corresponds to memory card A and b5 corresponds to memory card B OFF at 0 ON at 1 b8 through b12 correspond to SW1 through SW5 of system setting switch 1 b14 and b15 correspond to SW1 and SW2 of system setting switch 2 respectively OFF at 0 ON at 1 S Every END processing 11 73 11 73 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Meaning D201 LED status Bit pattern of SD202 LED off LED that is turned off Operating status of CPU Test not yet executed During X device test During Y device test During X Y device test Device test execution type 11 74 Special Register List Continued Explanation The following bit patterns are used to store the statuses of the LEDs on the CPU module b15 to b12b11 to D b7 to b4 b3 to BO BOOT Vacant CT Vacant 8 MODE Bit patterns for MODE 0 OFF 1 Green 2 Orange Information concerning which of the following status the LEDs on the CPU module are in is stored in the following bit patterns O is off 1 is on and 2 is flicker b15 to bi2b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to b es ee eee BOOT CARD A Memory card A CARD B Memory card B DI Vacant e Stores bit patterns of LEDs turned of
177. e body etc before touching the module Failure to do say cause a failure or malfunctions of the module DISPOSAL PRECAUTIONS A CAUTION When disposing of this product treat it as industrial waste TRANSPORTATION PRECAUTIONS A CAUTION When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations Refer to Appendix 4 for details of the controlled models REVISIONS x The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date _ Manual Number Dec 1999 SH NA 080037 A First edition Sep 2000 SH NA 080037 B Addition model Q33B Q63B Q63P Addition Section 2 3 4 5 11 2 3 11 2 10 11 2 11 Partial correction Section 1 2 2 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 1 5 2 8 1 5 11 2 1 11 3 2 11 5 1 11 6 11 7 Jun 2001 SH NA 080037 C Addition model Q62P Q52B Q55B QC05B Addition Section 6 6 Partial correction Section 2 1 2 2 4 1 4 2 5 1 5 6 1 6 2 6 3 8 1 5 11 2 4 11 7 Sep 2001 SH NA 080037 D Addition model Q64P Partial correction CONTENTS Section 4 1 5 1 1 5 1 2 5 2 6 1 6 2 8 1 5 11 5 1 Appendix1 2 2 2 Apr 2002 SH NA 080037 E Partial correction Chapter 1 Section 1 1 2 1 2 2 2 3 4 1 5 1 1 7 1 7 2 7 3 10 3 1 10 3 2 Oct 2002 SH NA 080037 F Complete review Addition model Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB Q61SP
178. e effects of voltage drop 1 When only the Q50B is connected to the extension base unit a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension stage b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit OC Extension Cable Power Extension Cable suppl Conductor SE pply Type A module Resistance Q Vi R1 Extension base unit Q5DB QC05B 0 044 A QC06B 0 051 Y Extension stage 1 zg QC12B 0 082 QC30B 0 172 V2 R2 Extension base unit OSC QC50B 0 273 eel SE Extension stage 2 QC100B 0 530 2 I N SE WK I R Extension base unit Q50B 1 Symbol Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Extension stage 7 Voltage drop at the extension cable between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Vn R1 Cable resistance between the main base unit and extension base unit Cable resistance between the extension base unit extension stage n 1 and extension base unit extension stage n Rn 11 to I7 5VDC current consumption among extension stage 1 to 7 1 x1 Sum total of current consumed b
179. e listed below When the equipment is moved or modified or layout of the wiring is changed also perform this inspection Periodic Inspection Inspection Item Judgment Criteria Ambient temperature When the sequencer is Measure with a thermometer used in the board the Ambient humidity and a hygrometer 5 to 95 RH 1 ambient temperature in Measure corrosive gas the board becomes the i ambient temperature Corrosive gas must not be present Measure a voltage across the 85 to 132VAC Chandethe bower Power voltage terminals of 100 200VAC and 170to264VAC s 7 H 24VDC 15 60 i UDE IT Further tighten screws Move the module to check for The module must be installed If the CPU I O or power looseness and rattling fixedly supply module is loose fix it with screws Ambient environment Looseness rattling S s Es A D Adhesion of dirt and foreign matter Looseness of Try to further tighten screws Screws must not be loose Screws must not be loose Get belooes Further tighten rther Further tighten terminal screws with a screwdriver Proximity of solderless terminals Check visually Solderless terminals must ei Correct to eachother positioned at proper intervals Sooseness of Check visually Connectors must not be loose Further tighten connector connectors fixing screws Even if the lowering of a battery capacity is not shown replace the battery with a new one if a speci
180. e of standby stations the module number of the standby station is stored 1 to 4 Information from ormatio Configuration is identical to that for the 2nd module 2nd module Information from RARA Configuration is identical to that for the 3rd module Information from eck j Configuration is identical to that for the 4th module Set by When set S When changed S Initial S Request S When changed S Initial New New New MELSEC Q Corresponding ACPU Corresponding DT QCPU Remote 11 76 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ee ACPU Corresponding DUU e When Xn0 of the mounted CC Link module turns ON the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC Link module turns OFF the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON e Turns to 1 ON when communication between the mounted CC Link module and CPU module cannot be made Information Information Information At at ret a b15 to bi2b11 to b8b7 to b4b3 to bO QCPU Vacant Remote 1st module 2nd module 3rd module SD280 CC Link error SESCH 4th module Status The above module Nos n are in order of the head I O numbers However the one where parameter setting has not been made is not counted e When Xn0 of the mounted CC Link module turns ON the bit of the corresponding s
181. e slot numbers when fuse blow occurred switch slot No Number of Fuse blown module with blown fuse D9001 SD1001 11 88 11 88 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion D1002 D1004 Special Register for Modification Meaning UO module verification error module number UO module verification error Stores setting status made at parameters modules 1 to 8 MINI link errors AC DOWN counter AC DOWN SD1005 SD1008 Annunciator D 9009 detection D9010 SD1010 11 89 SD1009 SD62 occurred Step number at Error step which operation Pe ITT within 20ms Number of times for within 10ms Self diagnosis _ Self diagnosis error e When error is found as a result of self diagnosis error error number number is stored in BIN code F number at which external failure has error has occurred Corresponding il Details CPU e If UO modules of which data are different from data entered are detected when the power is turned on the first O number of the lowest number unit among the detected units is stored in hexadecimal Storing method is the same as that of SD1000 To monitor the number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1116 to SD1123 are reset to 0 e UO module verify check is executed also to the modules of r
182. e specified module ead the common information of the error using a peripheral mg device check error step corresponding to its numerical value The extension instruction designated by the program has an 4003 incorrect number of devices program error location and correct the problem 4004 The extension instruction designated by the program a device which cannot be used 4010 4020 The total number of internal file pointers used by the program exceeds the number of internal file pointers set in the parameters 4021 4030 4100 The instruction cannot process the contained data 1 The designated device number for data processed by the Read the common information of the error using the peripheral instruction exceeds the usable range device check error step corresponding to its numerical value 2 Alternatively the stored data or constants for the devices program error location and correct the problem designated by the instruction exceeds the usable range am 1 Delete from the program the link direct device which specifies In a multiple CPU system the link direct device JAGO was the network module under control of another CPU specified for the network module under control of another station 2 Using the link direct device specify the network module under control of the host CPU The network number and station number designated with a dedicated network instruction are not correct The link direct devi
183. e the module during CPU RUN To be switched on in peripheral device test mode to change the module during CPU STOP RUN STOP mode must not be changed until I O module change is complete Turned on if the SFC program is registered and turned off if it is not Should be turned on by the program if the SFC program is to be started If turned off operation output of the execution step is turned off and the SFC program is stopped Selects the starting step when the SFC program is restarted using SM322 ON All execution conditions when the SFC program stopped are cleared and the program is started with the initial step of block 0 OFF Started with the step of the block being executed when the program stopped Once turned on the program is latched in the system and remains on even if the power is turned off Should be turned off by the sequence program when turning on the power or when starting with the initial step of block 0 11 58 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Rela Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification SM1103 SM323 SM1114 SM1180 SM1181 SM1182 SM1196 SM1197 SM1198 11 59 OFF Continuous transition not Presence absenc e of continuous ettective Se ON Continuous transition transition effective OFF When transition is completed ON When no transition Continuous transition suspension Ste
184. e2 I1 Extension stage 1 Extension stage 2 The voltage supplied to the IN connector of the Q501B reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the voltage drop V at the extension cable between the main base unit and Q5DB is 0 15 VDC or lower 3 When the GOT is bus connected a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5VDC output voltage of the power supply module on the main base unit is set to at least 4 90VDC Extension stage 3 V R1 R2 R3 I1 Therefore the Q50B can be used if the voltage drop is 0 15VDC or lower 4 9VDC 4 75VDC 0 15VDC Main base unit Q30B Extension Cable Conductor Resistance Q Extension Cable Type Power supply module R1 Extension base unit Q50B QC05B QC06B ues QC12B QC30B i2 GOT l QC50B QC100B GOT gt Number of GOTs connected Max 5 units Symbol Description Voltage drop at the extension cable between the main base unit and extension base unit Q501B 5VDC current consumption when the Q5DB is used as Extension n 1 n 1 to 5 n Extension No of the Q60B connected Sum total of current consumed by Q50B and currents consumed by I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B 5VDC current consumption of the GOT current consumption per GOT is 254mA e Im 254 x c c Number of GOTs connected c 1
185. ead the individual information of the error using the peripheral in a multiple CPU system configuration device and change the faulty station QCPU 7010 An error is detected at the High Performance model QCPU of 2 Change the station of function version A for function version B function function version B 3 Do not reset the CPU modules of CPU No 2 to 4 Reset the High Ver B 3 In a multiple CPU system any of CPU No 2 to 4 was reset Performance model QCPU of CPU No 1 and restart the multiple or later during power on CPU system This error occurs at only the CPU module which was reset In a multiple PLC system a PLC fault occurred at a CPU module P where All station stop by stop error of PLC was not selected in the Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral SE ti U 7020 joperation mode device check the error of the CPU module resulting in CPU module Vor B The error is detected at the CPU module of other than the station fault and remove the error or later where the CPU fault occurred Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral 9000 Annunciator F was set ON device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value annunciator number Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral 9010 Error detected by the CHK instruction device and check the program corresponding to the numerical value error number there 9020 Storage pt aI Onto ROM
186. eck whether the external power supply for output load is ON or OFF e When a display device is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the earth status of the display device x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 1012 1 There is an output module with a blown fuse 2 External power supply for output load is turned off or disconnected 11 20 11 20 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating SES DO Error Messages Information Information LED LEDStatus LED Status L t of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x1 SD16 to 26 x1 RUN CPU 1310 VO INT ERROR SP UNIT DOWN WM 1401 Off On 1402 Program error location Off On 1403 CONTROL BUS ERR Program error location CONTROL BUS ERR CONTROL BUS ERR 1415 CONTROL BUS ERR SYS UNIT DOWN x3 AC DC DOWN ta DC DOWN 5V DC DOWN 5V 5 DC DOWN 24V x3 1 Characters in parentheses 1416 1421 1500 1510 1520 1530 1600 1601 1602 a ge During interrupt At power ON At reset When intelligent function module Stop __ is accessed Continue x3 Flicker On At power ON At reset When an intelligent function module access instruction is executed Cath During execution of FROM TO SSES x6 instruction set When a
187. ed on Completion 11 6 11 6 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 6 When the RUN LED is flickering If the RUN LED flickers follow the steps below The High Performance model QCPU flickers the RUN LED when the RUN STOP switch is set from STOP to RUN after the programs or parameters are written in the CPU module during the stoppage Though this is not the trouble with the CPU module the operation of the CPU module is stopped To bring the CPU module into RUN status reset the CPU module with the RESET L CLR or set the RUN STOP switch again from STOP to RUN The RUN LED turns on 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering 11 7 The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the ERR LED of the CPU module turns on or flickers at PLC power on at operation start or during operation ERR LED is on flickering Confirm details of error by GX Developer Refer to Section 11 3 Hardware fault Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP Modify error details Refer to Section 11 3 Reset by the RESET L CLR switch Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN Can the ERR LED be turned off Completion 11 7 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on If the USER LED turns on follow the
188. eeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeesaeenaeenas App 17 APPENDIX 4 ees Kuer App 17 APPENDIX 4 2 Transport guidelines AAA App 17 INDEX Index 1 to Index 2 Related manual High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals CONTENTS 1 OVERVIEW 1 1 Features 1 2 Programs 1 3 Convenient Programming Devices and Instructions 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM 2 1 System Configuration 2 2 Precaution on System configuration 2 3 Confirming the Serial Number and Function Version 3 PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATION 4 SEQUENCE PROGRAM CONFIGURATION amp EXECUTION CONDITIONS 4 1 Sequence Program 4 1 1 Main routine program 4 1 2 Sub routine programs 4 1 3 Interrupt programs 4 2 Program Execute Type 4 2 1 Initial execution type program 4 2 2 Scan execution type program 4 2 3 Low speed execution type program 4 2 4 Stand by type program 4 2 5 Fixed scan execution type program 4 3 Operation processing 4 3 1 Initial processing 4 3 2 I O refresh I O module refresh processing 4 3 3 Automatic refresh of the intelligent function module 4 3 4 END processing 4 4 RUN STOP PAUSE Operation Processing 4 5 Operation Processing during Momentary Power Failure 4 6 Data Clear Processing 4 7 WO Processing and Response Lag 4 7 1 Refresh mode 4 7 2 Direct mode 4 8 Numeric Values which Can Be Used in Sequence Programs 4 8 1 BIN Binary code 4 8 2 HEX Hexadecimal 4 8 3 BCD Binary Coded Decimal A
189. een registered in the program setting of the Parameter dialog box This error may occur when the ECALL EFCALL PSTOP PSCAN POFF or PLOW instruction is executed 2411 2412 No data has been written to the file designated by the sequence 2413 program 1 There is a program file that uses a device that is out of the range set in the PLC parameter device setting 2 After the PLC parameter setting is changed only the parameter is written into the PLC There are multiple program files although none has been set at the parameter program settings The program file is incorrect Alternatively the file contents are not those of a sequence program 2501 2502 2503 2504 In a multiple CPU system the intelligent function module under control of another CPU is specified in the interrupt pointer setting of the parameter The parameter settings for timer time limit setting the RUN PAUSE contact the common pointer number the general data processing number of vacant slots or system interrupt settings are outside the range that can be used by the CPU module 3001 Parameter contents have been destroyed When use the following files is selected for the file registers in the PLC file setting parameter the specified file does not exist though the file register capacity has been set 3002 A memory card that cannot be used with the CPU module has been installed The file designated at the PLC file settings in the parame
190. em station 1 resulted in stop error at power Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral on and the other stations cannot start This error occurred at device check the error of the CPU module resulting in CPU module stations 2 to 4 fault and remove the error Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is QCPU displayed again this suggests the hardware fault of any of the function 1 There is no response from the target CPU module in a multiple CPU modules Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively Ver B 7002 CPU system at initial communication stage contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative or later 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was e Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version A loaded in a multiple CPU system configuration from the main base unit Alternatively replace the High Performance model QCPU of function version A with the High Performance model QCPU of function version B Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is 7003 There is no response from the target CPU module in a multiple displayed again this suggests the hardware fault of any of the CPU CPU system at initial communication stage modules Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 Faulty CPU is loaded in a multiple CPU system 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version Ais loaded 1 R
191. emote I O terminals e Error status of the MINI S3 link detected on loaded AJ71 EE is stored b15 b7 to 8 7 6 5 413 2 514 A A Bits which correspond to the signals of AJ71PT32 S3 shown below are turned on as the signals are turned on e Hardware error X0 X20 e MINI S3 link error datection X6 X26 e MINI S3 link communication error X7 X27 Bits which correspond to faulty AJ71PT32 S3 are turned on When the AC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of The value is stored in BIN code tr is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of The value is stored in BIN code It is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When the DC power supply module is used 1 is added at occurrence of an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms The value is stored in BIN code lt is reset when power is switched from OFF to ON When one of FO to 255 is turned on by or SET EL the F number which has been detected earliest among the F numbers which have turned on is stored in BIN code SD62 can be cleared by or instruction If another F number has been detected the clearing of SD62 causes the next number to be stored in SD62 When one of FO to 255 is turned on by or SET EL the F number
192. emote password setting setting eee fete tete fo remote I O network Interrupt module QI60 compatibility Compatibility with the multiple CPU yoan ESERE the BEE F CPU system High speed interrupt speed interrupt Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction Selection of refresh item for COM TE SFC program online batch ISFC program online batch change x File memory capacity change SS ee CC Link remote network additional e r y e mode Incomplete derivative PID 7 e e X E operation function Floating point comparison eel instruction speedup O Available xX N A Function not related to GX Developer App 16 App 16 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 4 Transportation Precautions When transporting lithium batteries make sure to treat them based on the transport regulations APPENDIX 4 1 Controlled models The batteries for the High Performance model QCPU including memory cards are Classified as follows Classification for Product name Model Product supply status transportation Q series battery Q7BAT Lithium battery Lithium battery with Dangerous goods Q series battery Q7BAT SET Hide Q series battery Q6BAT Lithium battery Q series memory card battery Q2MEM BAT Lithium coin battery Non dangerous goods Q seri d Q2MEM 1MBS _ Packed with lithium coin series memory car Q2MEM 2MBS _ battery Q2MEM BAT APPENDIX 4 2 Transport
193. en iena ai naian 5 1 WIIN EE 9 22 Processing Speed ssssssissrsrsisrerrserernsenenne 4 1 Programming Jonouage 4 1 Q QA1S65B QA1S68B External dimensions A App 9 Names Of parts A 6 6 Dpechkatons eieren eener eeen 6 2 QC05B QC06B QC12B QC30B QC50B QC 100B aran naeia ienet iaia 6 3 Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB External dimensions A App 11 Names Of Parts A 6 5 Dpechkatons eeen eeen 6 1 Q33B Q35B Q38B Q312B External dimensions AA App 9 Names Of parts A 6 4 Dpechkatons 6 1 Q SESS a p eet eet ace A 19 R Remote RUN PAUSE Contact 4 3 S Specifications Base um 6 1 Batey onc nenatis 7 2 O a E E E A E 4 1 Extension cable sonzoasa nu 6 2 Generalities ote date etd 3 1 Memor Card 7 1 Power supply module s s s 5 1 System configuration Configured equipment 2 1 ED een iasaeun nnsa rasain iis 2 4 Peripheral device AAA 2 3 Index 2 T Tightening torque Of SCrEW sses 9 9 Total number of instructions eee 4 1 W Weight Base EE 6 1 el EE 7 2 CGP es eas tds Mee as dtl Oh is 4 3 Extension Cable er 6 3 Memory Card 7 1 Power supply mocdule 5 2 Wiring Extension cable AAA 2 3 Heat generation cccceceececseeeseeeeeeeeeeees 9 6 reel EE 9 24 Power supply mocdule 9 22 9 25 Wiring of the I O module s eseseeeeeeene 9 24 Index 2 WARRANTY Please confirm the following product warranty details before starting use 1 Gratis Warranty Term and Gratis Warranty Range If any faults or defect
194. en to SE D Seck from memoriy card owchart for when unable to perform boot operation from memory card Proceed to Section 11 2 16 Flowchart for when UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs CONTROL BUS ERR occurs Proceed to Section 11 2 17 Flowchart for when CONTROL BUS ERR occurs 11 2 11 2 UO module not operating properly Unable to read a program UNIT VERIFY ERR occurs 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the MODE LED of the CPU module does not turn on at PLC power on MODE LED is not turned on Is the POWER LED for the power supply module turned on NO _ Proceed to Section 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off Is the power supply for all the power supply modules turned on Is the wiring of the power supply module correct Check the wire and turn on the power supply Can MODE LED be turned on Connect GX Developer and CPU module Carry out PLC diagnosis and perform Can communication be made with GX Developer troubleshooting according to the diagnosis result NO Is the extension cable connected properly Isn t IN connected to IN or OUT connected to NO Connect the extension cable properly OUT YES NO Can MODE LED be turned
195. ension base unit check the connection status e If the error occurs after the above checks 1 to 3 have been made it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 30 11 30 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Individual LED Status Delt Information ERROR CPU Common Information SD5 to 15 x1 Error Code SDO x1 Diagnostic Timing Error Messages SD16 to 26 x1 At power ON Reset 3102 LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name Parameter number LINK PARA ERROR LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name LINK PARA ERROR File name drive name SFC PARA ERROR SP PARA ERROR SP PARA ERROR REMOTE PASS ERROR File name drive name Parameter number 3107 3200 3201 3202 File name drive name Parameter number 3203 3300 File name drive name Parameter number 3301 3302 File name drive name Parameter number 3303 3400 Ofi fi O x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 31 STOP RUN When an END instruction is executed At power ON Reset OP
196. ep 60k step 124k step 252k step capacity Drive 0 Program memory 1 kl Memory card RAM Drive 1 For memory capacity Memory card ROM Installed memory card capacity refer to Section 7 1 Drive 2 Flash card 4 Mbyte max ATA card 32 Mbyte max ets RAM ZK ki x GE ROM 112 kbyte 240 kbyte 496 kbyte 1008 kbyte e Set parameter values to specify Capacity of loading memory cards 2Mbyte max ros shared memory 8 kbyte Program memory as 1 4 ee ee eee a Memory card Ge Flashcard BH CU Maximum number pale ATA card 512 of stored files l fil Standard RAM Only one file register and one local device Standard ROM pg pee fe Standard ROM number of writings Max 100000 times UF Number of I O device points 8192 points X Y0 to 1FFF Numberotdevices usable on program Number of points Number of occupied I O points 4096 points X Y0 to FFF accesible to actual I O modules x 1 124 is the maximum number of programs that can be executed on High Performance model QCPU x2 The maximum number of sequence steps that can be executed for one program by the High Performance model QCPU with the parameters stored in another drive is calculated with the following expression Program size File header size default 34 steps Refer to me High Performance model QCPU User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals for details on the program size and file x3 The memory capaci
197. er above becomes valid e If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Allows a local station to confirm its own station number Stores the number of times the following transmission errors have been detected CRC OVER AB IF Count is made to a maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0 perform reset operation Corresponding CPU 11 98 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification Stores conditions Stores the local station number which is in STOP or PAUSE D9248 SD1248 for up to numbers 1 mode to 16 Device Bit number b15 b14 b13 b12fb11 b10 b9 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 Stores conditions 1248 L16 L15 L414 L13 L12 L17 L10 L9 Le L7 Le 15 14 13 SD1249 for up to numbers SD1249 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 Local station SD1250 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L40 L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 Corresponding CPU operation D1251 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 Stores conditions 3 i 7 Sree status The bit corresponding to the station number which is in STOP or PAUSE mode becomes 1 Example When local stations 7 and 15 are in STOP mode b6 and b14 of SD1248 become 1 and when D1251 D1248 is monitored its
198. error code of errors occurred in the SFC program in BIN code 0 No error 80 SFC program parameter error 81 SFC code error 82 Number of steps of simultaneous execution exceeded 83 Block start error 84 SFC program operation error Stores the block number in which an error occurred in the SFC program in BIN code In the case of error 83 the starting block number is stored Stores the step number where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program in BIN value Stores 0 when error code 80 81 or 82 occurred Stores the block stating step number when error code 83 occurs e Stores the transition condition number where error code 84 occurred in an SFC program in BIN value Stores 0 when error code 80 81 82 or 83 occurred Stores the sequence step number of transfer condition and operation output in which error 84 occurred in the SFC program in BIN code Stores the step number when status latch is executed Stores the step number in a binary value if status latch is executed in a main sequence program Stores the block number and the step number if status latch is executed in a SFC program Block No Step No BIN BIN wn Higher 8 bits Lower 8 bits Stores the software version of the internal system in ASCII code The data in the lower byte position is indefinite The software version is stored in the higher byte position For version A for example 41H is stored No
199. error contents for the error that occurred S Error in the process control instruction occurrence instruction instruction e Shows the error process block that occurred in the process S Error generated error generated error control instruction occurrence location location Operation mode during CPU from hot start to initial start in the operation mode when the e Sh h r out tim ring th matic switch Hot start switch Shows the power out time S during the automatic switc power out time SD1500 D1501 D1502 Process control Process control D1503 D1512 module start up CPU module is started up Switch request Request origin e Stores the request origin at work No when the SM1590 is S Error SD1590 network No network No turned on occurrence 1 Stores the host system CPU information 11 100 11 100 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 14 For redundant systems Other system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SD1600 to SD1659 is only valid during the back up mode for redundant systems and refresh cannot be done when in the separate mode When a standalone system SD1600 to SD1699 are all 0 Special Register List Corresponding a Set by Corresponding N N M Expl umber leaning xplanation When set ACPU e Stores as BIN code the error No of the error that occurred during the other system CPU module diagnosis e Stores the latest error currently occurring D1601 s e SD1600 stores the updated date and time Diagnosi
200. ersion Modification SM1227 Loop test status Local station operation status Local station error detect status Local station remote I O station parameter error detect status Local station remote I O station initial communications status Local station remote I O station error Local station remote I O station forward or SM1233 SM1235 SM1236 reverse loop error Link status Forward oop ding OFF Normal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line error ON Abnormal Revergs loop EE Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line error ON Abnormal SM1240 SM1241 SM1242 SM1243 SM1246 Loopback implementation Parameters not received SM1250 SM1251 SM1252 SM1253 SM1254 SM1255 Loop test status Master station operation status Local station other than host station operation status Local station other than host station error 11 61 Link relay MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Meaning OFF Not being executed ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway OFF RUN or STEP RUN status STOP or PAUSE status No errors Error detection No errors Error detection No communications Communications underway Normal Abnormal Normal Abnormal OFF Online ON Offline station to stationtest or self loopback test OFF Loopback not being conducted ON Loopback implementation i OFF Recepti
201. erway S Status execution 8 7 M9181 Goes OFF at completion or suspension change underway After step trace OFF Not after trigger Goes ON it even 1 block within the step trace being S Status trigger ON Is after first trigger executed is triggered change New 99 i 99 Goes OFF when step trace is commenced g i ithin th i After Step trace OFF Is not after all triggers Goes ON if all blocks within the step trace being Ka e S Status trigger ON Is after all triggers executed are triggered change Goes OFF when step trace is commenced OFF Not completed Goes ON at step trace completion S Status ON End Goes OFF when step trace is commenced change Trace error Switches ON if error occurs during execution of trace Poets OFF Normal change Sampling trace ON Errors Goes ON if error occurs during execution of sampling S Status error trace change SM827 Status latch error PEE Normal Goes ON if error occurs during execution of status latch S Stat New QnA ON Errors change Program trace OFF Normal Goes ON if error occurs during execution of program S Status SM828 New error ON Errors trace change 8 Latch area sali ne Set smg00 Power cut file OFF No power cut file Goes ON if a file is present during access when power ls S U Status ON Power cut file present interrupted change n n n n n n Ed Ed Ed o E E ei N N N KS o N a OFF Keyboard inp
202. ery holder to the CPU module Install the CPU module into the base unit Turn on the PLC power supply Monitor SM51 to verify on off Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on Bit 0 is on The Q7BAT battery is faulty 10 10 OFF Bits other than 0 are on in the correct direction and reassemble the battery holder so that the battery cable comes out of the hole in the holder connection Push the holder parts in until they click Side of the CPU module The memory card battery is faulty Refer to Section 10 3 2 3 completion 10 10 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q When the MELSEC Q series is used as a UL certified product the Q7BAT battery must be replaced by service personnel The service personnel are defined as experienced technicians who have been sufficiently educated and trained and are capable of perceiving and avoiding operational hazard 10 11 10 11 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 3 SRAM card CPU module battery replacement procedure Replace the SRAM card battery in the following procedure POINTS Replace the battery while paying attention to the following a To back up the data replace the SRAM card battery with the PLC power supply ON and the SRAM card installed b Start replacement after backing up the CPU module data using GX Devel
203. ery voltage drop gt Memory card B alarm occurred Memory card B error e The alarm data can be held within the specified time when batter low occurs e The error indicates the complete discharge of the battery e When the QCPU is used the memory card B is standard and therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF battery voltage drop When the QCPU is used the memory card B is standard and occurred therefore the corresponding bits always remain OFF AC DC e Every time the input voltage falls to or below 85 AC Number of times for power 65 DC power of the rating during calculation of the SD53 DOWN AC DC DOWN CPU module the value is incremented by 1 and stored in BIN D9005 O Rem detection code When any of X n 0 X n 20 X n 6 X n 26 X n 7 X n 27 and X n 8 X n 28 of the mounted MINI S3 turns ON the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON s gt Turns to 1 ON when communication between the mounted SD54 MINI link Error detection D9004 format Bit pattern Same configuration as SD51 above indicating where e Turns to 0 OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal SD52 Battery low g thereafter New MINI S3 and CPU module cannot be made errors state b15 to b9 b8 to change 8th tst 8th module module module module gt lt Information on Information on Blown fuse Number of module e Value stored here is the lowest station I O number of the module S Error D90
204. ether or not the B and W data controlled by higher link master station host station is sent to lower link local stations tertiary stations e When SM1208 is OFF B and W of host station is sent to tertiary stations B and W of host station is not sent to tertiary stations Set to ON not to match B and W of the higher and lower links e When SM1209 is ON the link parameters of the higher and lower link are not checked e When SM1209 is OFF the link parameters of the higher and lower link are checked e When SM1208 is ON M9210 SM1210 Link card error for OFF Normal Control is performed depending on whether the link card master station ON Abnormal hardware is faulty or not OFF Normal ON Abnormal Link module error M9211 SM1211 for local station use OFF Online M9224 SM1224 Link status ON Offline station to station test or self loopback test Control is performed depending on whether the link card hardware is faulty or not Depends on whether the master station is online or offline or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode OFF Normal ZG f M9225 SM1225 E Forward loop error ON Abnormal Depends on the error condition of the forward loop line OFF Normal oi M9226 SM1226 LS Reverse loop error ON Abnormal Depends on the error condition of the reverse loop line 11 60 11 60 11 TROUBLESHOOTING ACPU Special Relay Special Special Relay after Relay for Conv
205. f Only USER and BOOT enabled e Turned off at 1 not turned off at 0 The operating status of the remote I O module is stored in the following format b15 to b4b3 to bO 4 ka Vacant Remote VO module operating status Always 2 STOP e The CPU operating status is stored as indicated in the following figure b15 to b12b11 to D b7 to b4 b3 to bO STEP RUN STOP PAUSE RUN STOP switch Remote contact STOP PAUSE cause Remote operation from the GX Developer or Serial Communication Internal program instruction Note Priority is earliest first Errors Set when the device test mode is executed on GX Developer gt MELSEC Q Cofresponding Corresponding Set by GE When set S Status change S Status change Remote S Every END D9015 format change processing S Remote Request 11 74 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Sa ACPU When set Corresponding Expl i xplanation CPU Number Priorities 1 to 4 When error is generated the LED display to the error number setting priorities Priorities 5 to 8 flicker is made according The setting areas for priorities are as follows b15 tob12b11 to b8 b7 to b4 b3 to bO SD207 Priority 4 i Priority 3 i Priority 2 Priority 1 LED display priority SD208 Priority 6 Priority 5 S
206. f 2 77 mA or more must be connected Calculation of resistance of connected resistor R 11 V R gt 2 77 mA Sat 11 V R gt 2 77 1 96 mA 11 V 0 81 mA gt R 13 6 kQ gt R Resistance of the connected resistor R is obtained in the above equations Suppose that the resistance R is 12 kW The power capacity W of the resistor during activation of the switch is W Applied voltage R W 28 8 V f 12 k2 0 069 W Because the resistance is selected so that the power capacity is three to five times the actual power consumption a third to a half W should be selected In this case a resistor of 12 kQ and a third to a half W should be connected across the terminal and COM 11 42 11 42 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 5 2 Output Circuit Troubleshooting This section explains trouble examples and troubleshooting methods in the output circuit Output Circuit Troubleshooting Z Condition _ e When load is half wave rectified inside e Connect a resistor of several ten KQ to several This is typical of some solenoids hundred KQ across the load QY22 Output module Resistor Excessive voltage is applied to load when output turns When the polarity of the power supply is 1 off the capacitor C is charged When the polarity is 2 the voltage charged in C plus the power supply voltage is applied to across D1 The maximum value of the voltage is approx 2 2E This usage does no
207. fied service life of the battery is exceeded Dirt and foreign matter must Remove and clean not be present Check visually Connection check on the monitor mode of the GX Developer that SM51 or Preventive maintenance SM52 is turned OFF x1 When AnS Series Module is included in the system the judgement criteria will be from 10 to 90 RH 10 3 10 3 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 Battery Replacement 10 4 When the voltage of the program and power interrupt hold on function backup battery is lowered the special relays SM51 and SM52 are energized Even if these special relays are energized the contents of the program and power interrupt hold on function are not erased immediately If the energization of these relays is recognized however these contents may be deleted unintentionally While a total of the power interrupt hold on time after the SM51 is energized is within a specified time replace the battery with a new one POINTS The SM51 is used to give an alarm when the capacity of the battery is lowered Even after it is energized the data is held for a specified time For safety however replace the battery with a new one as early as possible The SM52 is energized when the battery causes a complete discharge error Immediately after the relay has been energized replace the battery with a new one Whichever voltage of the battery of the CPU module and SRAM card is lowered the
208. for AuA and AnU is turned on by 1 is added to the contents of SD63 When or instruction is executed 1 is subtracted from the contents of SD63 If the INDICATOR RESET switch is provided to the CPU module pressing the switch can execute the same processing Quantity which has been turned on by is stored into SD63 in BIN code The value of SD63 is maximum 8 When any of FO to 2047 is turned on by SET EL the annunciator numbers F numbers that are turned on in order are registered into D9125 to D9132 The F number turned off by is erased from any of D9125 to D9132 and the F numbers stored after the erased F number are shifted to the preceding registerers By executing instruction the contents of SD64 to SD71 are shifted upward by one For A3N A3HCPU it can be performed by use of INDICATOR RESET switch on front of CPU module When there are 8 annunciator detections the 9th one is not stored into SD64 to SD71 even if detected SET SET SET RST SET SET SET SETSET SET SET F50 F25 F99 F25 F15 F70 F65 F38 F110 F151 F210 LEDR WOW EE E EE O 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 99 17 2 3 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 8 8 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 50 25 11 94 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 10 Special register list dedicated for QnA ACPU Special Conversion Special Re
209. fresh parameter are abnormal Check the parameter setting In a multiple CPU system automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting was made to the intelligent function module under control of another station MELSEC Q Corres Corrective Action ponding e Correct and write the network parameters If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e Delete the Ethernet setting parameter of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of another station e Change the setting to the head I O number of the Q series Ethernet interface module under control of the host station Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs after correction it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e Delete the CC Link setting parameter of the Q series CC Link module under control of another station Change the setting to the head I O number of the Q series CC Link module under control of the host station Ver B or later e Correct and write the network parameters e If the error occurs afte
210. fresh setting is any of the followings in a multiple CPU system 3013 1 When a bit device is specified as a refresh device a number other than a multiple of 16 is specified for the refresh starting device 3009 2 The device specified is other than the one that may be specified 3 The number of send points is an odd number 3 Some data in the parameter cannot be handled 4 The station type of MELSECNET H has been changed while the power is on RESET RUN is required to change the station type Although the QnACPU is a control station or master station the network parameters have not been written In a multiple CPU system the MELSECNET H under control of another CPU is specified as the head I O number in the network setting parameter of the MELSECNET H The network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the ordinary station were rewritten to the control station or the network parameters of the MELSECNET H operating in the control station were rewritten to the ordinary station The network parameters are reflected on the module side by making a reset 1 The number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the number of modules setting parameter of 3100 MELSECNET H 2 The head I O number of actually installed modules is different from that designated in the network parameter of MELSECNET H The link refresh range exceeded the file register capacity change the file register f
211. functioning due to noise or other reason If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module 1005 2 Hardware fault hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively 7008 contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1007 1008 Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is Serial displayed again the power supply module CPU module main base No unit extension base unit or extension cable is faulty 041 01 Change the faulty module unit or cable Alternatively contact your or later nearest Mitsubishi representative Take noise reduction measures e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1009 The fault of the power supply module CPU module main base unit extension base unit or extension cable was detected Entire program was executed without the execution of an END 1011 instruction 1 When the END instruction is executed it is read as another instruction code e g due to noise 2 The END instruction has been changed to another instruction code somehow Error in internal RAM program memory where CPU module sequence program is stored This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative This suggests a CPU module hard
212. g two different grounding terminals Use either grounding terminal in an earthed status 8 2 6 External wiring 1 Protective grounding Maintains the safety of the PLC and improves the noise resistance Functional grounding L Improves the noise resistance 24VDC external power supply For the MELSEC Q series PLC 24VDC I O modules and the intelligent function modules special function modules which require external supply power use a model whose 24VDC circuit is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit External devices When a device with a hazardous voltage circuit is externally connected to the PLC use a model whose circuit section of the interface to the PLC is intensively insulated from the hazardous voltage circuit Intensive insulation Intensive insulation refers to the insulation with the dielectric withstand voltage shown in Table 8 1 Table 8 1 Intensive Insulation Withstand Voltage Installation Category II source IEC664 Rated voltage of hazardous voltage area Surge withstand voltage 1 2 50 us 150VAC or below 2500 V 300VAC or below 4000 V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION In order to increase the reliability of the system and exploit the maximum performance of its functions this section describes the methods and precautions for the mounting and installation of the system 9 1 General Safety Requirements DANGER Install a safety ci
213. gister after Conversion Special Register for Modification ZNRD LRDP for ACPU processing results E p E p 8 ZNWR LWTP for ACPU processing results Local station link type 8 SD1204 Link status 11 95 Corresponding Detail etails CPU Meaning Stores the execution result of the ZNRD word device read instruction e ZNRD instruction setting fault 0 Normal end 2 ZNRD instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station 4 Relevant station ZNRD execution disabled Faulty setting of the ZNRD instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating The specified station is a remote I O station e Corresponding station error ZNRD cannot be executed in the corresponding station Stores the execution result of the ZNWR word device write instruction e ZNWR instruction setting fault 0 Normal end 2 ZNWR instruction setting fault 3 Error at relevant station 4 Relevant station ZNWR execution disabled Faulty setting of the instruction constant source and or destination One of the stations is not communicating ZNWR cannot be executed The specified station is in the corresponding station a remote I O station Stores whether the slave station corresponds to MELSECNET or MELSECNET11 Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET 11 stations become 1 e Bits corresponding to the MELSECNET sta
214. gram is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete Provides P set request after transfer of the other program for example subprogram when main program is being run is complete during run Automatically switched off when P setting is complete Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing and turned off at completion of divided processing Turned on when canvas screen transfer to AD57 S1 AD58 is done by divided processing Turned ON to shorten the search time in the A8UPU A8PUJ In this case the scan time is extended by 10 The A8UPU A8PUJ cannot be used in the QCPU QnACPU special relays Indication of communication enable disable to remote terminal modules connected to the AJ71PT32 S3 A2C or A52G It is set whether the error checks below are performed or not when the END instruction is processed to set the END instruction processing time e Check for breakage of fuse Check of battery Collation check of O module Turns ON when the detail factor of the operation error is stored into SD1091 Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter The I O module can be changed online when SM251 is turned ON after the head I O number of the I O module to be changed is set to SD251 One module is only allowed to be changed by one setting To be switched on in the program or peripheral device test mode to chang
215. gs causes and corrective measures of error messages in the Corresponding CPU column indicates that the error is applied to all types of CPUs Rem indicates compatibility with the remote I O module A CPU type name in the column indicates that the error is applied only to the specific CPU type Common Individual Operating F EE DOA Error Messages Information Information LED Siaius Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 1 SD16 to 26 1 ERROR CPU 1000 Flicker On T001 1002 1003 1004 1005 T006 MAIN CPU DOWN 1007 1008 Flicker Always 1009 1010 1011 l _ END NOT EXECUTE Off Flicker Stop Konan END instruction is 1012 1101 1102 1103 1104 RAM ERROR Off Flicker Stop IA power ON At reset At power ON At reset Off Flicker Stop When an END instruction executed When instruction executed Stop SE 1300 FUSE BREAK OFF DR Of ON Flicker On Continue When an END instruction is 2 uted x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 2 The CPU MODULE operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly OPE CIRCUIT ERR 11 19 11 19 11 TROUBLESHOOTIN GE MELSEC Q orres ER Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding 1000 1001 1002 Take noise reduction measures ee Run mode suspended or failure of main CPU e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again 1 Mal
216. he AnS series 3 The Q series power supply module is not required for the Q5LB type extension base unit 4 Use Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P or Q64P for the power supply module Q61SP cannot be used for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q b If the slim type main base unit Q3OSB is used Ge MITSUBISHI ELSE Memory card 1 High Performance model QCPU Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS GEO Q2MEM 4MBE Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU g Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA Q2MEM 32MBA memi ml oon Battery holder l MITSUBISHI LITHIUM BATTERY Battery Q7BAT Q7BAT SET S Slim type power supply module 3 UO module Intelligent function module lt lt Slim type main base unit Q32SB Q33SB Q35SB 2 POINTS 1 The number of memory cards to be installed is one sheet The memory card must be selected from SRAM card Flash card and ATA card according to the application and capacity With commercial memory cards the Operation is not assured x2 The slim type main base unit does not have an extension cable connector The extension base unit and GOT cannot be connected x3 Use Q61SP for the power supply module Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P or Q64P cannot be
217. he setting of the QO2CPU s high speed interrupt parameter To use high speed interrupts change the CPU module to one of the Q02H Q06H Q12H Q25HCPU e To use a multiple CPU system delete the setting of the high speed interrupt parameter To use high speed interrupts change the system to a single CPU system e To use either the QA1SLIB or QALIB delete the setting of the high speed interrupt parameter To use high speed interrupts do not use the QA1SLIB QALB e Re examine the I O address designated by the high speed interrupt parameter Re set the parameter I O assignment to control them under one QCPU Change the parameters of all CPUs in the multiple CPU system Match preset count of multiple CPU setting CPU empty setting in UO assignment with the actual number of CPUs loaded Match the multiple CPU setting or control CPU setting in the parameter with that of the reference CPU CPU No 1 Check the following in the multiple CPU automatic refresh parameters and make correction e When specifying the bit device specify a multiple of 16 for the refresh starting device Specify the device that may be specified for the refresh device Set the number of send points to an even number Delete the MELSECNET H network parameter of the MELSECNET H under control of another CPU Change the setting to the head I O number of the MELSECNET H under control of the host CPU or later
218. hen Changing from to STOP Status to from RUN Status 7 5 Clock Function 7 6 Remote Operation 7 6 1 Remote RUN STOP 7 6 2 Remote PAUSE 7 6 3 Remote RESET 7 6 4 Remote latch clear 7 6 5 Relationship of the remote operation and High Performance model QCPU RUN STOP switch 7 7 Changing the Input Response time of the Q Series Compatible Module I O Response Time 7 7 1 Selecting the response time of the input module 7 7 2 Selecting the response time of the high speed input module 7 7 3 Selecting the response time of the interrupt module 7 8 Error time Output Mode Setting 7 9 Hardware Error time CPU Operation Mode Setting 7 10 Setting the Switches of the Intelligent Function Module 7 11 Monitoring Function 7 11 1 Monitor condition setting 7 11 2 Monitoring test for local device 7 11 3 Forced ON OFF of external I O 7 12 Writing in Program during High Performance model QCPU RUN 7 12 1 Writing data in the circuit mode during the RUN status 7 12 2 Writing a batch of files during RUN 7 13 Execution Time Measurement 7 13 1 Program monitor list 7 13 2 Interrupt program monitor list 7 13 3 Scan time measurement 7 14 Sampling Trace Function 7 15 Debug Function with Multiple Users 7 15 1 Multiple user monitoring function 7 15 2 Multiple user RUN write function 7 16 Watch dog timer WDT 7 17 Self Diagnosis Function 7 17 1 Interrupt due to error occurrence 7 17 2 LED display when error occurs 7 17 3 Cancel error 7 18 Failure History 7 19 System Protect 7 1
219. hereafter OFF No error Error common e e Turns on when there is error common information and the S New information SM1600 is on Each END ON Error common information OFF No error Error individual evaa e Turns on when there is error individual information and the S information Ge SM1600 is on Each END ON Error individual information SM1653 STOP contact STOP status Turns on when in the STOP status S New Each END SM1654 PAUSE contact PAUSE status Turns on when in the PAUSE status S New Each END SM1655 STEP RUN contact STEP RUN status Turns on when in the STEP RUN status S New Each END 1 Stores other system CPU diagnostic information and system information 2 This shows the special relay SM _ _ for the host system CPU 12 For redundant system tracking for Q4AR only Either the backup mode or the second mode is valid for SM1700 to SM1799 All is turned off for standalone system i e Set by ACPU Applicable OFF Execution not ie execution ON pna e Turns on when tracking is executed normally SE New possible Block 2 ock 3 Block 4 Block 5 SM1717 Block 6 SM1718 Block 7 SM1719 Block 8 SM1720 Block 9 OFF Transmission SM1721 Q4AR Transmission trigger uncompleted SM1722 PODS ee tums on wherithe S status M1723 lend flag ON Transmission DES SE data transmission change New as been completed end SM1724 SM1725 SM1726 SM1727 SM1728 SM1729 SM1730 SM1731 SM1732 SM1733
220. hi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 5 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 5 Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the RUN LED of the CPU module turns off during PLC operation RUN LED is turned off Is the POWER LED of Proceed to Section 11 2 4 the power supply module lit Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering Is ERR LED on flickering RUN LED is on Reset the CPU module RESET L CLR switch 1 PLC part connection fault 2 By excessive noise RUN LED is off For the case of 1 For the Set the CPU module s RUN STOP case of 2 switch to STOP and write END to SE address 0 with the GX Developer Please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Set the RUN STOP switch to RUN and enter to the monitor mode with the GX Developer to be operated RUN LED does not turn on RUN LED is on Considered to be a sequence program error Check the program and modify the program error location Connect a surge protector circuit such as CR to the noise source Can RUN LED be turn
221. ial Register List Continue ACPU Special Special Special Register after Register for Meaning Details Conversion Conversion Modification e Loopback in forward reverse loops 0 Forward loop i ester during data link ll Deen e 1 Reverse loop Kee l during data link rg 2 Loopback Forward loopback Reverse loopback implemented in e Loopback in forward loop only forward reverse D9204 SD1204 Link status E i 3 Loopback implemented only in forward Forward loopback direction Loopback in reverse loop only 4 Loopback implemented only i inreverse direction i Data link disabled lu ll Uta Stores the local or remote I O station number at which i loopback is being executed Station Station that SD1205 implementing implemented forward 3 loopback loopback iL KEE EE A LEE RN Ee a 7 em Forward loopback Reverse loopback In the above example 1 is stored into D9205 and 3 Station Station that P i into D9206 If data link returns to normal status data SD1206 implementing implemented reverse link in forward loop values in D9205 and D9206 loopback loopback et remain 1 and 3 To return them to 0 therefore use a sequence program or perform reset operation Corresponding CPU Stores the number of times the loop line has been SD1211 Number of times Stored as cumulative switched to reverse loop or loopback loop selected value Count stops at maximum of FFFFH To return the value to 0
222. ical value program 4611 Key switch was reset during RUN when presumptive start was error location and correct the problem designated for SFC program The program is automatically subjected to an initial start i Read common information of the error using the peripheral device 4620 SC DCS at a block in the SFC program that was check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is 4621 Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in the SFC displayed again the intelligent function module CPU module or program base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Read common information of the error using the peripheral device 4630 Startup was executed at a block in the SFC program that was check error step corresponding to its numerical value program y P error location and correct the problem Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is Startup was attempted at a block that does not exist in an SFC displayed again the intelligent function module CPU module or program base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 4632 There were too many simultaneous active steps in blocks thatcan fRead common information of the error using the peripheral devi
223. ich an error has occurred The access range exceeds the buffer memory Check the header address and access number of points range of the specified intelligent function and access using a range that exists in the intelligent module function module Intelligent The specified intelligent function module cannot Check that the specified intelligent function module is function be accessed operating normally module The intelligent function module does not exist in Check the header I O No of the specified intelligent specification fthe specified position function module SS Check that there is no error in the intelligent function A control bus error has occurred s module or in the hardware of another module The head No of th i i 7 e Sid Reexamine the head No of the device to be accessed not an even number The device header or number of points inthe Check the device header No or number of points and simulation is not in 16point unit correct them to 16 point units The request contents cannot be executed because the memory card write protect switch Turn off the memory card write protect switch is on Check the following and make it countermeasures e Is the memory one that can be used e Is the specified drive memory correctly installed The specified file attribute is read only so the Do not write data in the specified file Protect error Sg data cannot be written Or change the file attribute Check the specified dri
224. il adapter mounting hole 6 5 6 5 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 6 4 Setting the Extension Base Unit The number of stages setting method of each extension base unit to be used when extension base units are installed is described below Stage No setting connector Setting of Stage Number for Extension Base Units Number Setting for Extension Stages ist stage 2nd stage 3rd stage 4th stage 5th stage 6th stage 7th stage D exe oo co oo oo oo GO POINTS To set the stages No setting connector set a number from 1 to 7 according to the number of extension stages Do not set the same stage number at two or more positions or do not fail to seta number A miss input or miss output may occur 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q The I O numbers are automatically allocated in the system loading status 0 1 2 3 4 a A X Y X Y X Y XIY XIY Sal 0 20 40 60 80 O 053 2 U SBIOE T E 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 ist i a X Y X Y XIW X Y XIW XIY XIY X Y N S extension 5 Ze AO CO EO 100 120 140 160 180 stage 9 33 Sta 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
225. ile for the one that enables entire range 1 When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is 0 the inter PLC network parameter setting has been made 2 When the station number of the MELSECNET H module is other than 0 the remote master parameter setting has been made 3101 1 The network No specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network 2 The head I O No specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted I O unit 3 The network class specified by a parameter is different from that of the actually mounted network 4 The network refresh parameter of the MELSECNET H MELSECNET 10 is out of the specified area the parameter to meet the used system FT function Ver B or later Change the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole range Read the detailed information of the error using the peripheral device check the parameter items corresponding to those numerical values parameter numbers and correct when necessary If the error is still generated following the correction of the parameter settings the possible cause is the memory error of the CPU module s built in RAM or program memory or the memory card Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative heck whether the parameter file version is gt QPA and check the file contents to be sure they are parameters e Delete t
226. in fire or damage External connections shall be crimped or pressure welded with the specified tools or correctly soldered Imperfect connections could result in short circuit fires or erroneous operation Tighten the terminal screws with the specified torque If the terminal screws are loose it could result in short circuits fire or erroneous operation Tightening the terminal screws too far may cause damages to the screws and or the module resulting in fallout short circuits or malfunction Be sure there are no foreign substances such as sawdust or wiring debris inside the module Such debris could cause fires damage or erroneous operation The module has an ingress prevention label on its top to prevent foreign matter such as wire offcuts from entering the module during wiring Do not peel this label during wiring Before starting system operation be sure to peel this label because of heat dissipation STARTUP AND MAINTENANCE PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Do not touch the terminals while power is on Doing so could cause shock or erroneous operation Correctly connect the battery Also do not charge disassemble heat place in fire short circuit or solder the battery Mishandling of battery can cause overheating or cracks which could result in injury and fires Switch all phases of the external power supply off when cleaning the module or retightening the terminal or module mounting screws Not doing so
227. ing the initial data with their relevant master station Device Bit number b8 b5 b4 SD1224 E UA KK SD1225 30 2 EN EK 801226 y E oe BF 01227 ls ar ENK The bit corresponding to the station number which is currently communicating the initial settings becomes 1 Example When stations 23 and 45 are communicating b6 of SD1225 and b12 of SD1226 become 1 and when SD1225 is monitored its value is 64 40H and when SD1226 is monitored its value is 4096 1000n Stores the local or remote station numbers which are in error Device Bit number b8 b5 b4 SD1228 H Kik D1229 3 30 2 EN EEN spi230 4 7 E EEN D1231 64 62 6 E EEN The bit corresponding to the station number with the error becomes 1 Example When local station 3 and remote I O station 14 have an error b2 and b13 of SD1228 become 1 and when SD1228 is monitored its value is 8196 2004H 11 97 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continue ACPU Special Conversion Special Register after Conversion SD1238 SD1239 SD1240 SD1241 SD1242 SD1243 D9232 D9233 D9234 D9235 D9236 D9243 D9238 D9239 D9240 D9241 Number of link Stores number of D9244 SD1244 d In
228. ing use of the DC power supply module aractan AG DOWN detocieg e Reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module e Reset when power is switched OFF then ON 11 55 11 55 11 ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification ak Lei See a M9006 M9007 SM1009 SM62 SM1011 SM56 Kee SM1016 pee SM1017 SE wa SM1023 M9024 SM1024 M9025 SM1025 pa z D fo fo fo E fo So o ei E E bi CH N Ed N ioe L M9022 M9023 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued OFF Normal ON Battery low Battery low Battery low latch OPE Normal ON Battery low OFF No F number detected ON F number detected Annunciator detection OFF No error ON Error Operation error flag Data memory clear flag OFF Ignored ON Output claered Data memory OFF Ignored ON Output claered Clock data set request OFF Ignored ON Set request present used e Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified e Turns OFF when the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter e Turns ON when the battery voltage drops to or below the specified e Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter Self diagnosis OFF No error e Turned on when error is found as a resul
229. ion RESET position Move the RESET L CLR switch to the neutral position Neutral position Is the MODE LED turned on Hardware fault Check operations in the order starting from the minimum system If the module will not work please consult your local Mitsubishi service center or representative explaining a detailed description of the problem Completion 11 4 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off 11 5 MELSEC Q The following shows the flowchart to be followed when the POWER LED of the power supply module turns off at PLC power on or during operation POWER LED is turned off Is there a power supply Supply power Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply voltage within the voltage range given in the specifications The supply voltage should be within the rated range Can POWER LED be turned on Is the power supply module fixed Properly fix the power supply module Can POWER LED be turned on 1 Check the electric current capacity and reduce the amount of overcurrent 2 Turn OFF the input power and wait several minutes before turning it ON again s overcurrent protection and overvoltage protection working Can POWER LED be turned on Please consult your local Mitsubis
230. ion has been received e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNRD instruction Use the instruction to reset Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruction execution is complete e Used as a condition contact for resetting M9200 and M9201 after the ZNRD instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset e Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction has been received e Used in the program as an interlock for the ZNWR instruction e Use the RST instruction to reset e Depends on whether or not the ZNWR word device write instruction execution is complete Used as a condition contact to reset M9202 and M9203 after the ZNWR instruction is complete e Use the RST instruction to reset On indicates that the ZNRD instruction is complete at the local station On indicates that the ZNWR instruction is complete at the local station QnA Host station link OFF Normal Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of SM1206 parameter error ON Abnormal the host is valid Depends on whether or not the link parameter setting of the master station in tier two matches that of the master station in tier three in a three tier system Valid for only the master station in a three tier system e Depends on wh
231. ion module I O A QnA module 3 Intelligent function module other than the Q series serial communication module modem interface module or Ethernet module 4 Q series serial communication module or Ethernet module of function version A The Q series serial communication module modem interface module or Ethernet module of function version B controlled by another CPU was specified in a multiple CPU system x1 Characters in parentheses 11 32 QCPU function Ver B Mount the Q series serial communication module modem interface or later module or Ethernet module of function version B in the position specified in the head VO No of the remote password file hange it for the Ethernet module of function version B connected by the host CPU 2 Delete the remote password setting indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 32 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating f Dsg DOA Error Messages Information Information SG LED Status LED Status Lt of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 x1 SD16 to 26 x1 ERROR CPU 4000 4001 4002 INSTRCT CODE ERR Program error location Flicker Stop At power ON Reset 4003 4004 4010 __ MISSING END INS H Ce _ Stop Sp 4020 CAN T SET P Program error location Stop ae sais tira 4300 EXTEND INST ERR Program error location Off On Flicker On When instruction is executed 4301 4030
232. ion type time in 1 ms units program into SD528 and SD529 Measurement is made in for low speed ee 100s units execution type 1 SD528 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing programs ATCO pS units SD529 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Minimum scan Minimum scan time Stores the minimum value of the scan time of a low speed time for in 1 ms units execution type program into SD532 and SD533 low speed i s Measurement is made in 100us units END i Minimum scan time execution type in 100 ps units SD532 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing programs SD533 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Maximum scan Maximum scan time Le Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of time for in 1 ms units the first scan of a low speed execution type program into S Every low speed p 8 SD534 and SD535 Measurement is made in 100s units END Maximum scan time t execution type e SD534 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing programs 11100 4s units SD535 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 END processing time Stores the time from the end of a scan execution type in 1 ms units program to the start of the next scan into SD540 and S Every SD541 Measurement is made in 100us units END SD540 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing SD541 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Constant scan wait
233. ions of use 10 8 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 3 2 Battery replacement procedure 1 CPU module Q6BAT battery replacement procedure When the CPU module battery has been exhausted replace the Q6BAT battery with a new one according to the procedure shown below The PLC power must be on for 10 minutes or longer before dismounting the battery Even when the battery is dismounted the memories are backed up by the capacitor for a while However if the replacement time exceeds the guaranteed value specified in the table below the contents stored in the memories may be erased To prevent this trouble replace the battery speedily Backup time by capacitor Backup time by capacitor min 3 Replacing battery Turn off the PLC power supply Remove the CPU module from the base unit Side of the CPU module Open the cover of the CPU module i e Remove the old battery from its holder Front Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Connect the lead to the connector Close the cover of the CPU module Install the CPU module into the base unit Turn on the PLC power supply Monitor OFF SM51 to verify on off ON Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on Bits other than 0 are on Bit 0 is on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 9 The memory card battery is f
234. ioration open cable or the like e When connecting or disconnecting an extension cable do not hold the ferrite cores mounted at both ends of the cable Hold the connector part of the cable for connection or disconnection l Holding the ferrite core may cause the cable to open within the connector Also if the ferrite core is shifted the characteristic will change When handling the cable take care not to shift the ferrite core positions 2 Connection of extension cable POINT When connecting an extension base unit to the main base unit with an extension cable always plug the OUT side connector of the main base unit and the IN side connector of the extension base unit with an extension cable The system will not operate properly if the extension cable is connected in the form of IN to IN OUT to OUT or IN to OUT When connecting two or more extension base units plug the OUT side connector of the first extension base unit and the IN side connector of the second extension base unit with an extension cable 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q a To connect an extension cable to the main base unit remove the portion under the OUT characters on the base cover with a tool such as a flat blade screwdriver 5 5 x 75 6 x 100 This also applies to a case where an extension cable is connected to the OUT side connector of the extension base unit OUT side of extension
235. is executed When no transition OFF Preserves Clear device Preserves device OFF Preserves Asynchronous mode Synchronous mode Not executed Being executed Not executed ON Being executed ON indicates completion of intelligent function module access Explanation When Set Initial value is set at the same value as SM320 Goes ON automatically if SFC program is present e Starts SFC program when this relay goes from OFF to S Initial ON U Stops SFC program when this relay goes from ON to OFF The SFC program starting mode in the SFC setting of the PLC parameter dialog box is set as the initial value AT initial start OFF At continued start ON format change M9102 format change S Initial Set the presence absence of continuous transition for the block where Continuous transition bit of the SFC data device has not been set OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or during continuous transition and ON when continuous transition is not executed e Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode Select whether the coil outputs of the active steps are held or not at the time of a block stop As the initial value the output mode at a block stop in the parameter is OFF when the coil outputs are OFF and ON when the coil outputs are held All coil outputs go OFF when this relay is OFF e Coil outputs are preserved when this rela
236. is ON the SEG instruction is executed as M9051 SM1051 SEG instruction OFF 7SEG segment display an I O partial refresh instruction switch ON I O partial refresh e When SM1052 is OFF the SEG instruction is executed M9052 SM1052 as a 7 SEG display instruction SM1054 SM205 STEP RUN flag OFF STEP RUN not in effect e Switched on when the RUN key switch is in STEP RUN ON STEP RUN in effect position QnA Status latch OFF Not completed e Turned on when status latch is completed Se SE completion flag ON Completed e Turned off by reset instruction SM1056 SM1057 11 57 11 57 CHG instruction OFF Enabled execution disable ON Disable HED e OFF Other than when P set being requested Provides P set request after transfer of the other ON P set being requested program for example subprogram when main program is OFF Other than when P set being run is complete during run Automatically switched being requested off when P I setting is complete ON P I set being requested Main side P set request x Sub side P set request SIS 8 38 SIS amp S 5 8 e lele asl S S I ISI I 8 8 N o ol A N o oa A wo M o bad x 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Relay after Conversion SM1058 SM1059 SM1070 SM1081 SM1084 SM1091 SM1094 SM1100 SM1101 SM1102 11 58 Relay M9058 M9059 M9060 M9061 M9065 M
237. ist If a fault occurs when the PLC power supply is switched on when the CPU is switched from STOP to RUN or during RUN the High Performance model QCPU displays an error on the LED using the self diagnostic function and stores the error information into the special relays SM and special registers SD For the error code 4000H to 4FFFH developed upon a request for general data processing from the GX Developer intelligent function module or network system refer to Appendix 1 11 3 1 Procedure for reading error codes When an error occurs the error code and error message can be read by the GX Developer Version 4 or later The procedure for reading error codes by the GX Developer is as follows 1 Start the GX Developer 2 Connect the CPU module to the personal computer 3 Select Online Read from PLC Menu by the GX Developer and also read the project from the High Performance model QCPU 4 Select the Diagnostics Diagnostics PLC Menu 5 Click the Error Jump button in the PLC diagnostics dialog box to display the error code and error message 6 Select the Help PLC error Menu and confirm the content of the applicable error code For details of the GX Developer operating method refer to the applicable the GX Developer Operating Manual 11 18 11 18 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 3 2 Error Code List of High Performance model QCPU QnACPU The following information deals with error codes and the meanin
238. ist APPENDIX 2 Special Register List APPENDIX 3 List of Interrupt Pointer Nos and Interrupt Factors APPENDIX 4 Enhancement of the High Performance Model QCPU Functions APPENDIX 4 1 Specification Comparison APPENDIX 4 2 Function Comparison APPENDIX 4 3 Usability of Added Functions Depending on GX Developer Version APPENDIX 5 Transportation Precautions APPENDIX 5 1 Controlled models APPENDIX 5 2 Transport guidelines INDEX About Manuals The following manuals are related to this product Referring to this list please request the necessary manuals Related Manuals Manual Name High Performance model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals This manual explains the functions programming methods devices and so on necessary to create programs with the High Performance model QCPU QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual Common Instructions This manual describes how to use the sequence instructions basic instructions and application instructions QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual PID Control Instructions This manual describes the dedicated instructions used to exercise PID control QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC This manual explains the system configuration performance specifications functions programming debugging error codes and others of MELSAP3 QCPU Q Mode Programming Manual MELSAP L This manual describes the programming methods specifications functions
239. ition is not executed e Always ON during operation in the no continuous transition mode e Turns ON when the measurement of the step transition watchdog timer is started Turning this relay OFF resets the step transition watchdog timer e Set when sampling trace of all specified blocks is completed Reset when sampling trace is started Set when sampling trace is being executed Reset when sampling trace is completed or suspended Selects sampling trace execution enable disable ON Sampling trace execution is enabled OFF Sampling trace execution is disabled If turned off during sampling trace execution trace is suspended Selects the operation output when block stop is executed ON Retains the ON OFF status of the coil being used by using operation output of the step being executed at block stop OFF All coil outputs are turned off Operation output by the SET instruction is retained regardless of the ON OFF status of M9196 Switches I O numbers in the fuse blow module storage registers SD1100 to SD1107 and I O module verify error storage registers SD1116 to SD1123 according to the combination of ON OFF of the SM1197 and SM1198 11 59 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Rela Special Special Relay after Relay for Conversion Modification SM1199 SM1200 for master SM1201 station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction SM1202 for ACPU OFF N
240. ize M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole for M4 screw oH 98mm 3 86inch w 114mm 4 49inch 142mm 5 59inch 198mm 7 80inch LOS 18 5mm 0 73inch Weight 0 12kg 0 15 kg 0 21 kg Attachment Mounting screw M4 x 12 4 pieces DIN rail mounting adapter to be sold separately DIN rail mounting Adapter type Ge 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q 3 Extension base unit specifications Type not requiring power supply module Number of I O modules 2 5 installed Possibility of extension Extendable Applicable module 5 VDC erna current 0 080A 0 100A consumption S T T DIN rail mounting DIN 4 Extension base unit specifications Power supply loaded type T Q63B Q65B Q68B Q612B QA1S65B QA1S68B e Number of I O modules installed ae ae a ee Possibility of Extendable CETA Applicable module module Q series modules AnS series modules HE geg 0 110A 0 114A 0 121A 0 117A 0 118A consumption M4 screw hole or 4 5 hole M5 screw hole or 5 5 hole Mounting hole size a el M4 screw m M5 screw 88mm assinch 3 86inch 130mm 6 12inch 5 12inch 189mm 245mm 328mm 439mm 315mm 420mm 7 44inch 9 65inch 12 92inch 17 30inch 12 41inch 16 55inch 44 1mm 1 74inch 51 2mm 2 02inch Weight 0 23kg 0 25 kg 0 35 kg 0 45 kg 0 75 kg 1 00 kg Mounting screw M4 x 14 4 pieces Mounting screw M5 x 25 Attachment DIN rail mounting adapter sold separately 4 pieces ee Q6DIN3 Q6DIN2 Q6DIN1 Adapter type 6 B
241. k relays B 10 2 8 Link special relays SB 10 2 9 Step relays S 10 2 10 Timers T 10 2 11 Counters C 10 2 12 Data registers D 10 2 13 Link registers W 10 2 14 Link special registers SW 10 3 Internal System Devices 10 3 1 Function devices FX FY FD 10 3 2 Special relays SM 10 3 3 Special registers SD 10 4 Link Direct Devices lu 10 5 Intelligent Function Module Devices LU 09 10 6 Index Registers Z 10 6 1 Switching between scan execution type programs and low speed execution type programs 10 6 2 Switching between scan low speed execution programs and interrupt fixed scan execution type programs 10 7 File Registers R 10 7 1 File register capacity 10 7 2 Differences in memory card access method by memory card type 10 7 3 Registering the file registers 10 7 4 File register designation method 10 7 5 Precautions in using file registers 10 8 Nesting N 10 9 Pointers 10 9 1 Local pointers 10 9 2 Common pointers 10 10 Interrupt Pointers I 10 11 Other Devices 10 11 1 SFC block device BL 10 11 2 SFC transition device TR 10 11 3 Network No designation device J 10 11 4 I O No designation device U 10 11 5 Macro instruction argument device VD 10 12 Constants 10 12 1 Decimal constants K 10 12 2 Hexadecimal constants H 10 12 3 Real numbers E 10 12 4 Character string 10 13 Convenient Uses for Devices 10 13 1 Global devices amp local devices 10 13 2 Device initial values 11 HIGH PERFORMANCE MOD
242. l privod irk ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 790 72 10 Fax 7 095 790 72 12 e mail info privod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Strasse 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
243. lection when the COM instruction is executed QCPU Serial number 04012 or later Automatic refresh of CPU shared memory Execution non execution of general data processing Oo e mi J Ei 11 85 11 85 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 7 Debug Remaining No of imul Sie ae e Stores the remaining number of simultaneous execution of the CC El Diese Link dedicated instructions CC Link f dedicated instruction Stores the mask patterns masked by the IMASK instruction as follows b15 bi bO SD781 163 149 148 Mask pattern SD782 179 165 164 PID limi Ge QCPU i Serial No fi or 05032 incomplete or later derivative Corresponding ACPU DTT Corresponding Expl i xplanation CPU Mask pattern of IMASK instruction S During execution e Stores file name with extension from point in time when status latch was conducted as ASCII code b15 to b8 b7 to b Status latch file name Status latch file name SD806 SD807 SD808 SD809 SD810 SD811 Second character First character Fourth character Third character Sixth character Fifth character Eighth character seventh character First character of extension 2EH Third character of extension 2nd character of extension S During execution Stores step number from point in
244. leshooting are as follows 1 Visual inspection Visually check the following 1 Movement of sequencer stopped condition operating condition 2 Power supply on off 3 Status of input output devices 4 Power supply module CPU module I O module intelligent function module installation condition of extension cable 5 Status of wiring I O cables cables 6 Display status of various types of indicators POWER LED RUN LED ERR LED I O LED 7 Status of setting of various types of set switches Setting of No of stages of extension base unit power interrupt hold on status After confirming items 1 to 7 connect the GX Developer and check the operating conditions of the PLC and the contents of the program 2 Check of trouble Check to see how the operating condition of the PLC varies while the PLC is operated as follows 1 Set the RUN STOP switch to STOP 2 Reset the trouble with the RESET L CLR switch 3 Turn ON and OFF the power supply 3 Reduction in area Estimate the troubled part in accordance with items 1 and 2 above 1 PLC or external devices 2 WO module or others 3 Sequence program 11 1 11 1 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 2 Troubleshooting The trouble investigating methods contents of troubles for the error codes and remedies of the troubles are described below 11 2 1 Troubleshooting flowchart The following shows the contents of the troubles classified into a variety of gr
245. link refresh Performs all refresh processes Performs the refresh set the SD778 Local device disabled Local device enabled Local device disabled Local device enabled CC Link dedicated instruction executable CC Link dedicated instruction not executable Matched Not matched Meaning Not ready Ready Suspend Start Suspend Start gt ON Start Not after trigger After trigger Not completed End OFF Not ready e S Status ON Ready Goes ON when status latch is ready D S New smso7 Peas latch OFF ON Latch command 11 53 MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Explanation When Set Goes ON when MSG instruction is executed Instruction execution Specify whether the set value SV will be matched with the process value PV or not in the manual mode Selects whether only the general data process is performed for the execution of the COM instruction or the link refresh process is also performed QCPU serial number 04012 or later Selects whether all refresh process or the refresh set with SD778 is performed when COM instruction is executed Set whether the local device of the subroutine program called at execution of the CALL instruction is valid or invalid U Status change Set whether the local device at execution of the interrupt program is valid or invalid U Status change Switches ON when the number of the
246. ly is turned OFF or a CPU module User timing clock reset is performed goes from OFF to start Every END No 2 The ON OFF intervals are set with the DUTY instruction processing eeh base __ DUTY ni n2 SM420 H User timing clock No 4 User timing clock Z w User timing clock zZ zZ 5 3 6 O oa User timing clock e For use with SM420 to SM424 low speed programs Every END processing Zz D N User timing clock No 8 User timing clock a E S 4 Scan information Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set Law speed OFF Completed on not Goes ON when low speed execution type program is program executed executed Every END execution flag ON Execution under way processing e When this relay goes from OFF to ON the module service interval designated by SD550 is read to SD551 to SD552 Reads module OFF Ignored service interval ON Read 5 Memory cards Memory card A OFF Unusable S Initial SM600 usable flags ON Use enabled ON when memory card A is ready for use by user nitia EE Memory card A OFF No protect d ME Ki SM601 protect flag ON Protect Goes ON when memory card A protect switch is ON S Initial K OFF No drive 1 S Ka SM602 Drive 1 flag e Turns ON when the mounted memory card A is RAM S Initial New ON Drive 1 present SM603 Drive 2 flag OFF No drive 2 Turns ON when the mounted memory card A is ROM S Initial ON Drive 2
247. m 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q c CC Link module 1 Be sure to ground the cable shield that is connected to the CC Link module close to the exit of control panel or to any of the CC Link stations within 30 cm 11 81 inch from the module or stations The CC Link dedicated cable is a shielded cable As shown in the illustration below remove a portion of the outer covering and ground as large a surface area of the exposed shield part as possible a dedicated cable Shield 2 Always use the specified CC Link dedicated cable 3 Do not use a ferrite core for the CC Link module or CC Link stations 4 The CC Link module the CC Link stations and the FG line inside the control panel should be connected at both the FG terminal and the SLD terminal as shown in the diagram below Simplified diagram Master station Remote I O station Local station Blue T T Terminal resistor L White K 2 G GG G Terminal resistor ma Yell pe row pe DG SLD CC Link SLD CC Link SLD FG dedicated FG dedicated FG cable cable d IO signal lines For the I O signal lines if extracted to the outside of the control panel also ensure to earth the shield section of these lines and cables in the same manner as in item 1 above 2 Power supply module The precautions required for each power supply module are desc
248. m Check the specified drive and specify the correct drive The specified device memory cannot be 4051H accessed An error occurred when writing data to the 4053H E specified drive memory An error occurred when deleting the data in the specified drive memory The monitor detail condition is already being used and monitored by another piece of equipment Check the specified keyword App 3 App 3 APPENDICES MELSEC Q or cone Erron Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item 40701 Circuit inquiry Program before correction and the registration Check the registration program and make the programs program differ match 4080 Check the requested data contents 4081H The sort subject cannot be detected Check the data to be searched 40824 Other errors The specified command is executing and Reexecute the command after the request from the therefore cannot be executed other equipment is completed Trying to execute a program that is not 4083H S registered in the parameter 4084H The specified pointer P cannot be detected _ Check the data to be searched Pointer P cannot be specified because the Specify pointer P I after registering the program to be program is not specified in the parameter executed in the parameter Pointer P has already been added Check the pointer No to be added and make correction rying to specify too many pointers Check the specified pointer and make a correction Registe
249. m type main base unit with High Slim type main base unit Performance model QCPU and slim type power supply module I O module and intelligent function module attachable Extension base unit Base unit General name for main base units slim type main base unit and extension base units EviGasion cable General name for QC05B QCO6B QC12B QC30B QC50B and QC100B type extension cable General name for SRAM card Flash card and ATA card Power sunniy msdul General name for Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P Q64P A1S61PN A1S62P and DH A1S68P types power supply module Slim type power supply module General name for Q61SP slim type power supply module Batter General name for battery for Q6BAT and Q7BAT type CPU module and Q2MEM BAT y type SRAM card SRAM card Abbreviation for Q2MEM 1MBS and Q2MEM 2MBS type SRAM card Flash card General name for Q2MEM 2MBF and Q2MEM 4MBF types Flash card General name for Q2MEM 8MBA Q2MEM 16MBA and Q2MEM 32MBA types ATA ATA card Sard Operating Precautions Precautions for using the High Performance model QCPU Q mode for the first time 1 When using the High Performance model QCPU Q mode for the first time the user memories must be formatted using GX Developer Refer to 6 ABOUT MEMORIES AND FILES HANDLED BY HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPU Q MODE in the High Performance Model QCPU Q Mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals When using GX Developer for formatting refer
250. mail consys autocont cz louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 70 10 15 35 Fax 45 0 43 95 95 91 e mail pia lpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 72 88 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail info beijer fi UTECO A B E E 5 Mavrogenous Str GR 18542 Piraeus Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 e mail sales uteco gr GREECE Meltrade Automatika Kft 55 Harmat St HU 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605 602 e mail office meltrade hu HUNGARY SIA POWEL Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv LATVIA Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Str Biharia No 67 77 RO 013981 Bucuresti 1 Phone 40 0 21 201 1146 Fax 40 0 21 201 1148 e mail sirius siriustrading ro INEA doo SLOVENIA Stegne 11 SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail inea inea si Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN Box 426 S 20124 Malm Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail info beijer se ECONOTEC AG Postfach 282 CH 8309 N rensdort Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11
251. mode When this relay is turned ON the start of tracking is carried y over to next END if the tracking memory is being used at END M1520 Block 1 M1521 Block 2 M1522 Block 3 M1523 Block 4 M1524 Block 5 M1525 Block 6 M1526 SM1526 Block 7 M1527 SM1527 Block 8 M1528 SM1528 Block 9 M1529 SM1529 Block 10 M1530 SM1530 Block 11 M1531 Data tracking SM1531 Specified the blocks to trigger when M1532 Sech OFF No trigger SM1532 the data is transmitted by the data M1533 transmission Ink ON Trigger SM1533 tracking instruction specification M1534 SM1534 Block 15 S TRUCK M1535 SM1535 M1536 SM1536 M1537 SM1537 M1538 SM1538 M1539 SM1539 M1540 SM1540 M1541 SM1541 M1542 SM1542 M1543 SM1543 M1544 SM1544 M1545 SM1545 11 62 11 62 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued R f Set by ACPU Applicable S M1546 Block 27 M1547 SM1547 Block 28 M1548 M1548 Block 29 M1549 M1549 Block 30 M1550 M1550 Block 31 M1551 M1551 Block 32 M1552 M1552 Block 33 M1553 M1553 Block 34 M1554 M1554 Block 35 M1555 M1555 Bloch 36 M1556 M1556 Block 37 M1557 M1557 Block 38 M1558 M1558 Block 39 M1559 SM1559 Block 40 M1560 SM1560 Block 41 M1561 SM1561 Block 42 M1562 SM1562 Block 43 M1563 SM1563 Specified the blocks to trigger when M1564 L tracking OFF No trigger SM1564 the data is transmitted by the data M1565 transmission link ON Trigger SM1565 tracking instruction
252. module AS92R hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 A momentary power supply interruption has occurred 1500 2 The power supply went off Check the power supply The power supply voltage 100 240VAC of either of the two power 1510 supply modules on the power supply duplexing extension base unit dropped to or below 85 of the rated voltage The power supply voltage 100 240VAC of the power supply 1520 module on the extension base unit dropped to or below 85 of the rated voltage 1530 The 24 VDC power supplied to the system management module AS92R has dropped below 90 of the rated voltage 1 Voltage in the CPU module battery has dropped below 1600 stipulated level 2 The CPU module battery is not connected Check the supply voltage of the power supply module If the voltage is abnormal then replace the power supply module Check the 24VDC power supplied to the system management module AS92R e Change the battery If the battery is for program memory standard RAM or for the back up power function install a lead connector Voltage of the battery on memory card 1 has dropped below 1601 stipulated level Change the battery Voltage of the battery on memory card 2 has dropped below 1602 stipulated level Change the battery QnA x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information
253. module RUN 1 is 1 second Number of counts in S Status SD412 j We added each second tat counter ei e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 a ifs cond e Stores value n of 2n second clock Default is 30 f i Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 fons Pe e Stores value n of 2nms clock Default is 30 sous Pane e Setting can be made between 1 and 32767 Scan Nuniber Su gei Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module S Every SD420 o e each Sear is set to RUN 3 END e Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 processing e Incremented by 1 for each scan execution after the CPU module peweberd Number of counts in is set to RUN SiEvery SD430 scan END each scan Count repeats from 0 to 32767 to 32768 to 0 counter S processing e Used only for low speed execution type programs x Not counted by the scan in an initial execution type program 11 79 11 79 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 4 Scan information Corresponding i D TT program No _ execution stored as BIN value change S Low speed Low speed execution e Program number of low speed excution type program No Every excution type type program No in currently being executed is stored as BIN value END program No execution Enabled only when SM510 is ON processing S Evel Current scan time Stores current scan time in 1 ms units oe D9017 format in 1 ms units Range from 0 to 65535 8 Cha
254. monitor the special registers SD1400 to SD1431 ata peripheral device and change the fuse at the output module whose bit has a value of 1 e When a display device is connected to the main base unit or extension base unit check the connection status of the extension cable and the earth status of the display device Make setting again to match the parameter I O assignment with the actual loading status e Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform to the actual status of the intelligent function module and the CPU module e Delete the general purpose switch settings QnA Reduce the A series special function modules except the A1SI61 that can make an interrupt start to the CPU module to 12 or less QCPU Keep the number of special function modules that can initiate an interrupt with the exception of the A 1S I61 module to 12 or fewer Keep the number of A1SD51S to 6 or fewer QCPU Keep the number of serial communication modules excludes A 1S J71QU24 installed to 6 or fewer e Reduce the number of QI60 A1S161 modules loaded in the single CPU system to one e Change the number of QI60 A1SI61 modules set to the same control CPU to only one in the multiple CPU system e Reduce the number of A1SI61 modules to only one in the multiple CPU system When using an interrupt module with each QCPU in a multiple CPU system change it for the QI60 Use one A1SI61 module max three QI60 modules or only the QI60 modules
255. mperature of 25 to 75 C operating ambient temperature of 0 to 55 C x3 The actual operation value is a value at the storage ambient temperature of 40 C operating ambient temperature of 25 C 10 5 10 5 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 2 CPU modules whose first five digits of serial No are less than 0501 1 Poweron CPU Module Type Time Ratio Guaranteed Actual After SM52 ON Guaranteed Actual After SM52 ON x1 value operation value Guaranteed operation value Guaranteed 70 C 40 C time after alarm 40 C time after alarm occurrence occurrence x2 x3 x2 x3 0 62 years 1 49 years 5 days 1 48 years 3 53 years 10 days 7761 hr 18742 hr 18571 hr 43800 hr 0 88 years 2 13 years 2 11 years 5 00 years ge 10866 hr 26240 hr 120 hr 26000 hr 43800 hr 240 hr 2 06 years 4 99 years 5 days 4 94 years 5 00 years 10 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 0 26 years 0 73 years 5 days 0 57 years 1 59 years 10 days 0 38 years 1 04 years 5 days 0 81 years 2 28 years 10 days QO6HCPU S 0 53 years 1 46 years 5 days 1 14 years 3 19 years 10 days 0 89 years 2 44 years 5 days 1 90 years 5 00 years 10 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 0 14 years 0 48 years 2 days 0 33 years 1 10 years 4 days 0 20 years 0 68 years 2 days 0 47 years 1 58 years 4 days Q25HCPU i 0 28 years 0 96 years 2 days 0 66 years 2 21 years 4 days 0 47 years 1 60 years 2 days 1 10 years 3 69 years 4 days 5
256. multiple CPU system processing 15 ALLOCATING MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM I O NUMBERS 15 1 Concept behind Allocating I O Numbers 15 1 1 I O modules and intelligent function module I O numbers 15 1 2 I O number of High Performance model QCPU Motion CPU and PC CPU module 15 2 Setting of Control CPUs with GX Developer 16 COMMUNICATION BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S QCPUS AND MOTION CPUs 16 1 Automatic Refresh of Common CPU Memory 16 2 Communication with Multiple CPU Dedicated Instructions and Intelligent Function Module Devices 16 3 Interactive Communications between The High Performance model QCPU and Motion CPU 16 3 1 Control instructions from the High Performance model QCPU to the Motion CPU 16 3 2 Reading and writing device data 16 4 Common CPU Memory 17 COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM S I O MODULES AND INTELLIGENT FUNCTION MODULES 17 1 Range of Control PLC Communications 17 2 Range of Non control PLC Communications 18 PROCESSING TIME FOR MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM HIGH PERFORMANCE MODEL QCPUs 18 1 Concept behind QCPU Scanning Time 18 2 Factor to Prolong the Scan Time 19 STARTING UP THE MULTIPLE CPU SYSTEM 19 1 Flow chart for Starting Up the Multiple CPU System 19 2 Setting Up the Multiple CPU System Parameters Multiple PLC Settings Control PLC Settings 19 2 1 System configuration 19 2 2 Creating new systems 19 2 3 Using existing preset multiple CPU settings and I O allocations APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Special Relay L
257. n 32 I O modules are oo A loaded to each slot 19F 1BF 1DF1FF 21F 23F 25F 27F 29F 2BF 2DF 2F oo Extension base unit Q68B Extension base unit QA1S68B G ss i Power supply module Eesen Power supply module stage 24 28 stage L 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 ES 300 380 3A0 3CO 3EO ES Ge a OO oo OO 20 Extension base unit Q68B eo tension base unit QA1 Keegseseeeen Power supply module Keeser Power supply module 3rd extension 432 33 34 35 36 oir extension 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 stage ist extension The figure shows the configuration stage O 400 480 700 el DN 00 4BF 4DF 4FF 6BF 6DF 6FF 71F 73F 75F 77F OO 0 0 Extension base unit Q65B 2 Extension base unit QA1S65B f Power supply module 7 Power supply module stage J 40 41 42 43 44 Sage 61 6263 oO 500 520 540 560 580 oo 7A0 7C0 7E0 III SAAR de 51F 53F 55F 57F 59F ee 7BF 7DF 7FF Prohibit Prohibit EG hei When module is installed an error occurs Seven Extension Stages 64 modules 4096 1 Extension bases unit of up to seven stages can be used 2 Do not use extension cable longer than an ove
258. n A from the main base unit Alternatively replace the High Performance model QCPU of function version A with the High Performance model QCPU of function version B The intelligent function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again the intelligent function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version A from the main base unit Alternatively replace the High Performance model QCPU of function version A with the High Performance model QCPU of function version B e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again If the same error is displayed again the intelligent function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The special function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The intelligent function module CPU module or base unit is faulty Therefore change the faulty module or unit Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e This suggests a system management
259. n END instruction is executed At power ON At reset Flicker During execution of FROMTO instruction set Flicker Always When an END instruction is executed When an END instruction is Stop executed At power ON At reset Continue Always x indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 3 This can only be detected in redundant systems Detection is possible in either the control system or the standby system x4 This can only be detected in the redundant system control system x5 This can be detected in either a standalone system or a redundant system However in a redundant system it can only be detected in the control system x6 Stop continue operation is selectable for each module by setting parameters 11 21 11 21 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Corres copa Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding CPU Any of the mounted modules is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore check the mounted modules and change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1310 An interruption has occurred although there is no interrupt module 1 There was no response from the intelligent function module during initial communication stage 2 The size of the buffer memory of the intelligent function module is wrong When parameter I O allocation was being made there was no return signal from the special function module
260. n is to be limited and a special quality is not required application shall be possible When considering use in aircraft medical applications railways incineration and fuel devices manned transport devices equipment for recreation and amusement and safety devices in which human life or assets could be greatly affected and for which a particularly high reliability is required in terms of safety and control system please consult with Mitsubishi and discuss the required specifications A MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V German Branch Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 2102 486 0 Fax 49 0 2102 486 1120 e mail megfamail meg mee com EUROPE MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V French Branch 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55 68 56 85 e mail factory automation framee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC IRELAND EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park Ballymount IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ITALY EUROPE B V Italian Branch Via Paracelso 12 1 20041 Agrate Brianza Ml Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation itmee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE
261. n users could set data at special registers D9200 to D9255 only and after conversion users can also set data at registers 1200 to 1255 For more detailed information concerning the contents of the ACPU special registers see the individual CPU users manual and the MELSECNET and MELSECNET B data link system reference manual Supplemental explanation on Special Register for Modification column For the device numbers for which a special register for modification is specified modify it to the special register for QCPU QnACPU For the device numbers for which is specified special register after conversion can be used Device numbers for which X is specified do not function for QCPU QnACPU Special Register List ACPU Special Special e Special Register after Register for Name Meaning Details SCH 9 Conversion Conversion Modification e When fuse blown modules are detected the first I O number of the lowest number of the detected modules is stored in hexadecimal Example When fuses of Y50 to 6F output modules have Number of blown 50 is stored in hexadecimal To monitor the D9000 SD1000 Fuse blown module with number by peripheral devices perform monitor operation blown fuse given in hexadecimal Cleared when all contents of SD1100 to SD1107 are reset to 0 e Fuse blow check is executed also to the output modules of remote I O stations e Stores the module numbers corresponding to setting switch numbers or bas
262. nducted communications JON Batch processing requests conducted seconds 0 0 2 second clock se ends 0 5 seconds 0 5 seconds 1 second clock 2 second clock secors sionas Clock data read OFF Ignored e Reads clock data to SD1025 to SD1028 in BCD when Q3A Q4A Q4AR Clock data is read from SD1025 to SD1028 and month day hour minute and minute are indicated on the CPU module front LED display The SM1029 relay is turned on using a sequence program to process all data communication requests accepted during one scan in the END processing of that scan e The batch processing of the data communication requests can be turned on and off during running e The default is OFF processed one at a time for each END processing in the order in which data communication requests are accepted 0 1 second 0 2 second 1 second and 2 second clocks are generated e Not turned on or off per scan but turned on and off even during scan if corresponding time has elapsed e Starts with off when PLC power supply is turned on or CPU module reset is performed x 1 minute clock indicates the name of the special relay M9034 of the ACPU 11 56 11 56 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC O Special Relay List Continued ACPU Special Special Special Relay after Relay for Meaning Details Relay Conversion Modification Alternates between ON and OFF according to the 2n minute clock seconds specified at SD
263. nformation is being stored 11 36 11 36 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED Status Operating Spon Error Messages Information Information FED cae Statuses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 al SD16 to 26 x1 RUN ERROR Always 7000 At power ON Reset MULTI CPU DOWN Unit No Flicker 7002 At power ON Reset 7010 MULTI EXE ERROR it No Off At power ON Reset 9000 Program error location Annunciator number When instruction is executed 9010 lt CHK ERR Program error location Failure No Continue When instruction is executed Aker KZ USER LED On Ge e See 9 e See x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x6 xxx indicates detected annunciator number 7 as indicates detected contact and coil number 11 37 11 37 11 TROUBLESH TIN Sessa UNS MELSEC Q Corres SC Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action In a multiple CPU system at CPU module fault occurred at a Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral H Where All station stop by stop error of PLC was yee check the error of the PLC resulting in CPU module selected in the operating mode fault and remove the error 2 High Performance model QCPU of function version A was 2 Remove the High Performance model QCPU of function version loaded in a multiple CPU system A from the main base unit n a multiple CPU syst
264. ng the peripheral device check the program that corresponds to that numerical value program error location and correct when necessary Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check the FROM TO instruction that corresponds to that numerical value program error location and correct when necessary e The special function module that was accessed is experiencing a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1 Read the individual information of the error using a peripheral device and check the special function module dedicated instruction network instruction that corresponds to the value program error part to make modification 2 Set the module model by parameter I O assignment according to the special function module dedicated instruction setting Example Although AJ71QC24N is used actually AJ71QC24 is set Read the individual information of the error using a peripheral device and check the special function module dedicated instruction network instruction that corresponds to the value program error part to make modification QCPU function Ver B or later Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral dervice check the program corresponding that value program error location and make correction e When online module change of the Process CPU is to be performed in a multiple PLC system c
265. nge processing e Stores current scan time in 100 us units Range from 00000 to 900 Current scan time Example in 100 us units A current scan of 23 6 ms would be stored as follows D520 23 D521 600 Initial scan time e Stores the scan time of an initial execution type program into in 1 ms units D522 and SD523 Measurement is made in 100us units S First SD522 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 END SD523 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 processing Current scan time S Every END processing Initial scan time Initial scan time in 100 us units S Every END D9018 format Minimum scan time je Stores the minimum value of the scan time except that of an in1 i initial execution type program into SD524 and SD525 change Minimum scan Ne eee EES prog processing g tine Measurement is made in 100us units SIE Minimum scan time SD524 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 Gre N in 100 us units SD525 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 ow processing Maximum scan time Stores the maximum value of the scan time except that of in 1 ms units an initial execution type program into SD526 and SD527 S Every change Measurement is made in 100 units END SD526 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 processing New SD527 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Current scan Current scan time e Stores the current scan time of a low speed execut
266. ni leaning CPU Explanation Indicates memory card model installed b15 to b8 b7 to b4b3 to b oo ST Drive 1 RAM model 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM S Initial and card removal 0 Does not exist Drive 2 1 SRAM ROM model 2 ATA FLASH 3 Flash ROM Indicates memory card A model installed b15 to b8 b7 to b4b3 to b 0 T Memory card A models 0 Does not exist 1 SRAM Drive 1 RAM model S Initial and card removal 0 Does not exist Drive 2 ROM model 2 EEPROM 3 Flash ROM Drive 1 RAM capacity removal removal removal removal Drive 1 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units Drive 2 ROM capacity e Drive 2 capacity is stored in 1 kbyte units e The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indicated below Boot operation QBT Parameters QPA Device comments QCD Device initial value QDI File register R QDR Trace QTS Not used Not used Memory card use conditions Memory card use conditions b8 Not used b9 CPU fault history QFD b10 Not used b11 Local device QDL b12 Not used b13 Not used b14 Not used b15 Not used The use conditions for memory card A are stored as bit patterns In use when ON e The significance of these bit patterns is indic
267. nt device station connected to Ge A 1S J61QBT61 communicati on request 3 ial redi h i k gt SD736 PKEY input PKEY input Special register t at temporari y stores keyboard data input by means S During New QnA of the PKEY instruction execution 11 84 11 84 execution 11 Number D738 D739 D740 D741 D742 D743 D744 D745 D746 D747 D748 D749 D750 D751 D752 D753 D754 D755 D756 D757 D758 D759 D760 D761 D762 D763 D764 D765 D766 D767 D768 D769 n D774 O D775 Si n Message storage PID limit setting for complete derivative Refresh 0 Limit set 1 Limit not set b to b14 0 Do not refresh 1 Refresh TROUBLESHOOTING Special Register List Continued as Stores the message designated by the MSG instruction D738 D739 D740 SD741 D742 D743 SD744 SD745 SD746 SD747 SD748 SD749 SD750 SD751 SD752 SD753 SD754 SD755 SD756 SD757 SD758 SD759 SD760 SD761 SD762 SD763 SD764 SD765 SD766 SD767 SD768 SD769 b15 to b8 b7 to DU 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd character 6th character 5th character 8th character 7th character 10th character 9th character 12th character 11th character 14th character 13th character 16th character 15th character 18th character 17th character 20th character 19th character 22nd character 21st character
268. o 12 are functions added to the High Performance model QCPU whose serial number is 02092 or later in its upper 5 digits e The remote password facility can be executed when the Ethernet module or serial communication module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or later are used In addition to the remote password there are the following protection facilities for the High Performance model QCPU a Protection of the whole CPU module by making system protection settings of the High Performance model QCPU b Protection of the memory card by setting the write protect switch of the memory card c File by file protection using password e The MELSECNET H remote I O network facility can be executed when the MELSECNET H network module of function version B and GX Developer Version 6 or later are used 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM This section describes the system configuration of the High Performance model QCPU cautions on use of the system and configured equipment 2 1 System Configuration The outline of the equipment configuration configuration with peripheral devices and system configuration in the High Performance model QCPU system is described below 2 1 Equipment configuration a If the main base unit Q3OB is used Memory card 1 Q2MEM 1MBS Q2MEM 2MBS Q2M
269. o CPU module B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed CC Link module Goes OFF when normal operation is restored Goes ON when a CC Link error is detected in any of the installed CC Link module e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter Turns ON when an SFC program is registered OFF when an SFC program is not registered U Every New U S Initial New New New fe S Initial fe S Initial H S Status change S Error S Initial 11 47 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Start stop SFC program SFC program start status Presence absenc e of continuous transition for entire block Continuous transition prevention flag Output mode at block stop SFC device clear mode Output during end step execution Operation mode for low speed execution type program Normal SFC program execution status Program execution management SFC program execution status Access execution flag SM323 SM324 SM325 SM326 SM327 SM330 SM331 SM332 SM390 11 48 Meaning SFC program stop SFC program start Initial start Restart Continuous transition not effective Continuous transition effective When transition
270. ode to be canceled stored in the SD50 the lower one digit of the code is neglected Example If error codes 2100 and 2101 occur and error code 2100 to cancel error code 2101 If error codes 2100 and 2111 occur error code 2111 is not canceled even if error code 2100 is canceled 2 Errors developed due to trouble in other than the CPU module are not canceled even if the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 are used to cancel the error Example The cause of SP UNIT DOWN error cannot be removed even by using the special relay SM50 and special register SD50 because the error is developed on the Q bus Refer to the error code list in Section 11 3 2 to remove the cause of the error 11 39 11 39 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 11 5 I O Module Troubleshooting MELSEC Q This chapter explains possible problems with I O circuits and their corrective actions 11 5 1 Input circuit troubleshooting Input signal does not turn OFF Example 1 Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF Input signal does not turn OFF a 2 Q E Si x lt OI o 2 Q E Si x lt m 2 Q E Si x lt 11 40 This section describes possible problems with input circuits and their corrective actions Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions P Condition Cause Corrective Action e Leakage current of input switch e g drive by non contact switch AC input s Leakage H curren
271. odule is using the memory card e When SM605 is ON turn it OFF When SM604 and SM605 are OFF remove the memory card in the following procedure 1 Turn on the special relay SM609 using the sequence program or by the device test of GX Developer etc 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned off 3 Extract the memory card SM600 Memory card usable flag The system is turned on when memory card is ready for use by user SM604 memory card use flag The system is turned on when the CPU module uses a memory card SM605 memory card detach inhibit flag This is turned on by the user to disable the memory card from being detached 4 To install the memory card while the power is turned on 1 Install the memory card 2 By monitoring GX Developer etc check that the special relays SM600 is turned on POINTS Install and remove the memory card while the power is turned on paying attention to the following 1 If the procedures specified above are not followed the data stored in the memory card may be destroyed When the CPU module operation at the time of occurrence of a parameter error is set to STOP the CPU module operation is stopped by the occurrence of ICM OPE ERROR 2 When the memory card is installed its mount processing is performed again As a result the scanning time is increased by several 10 ms max 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 6 Inst
272. off the 5 VDC circuit and stops the system if a voltage of 5 5 VDC is applied to the circuit When this device is activated the power supply module LED is switched OFF If this happens switch the input power OFF then a few minutes later ON This causes the initial start for the system to take place The power supply module must be changed if the system is not booted and the LED remains OFF Allowable momentary power failure period 1 For AC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 20ms will cause AC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 20ms may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load However if only the AC input module QX10 etc is connected to the AC line which is connected to the power supply detection of the AC down for the power supply module may be delayed by the capacitor in the AC input module QX10 etc Thus connect a load of approx 30mA per AC input module QX10 etc to the AC line 2 For DC input power supply e An instantaneous power failure lasting less than 10ms 4 will cause 24VDC down to be detected but operation will continue e An instantaneous power failure lasting in excess of 10ms 4 may cause the operation to continue or initial start to take place depending on the power supply load x4 This is for a 24VDC input This is 10ms or less for 24VDC o
273. oid mounting base unit in proximity to vibration sources such as large magnetic contractors and no fuse circuit breakers mount these on a separate panel or at a distance Distances from the other devices In order to avoid the effects of radiated noise and heat provide the clearances indicated below between the PLC and devices that generate noise or heat contactors and relays e Required clearance in front of PLC ai least 100 mm 8 94 inch e Required clearance on the right and leftof PLC at least 50 mm 1 97 inch t least 50mm 1 97 inch 1 97 inch 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 3 3 Installation and removal of module This section explains how to install and remove a power supply CPU I O intelligent function or another module to and from the base unit 1 Installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q50B and Q60B The installation and removal of the module from Q30B Q6LB base unit are described below a Installation of module on Q30B Q50B and Q60B Base unit Base unit Module Insert the module fixing latch into the module fixing hole of the base unit Module connector i Module loading i lever Push the module in the direction of arrow to load it Module into the base unit Module fixing fixing latch hole Module fixing hole JI Make sure that the module is inserted in the base unit securely a Completion D
274. oltage Directive application range 4 Intelligent function modules special function modules The intelligent function modules special function modules such as the analog network and positioning modules are 24VDC or less in rated voltage and are therefore out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 5 Display device Use the CE marked display device 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 2 3 Power supply 8 2 4 Control box MELSEC Q The insulation specification of the power supply module was designed assuming installation category Il Be sure to use the installation category II power supply to the PLC The installation category indicates the durability level against surge voltage generated by a thunderbolt Category has the lowest durability category IV has the highest durability O lt gt lt gt lt gt lt Category IV Category III Category II Category Figure 8 1 Installation Category Category II indicates a power supply whose voltage has been reduced by two or more levels of isolating transformers from the public power distribution Because the PLC is an open device a device designed to be stored within another module be sure to use it after storing in the control box 1 Electrical shock prevention In order to prevent persons who are not familiar with the electric facility such as the operators from electric shocks the control box must have the following functions a The
275. ommand 11 53 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List Continued Number Name Meaning Explanation When Set petal e 1 en IT wooo Status latch OFF Latch not completed i f S Status SM808 ON Latch completed Comes ON when status latch is completed 9055 QnA SM809 Status latch clear OFF ON Clear e Enable next status latch Program trace OFF Not ready i S Status SM810 ON Ready Goes ON when program trace is ready New SM811 Start program OFF Suspend e Program trace started when this goes ON S Status New trace ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change Program trace g i ee Suspend e ON when program trace execution is underway U New ON Start way QnA Program trace 3 e Program trace trigger goes ON when this goes from OFF S Status SE SE to ON Identical to PTRA instruction execution status change New After program OFF Not after trigger S Status 4 trace trigger ON After trigger Goes ON after program trace trigger change New Program trace OFF Not completed 2 R S Status ON End Goes ON at completion of program trace change New Step trace OFF Not ready 3 3 SM820 preparation ON Ready Goes ON after program trace registration at ready Fou nw oo Step trace stats OFF Suspend e When this goes ON step trace is started S Status M9182 format H ON Start e Suspended when OFF Related special M all OFF change change Step traco i Goes ON when step trace execution is und
276. on 10 12 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 4 When Resuming Operation after Storage of PLC without Battery 10 13 When the PLC operation is to be resumed after being stored with the battery removed the memories in the CPU module and memory card may be corrupted Hence before resuming operation always format the memories using GX Developer After formatting the memories write the memory contents backed up prior to storage to each memory The following table indicates the relationships between the battery and battery backed memories Battery Q6BAT or Q7BAT of i Battery Built in Memory Card QCPU Module Programmemoy o o x E x CPU module Standard RAM O Standard ROM Battery backup not needed SRAM card x Memory card Flash card Battery backup not needed ATA card Battery backup not needed Battery backed X Not battery backed Format the battery backed memories in the above table using GX Developer before resuming operation Refer to the GX Developer manual for the memory formatting operation POINTS Before storing the PLC always back up the contents of each memory 10 13 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 5 When Resuming PLC Operation after Storage of PLC with Battery Gone Flat 10 14 When the PLC is to be used after being stored for some period of time and the battery has gone flat during storage the memories in the CPU module and memory ca
277. on MELSECNET 10 module 4 information N Ed E Q oO E Ss x o 3 fe Q ER OFF SFC program absent ON SFC program present ios D So o e S n a O o V A z S a A program 11 47 Effective for the batch refresh also effective for the low speed cyclic Designate whether to receive arrival stations only or to receive all slave stations Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed e For refresh from link to CPU module B W etc indicate whether to read from the link module For refresh from CPU module to link B W etc designate whether to write to the link module Goes ON for standby network If no designation has been made concerning active or standby active is assumed For refresh from link t
278. on 11 3 for further information u f onw e ON if battery voltage at CPU module or memory card drops below rated value e Remains ON if the battery voltage returns to normal thereafter e Synchronizes with the BAT ALARM BAT LED Same as SM51 but goes OFF subsequently when battery voltage returns to normal e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 20ms occurs during use of the AC power supply module Reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 10ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module e Reset when power is switched OFF then ON e Turns ON if an instantaneous power failure of within 1ms occurs during use of the DC power supply module Reset when power is switched OFF then ON Goes ON if MINI S3 link error is detected at even one of the installed AJ71PT32 S3 modules e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter ON when operation error is generated e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter e Turns ON if there is at least one output module whose fuse has blown e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter Blown fuse status is checked even for remote I O station output modules e Turns ON if the I O module differs from the status registered at power on e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter UO module verification is also conducted for remote I
279. on Base Unit ccecceceeeeeeeceeceeeeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeceeseaeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseessaesaeseeseataeseeseaeeaees 6 6 6 5 Guideline for Use of Extension Base Units OB 6 8 A 7 A 7 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY 7 1to7 7 7 1 Memory Card Specifications A 7 1 7 2 Battery Specifications For CPU Module and SRAM Cart 7 2 7 3 Handling the Memory Card 7 3 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Can 7 4 7 5 Memory Card Loading Unloading Procedures csccecessecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaeseeseeeeaeeaeseeeeaeeaaes 7 5 7 6 Installation of Battery For CPU Module and Memory Cant 7 6 8 1 Requirements for Conformance to EMC Directive ccceccescceeceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeceeeeeesaesaeseeseaesaneeseaeeaees 8 1 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive 8 1 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive eeseeeeeseseeresesreresnsrsrnsrsrnsrsrnsnsrernsrnrnsnsnnnnsnnnnnennnnnn 8 2 Llegir des 8 3 8 1 4 Power SUPPIY Mod le emrecan eeaeee eni eeey Teak Eda i AE 8 7 8 1 5 When using QA1S6 L B type base unit ccsesccsssesesessesessesessesesseseaseseaseseareseareseseseateseaceseaesees 8 7 BL DEE A A A A A A E 8 11 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive ccccccccecceceeeeeeeceeceeeeeeeaesaeeeeseeeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaees 8 12 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series DI 8 12 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC Selectionner arsada a pndar Tisa iaaa aa itaran 8 12 823 Power SUPP eeg
280. on Depends on whether or not data has been received from Data not received ON No reception the master station A OFF Reception Depends on whether or not a tier three station has ey Esch Data not received ON No reception received data from its master station in a three tier system OFF Normal ON Abnormal OFF Not being executed ON Forward or reverse loop test execution underway OFF RUN or STEP RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status OFF RUN or STEP RUN status ON STOP or PAUSE status OFF Normal ON Abnormal Details Depends on whether or not the master station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test Control is performed depending on whether a local station is in the STOP or PAUSE mode Depends on whether or not a local station has detected an error in another station Depends on whether or not a local or a remote I O station has detected any link parameter error in the master station Depends on the results of initial communication between a local or remote I O station and the master station Parameter communication etc Depends on the error condition of a local or remote I O station Depends on the error condition of the forward and reverse loop lines of a local or a remote I O station Depends on whether the local station is online or offline or is in station to station test or self loopback test mode Depends on whether or not loopback is occurring at the local station OFF Rece
281. ontrol cabinet mask the paint on the installation bolts of the inner plate in the control cabinet so that contact between surfaces can be ensured over the widest possible area Earth the control cabinet with a thick wire so that a low impedance connection to ground can be ensured even at high frequencies Holes made in the control cabinet must be 10 cm 3 94 inch diameter or less If the holes are 10 cm 3 94 inch or larger radio frequency noise may be emitted In addition because radio waves leak through a clearance between the control panel door and the main unit reduce the clearance as much as practicable The leakage of radio waves can be suppressed by the direct application of an EMI gasket on the paint surface Our tests have been carried out on a panel having the damping characteristics of 37 dB max and 30 dB mean measured by 3 m method with 30 to 300 MHz 2 Connection of power and earth wires Earthing and power supply wires for the PLC system must be connected as described below a Provide an earthing point near the power supply module Earth the power supply s LG and FG terminals LG Line Ground FG Frame Ground with the thickest and shortest wire possible The wire length must be 30 cm 11 81 inch or shorter The LG and FG terminals function is to pass the noise generated in the PLC system to the ground so an impedance that is as low as possible must be ensured As the wires are used to relieve the noise
282. oper c Since replacement is made with the PLC power supply ON take extreme care not to get an electric shock d When dismounting or mounting the battery holder on the SRAM card take care so that the battery does not come out of the battery holder e When replacing the battery with the PLC power supply OFF always back up the data before starting replacement Battery replacement procedure 1 Back up the SRAM card data using GX Developer 2 Replace the battery 3 Write the backed up data from GX Developer to the memory card Replacing battery its holder Insert a new battery into the holder in the correct direction Open the front cover while the PLC power supply is on With a flat blade screwdriver etc remove the battery holder locking switch from the LOCK position Remove the battery holder from the SRAM card Remove the old battery from RELEASE position t Push the battery holder all the way into the memory card and confirm that the battery holder s locking switch is set to the LOCK position Monitor SM52 to verify on off Monitor SD52 to verify the bit number that is on A bit other than 0 is on OFF Bit 0 is on The CPU module battery is faulty 10 12 Bit 1 or 2 on Memory card A battery is faulty Refer to Section 10 3 2 1 Completi
283. or Set when error is generated Instruction execution Set when instruction is executed Request Set only when there is a user request through SM etc e Indicates special relay M9 _ _ _ corresponding to the ACPU Corresponding ACPU Change and notation when there has been a change in contents Mo e New indicates the item that has been newly added to the High Performance model QCPU QnACPU e Indicates the corresponding CPU module type name Rem Can be applied to all CPU types and MELSECNET H remote I O modules Can be applied to all types of CPU QCPU Can be applied to High Performance model QCPU QnA Can be applied to QnA series and Q2ASCPU Series Remote Can be applied to the MELSECNET H remote I O modules Each CPU module type name Can be applied only to the specific CPU module e g Q4AR Q3A Set by When set Corresponding CPU For details on the following items refer to the following manuals e Networks e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual PLC to PLC network e For Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Reference Manual Remote I O network e For QnA Q4AR MELSECNET 10 Network System Reference Manual e SFC QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Programming Manual SFC 1 SM1200 to SM1255 are used for QnNACPU These relays are vacant with QCPU 2 Special relays SM1500 and later are dedicated for Q4ARCPU 11 44 TROUBLESHOOTING 1 Diagnostic Information MELSEC Q Spe
284. orrect the program so that O access will not be made to the module controlled by another PLC Serial e When access is to be made to the module controlled by another No 4122 PLC in a multiple PLC system set the online module change or later setting to disable in the parameter of the Process CPU 2120 The location of QLIB and OAI Bis improper heck the location of the base unit The CPU module is installed at other than the CPU slot or slots 0 to Check the loading position of the CPU module and reinstall it at the 2121 2 correct slot 2122 QA1SLB is used to the main base unit Use Q3LIB as the main base unit 1 A module is installed at 65th or higher slot 2 A module is installed at the slot later than the number of slots specified with base allocation setting 3 A module is installed at the I O points later than the 4 096th point 4 A module installed at the 4 096th point occupies higher points 1 A module which the QCPU cannot recognise has been installed 2 There was no response form the intelligent function module PU module locations in a multiple CPU system are either of the following 1 There are empty slots between the QCPU and QCPU motion controller 2 A module other than the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU including the motion controller is mounted on the left hand side of the High Performance model QCPU Process CPU In a multiple CPU system the control
285. ory card Not doing so can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module This section gives instructions for handling the CPU I O intelligent function and power supply modules base units and so on 1 Module enclosure terminal block connectors and pin connectors are made of resin do not drop them or subject them to strong impact 2 Do not remove modules printed circuit boards from the enclosure in order to avoid changes in operation 3 Tighten the module fixing screws and terminal block screws within the tightening torque range specified below Location of Screw Tightening Torque Range Module fixing screw M3 X 12 screw 36 to 48 N cm UO module terminal block screw M3 screw 42 to 58 N cm UO module terminal block fixing screw M3 5 screw 66 to 89 N cm Power supply module terminal screw M3 5 screw 66 to 89 N cm 4 Be sure to install the power supply module in the Q3OB Q6LB and QA1S6LB Even if the power supply module is not installed when the I O modules and intelligent function module installed on the base units are of light load type the modules may be operated In this case because
286. ot accepted i ON Accepted reception for master station Data recovery of online sampling trace status latch ZNRD instruction LRDP instruction OFF Data recovery disabled ON Data recovery enabled OFF Not accepted N A reception for 2 ccepted master station instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU completion ON End OFF Not completed OFF Not completed completion for master station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction SM1203 SM1204 SM1205 instruction LRDP instruction for ACPU reception for local station ZNWR instruction LWTP instruction OFF Not completed ON End OFF Not completed recep tion for local station OFF YES ON NO SM1207 Link parameter check results Sets master station B and W SM1208 transmission range for lower link master stations only Link parameter check command M9209 SM1209 for lower link master stations only OFF Transmits to tier2 and tier 3 ON Transmits to tier2 only y M9199 M9200 M9201 M9202 M9203 M9204 M9205 M9206 M9207 M9208 OFF Executing the check function ON Check non execution Details e Recovers the setting data stored in the CPU module at restart when sampling trace status latch is executed SM1199 should be ON to execute again Unnecessary when writing the data again from peripheral devices Depends on whether or not the ZNRD word device read instruct
287. oups according to the types of events Error occurrence description MODE LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 2 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 3 Flowchart for when the MODE LED is flickering MODE LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 4 Flowchart for when the POWER LED is turned off POWER LED off Proceed to Section 11 2 5 AAR Flowchart for when the RUN LED is turned off Proceed to Section 11 2 6 ESA When the RUN LED is flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 7 Flowchart for when the ERR LED is on flickering ERR LED on flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 8 When the USER LED is turned on USER LED on Proceed to Section 11 2 9 BAT hes When the BAT LED is turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 10 Flowchart for when the BOOT LED is flickering BOOT LED flickering Proceed to Section 11 2 11 Output module LED not turned on p Flowchart for when output module LED is not turned on Proceed to Section 11 2 12 Flowchart for when output load of output module dose not turn on Proceed to Section 11 2 13 Flowchart for when unable to read a program x Proceed to Section 11 2 14 Unable to write a program i Flowchart for when unable to write a program Unable to perform boot operation e
288. ous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the AnS series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller Build a fail safe circuit exterior to the PLC that will make sure the equipment operates safely at such times See section 9 1 of this manual for example fail safe circuits 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble DESIGN PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the output module for a long time it may cause smoke or
289. ower consumption of overall sequencer system value obtained above A Surface area inside the board U When the ambient temperature inside the board is uniformed by a fan 6 When air inside the board is not circulated ccceeseeeeeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 4 When a rise in ambient temperature inside the board exceeds the specified limit it is recommended that you install a heat exchanger in the board to lower the ambient temperature inside the board If a normal ventilating fan is used dust will be sucked into the PLC together with the external air and it may affect the performance of the PLC 7 Example of calculation of average power consumption a System configuration Q35B Q61P A1 QO02HCPU Qx40 QX40 QY10 QJ71LP21 25 Vacant b 5 VDC current consumption of each module QO2HCPU 0 64 A QX40 0 05 A QY10 0 43 A QJ71LP21 25 0 55 A Q35B 0 074 A c Power consumption of power supply module WPw 3 7 x 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 3 84 W d Power consumption of a total of 5 VDC logic section of each module W5v 0 64 0 05 0 05 0 43 0 55 0 074 x5 8 97 W e A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module Waa 0 W 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q f Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module WOUT 0 W g Average power consumption of the input section of the input module WIN 0 004
290. p transiti watchdog timer start equivalent of D9108 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9109 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9110 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9111 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9112 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9113 Step transition watchdog timer start equivalent of D9114 Active step sampling trace completion flag Active step sampling trace execution flag OFF Watchdog timer reset ON Watchdog timer reset start OFF Trace started ON Trace completed OFF Trace not being executed ON Trace execution under way Active step sampling trace permission OFF Trace disable suspend ON Trace enable Operation output at block stop OFF Coil output OFF ON Coil output ON Switch between blown fuse and VO verification error display y M9103 M9104 M9108 M9109 M9114 M9182 M9196 M9197 M9198 a e VO numbers SM9197 SM1198 to be displayed XN XN XN XN Details Selects consecutive or step by step transfer of steps of which transfer conditions are established when all of the transfer conditions of consecutive steps are established ON Consecutive transfer is executed OFF One step per one scan is transferred OFF during operation in the continuous transition mode or during continuous transition and ON when continuous trans
291. ponding CPU Stores the cumulative execution time of a low speed execution type program into SD544 and SD545 Measurement is made in 100us units SD544 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 SD545 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Cleared to 0 after the end of one low speed scan S Every END processing e Stores the execution time of a low speed execution type program during one scan into SD546 and SD547 Measurement is made in 100us units SD546 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 SD547 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 e Stored every scan S Every END processing e Stores the execution time of a scan execution type program during one scan into SD548 and SD549 Measurement is made in 100 units SD548 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 SD549 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 Stored every scan S Every END processing Sets I O number for module that measures service interval e Stores the service interval for the module specified in SD550 into SD551 and SD552 when SM551 is turned ON Measurement is made in 100s units SD551 Stores the ms place Storage range 0 to 65535 SD552 Stores the us place Storage range 0 to 900 S Request 11 81 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List 5 Memory card Memory card models Corresponding ACPU DT Set by When set Corresponding Mea
292. problem 4212 program 4220 Though an interrupt input occurred the corresponding interrupt pointer does not exist CS 4027 4030 _ Ea mm 4202 _ 4203 Ea Ecm An IRET instruction does not exist in the executed interrupt 422i program 4223 a exists before the FEND instruction of the main Read the common information of the error using the peripheral 4230 The number of CHK and CHKEND Instructions is not equal ee ele valle 4231 The number of IX and IXEND instructions is not equal The configuration of the check conditions for the CHK instruction is incorrect Alternatively a CHK instruction has been used in a low speed execution type program 4300 The designation of a MELSECNET MINI S3 master module control Read the common information of the error using the peripheral instruction was wrong device check error step corresponding to its numerical value 4301 The designation of an AD57 AD58 control instruction was wrong program error location and correct the problem x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 4235 11 34 11 C Q Corres ponding CPU 34 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual LED Status Operating Arse DOA Error Messages Information Information LED Status Staluses of Diagnostic Timing SD5 to 15 1_ SD16 to 26 1 ERROR 4400__ SFCP CODE ERROR Ot Le Stop _ ST
293. ption Depends on whether or not link parameters have been ON No reception received from the master station Depands on the data link condition at the local station Depends on whether or not the local station is executing a forward or a reverse loop test Control is performed depending on whether the master station is in the STOP or PAUSE mode Control is performed depending on whether a local station other than the host is in the STOP or PAUSE mode Depends on whether or not a local station other than the host is in error 11 61 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Relay List 10 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only SM1510 to SM1599 are only valid for redundant systems All off for standalone systems A Set by ACPU Applicable OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not to hold the output value when a SE hed mace ON Hold range over occurs for the S IN instruction range check S New OFF No hold e Specifies whether or not the output value is held when a SM15301 Hold mode ON Hold range over occurs for the S OUT instruction range check g New OFF Redundant system backup mode independent e Turns on when the operating mode is redundant system S N ew system separate Each END ON Redundant system separate mode OFF System A fixed Start mode when mode Turns on when the start mode fora redundant system S power supply is on ON Previous control when the power is turned on is the pre
294. r 32k points Q25HCPU Piret 5 digits of serial number are 02092 or later 128k points Refer to Section 2 3 to confirm the function version and serial number of the High Performance model QCPU 1 OVERVIEW MELSEC Q 9 Data can be written automatically to standard ROM You need not use GX Developer to write parameters programs on a memory card to the standard ROM of the High Performance model QCPU When the standard ROM is used to perform ROM operation you can load a memory card into the High Performance model QCPU and write parameters programs on the memory card to the standard ROM Hence you need not carry GX Developer personal computer to rewrite the parameters programs 10 External I O can be turned ON OFF forcibly If the High Performance model QCPU is in the RUN mode you can operate GX Developer to turn external inputs outputs ON OFF forcibly independently of the program execution status You need not put the High Performance model QCPU in the STOP mode to perform wiring operation tests by forced ON OFF of outputs 11 Remote password can be set When access to an Ethernet module or serial communication module is made externally whether access to the High Performance model QCPU can be made or not can be selected with a remote password 12 Remote I O network of MELSECNET H can be configured You can load the remote master station of the MELSECNET H to configure an MELSECNET H remote I O system e Features 9 t
295. r correction it suggests a hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative The contents of the Ethernet parameter are incorrect Write after correcting parameters function Ver B or later Change the file register file for the one refresh enabled in the whole range QCPU Check the parameter setting Rem i O Check the parameter setting Ram Check the parameter setting ER QCPU function Ver B or later Check the parameter setting Thee Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem Change the file register file for the one which allows refresh in the whole range QCPU Delete the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of another CPU Change the setting to the automatic refresh setting or similar parameter setting of the intelligent function module under control of the host CPU 3400 The head I O number of the target module in the remote password hange the head I O number of the target module to within the OH file is set to other than OH to OFFOH to OFFOH range Position specified as the head I O number of the remote password file is incorrect due to one of the following reasons 1 Module is not loaded 2 Other than a Q compatible intelligent funct
296. r less 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 1 2 Selecting the power supply module The power supply module is selected according to the total of current consumption of the base units I O modules intelligent function module special function module and peripheral devices supplied by its power supply module For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the base unit refer to Chapter 6 For the internal current consumption of 5 VDC of the I O modules intelligent function module special function module and peripheral devices refer to the Manuals of their respective modules For the devices obtained by a user see the manual for the respective device 1 When the base unit is of Q3OB or Q60B Power supply module Base unit Ee GE Q35B Q65B etc Peripheral devices converter CPU module zi cables etc for connection SOCCER GOGHOR Un GtG between CPU module and PC __ VO module QX10 QY10 etc __ Intelligent function module Q64AD QU71LP21 25 etc x1 The CPU module is loaded on the Q3OB main base unit a Selection of power supply module for use of Q52B or Q55B extension base unit Using the Q52B or Q55B supplies 5VDC power from the power supply module of the main base unit through the extension cable Therefore note the following when using the Q52B or Q55B 1 The power supply module to be loaded on the main base unit should be selected to cover also the 5VD
297. r the program to be executed in the parameter Check the specified step No and make a correction Conduct Insert removal after the CPU module has stopped An END instruction was inserted deleted while Other errors he CPU module was running The file capacity was exceeded by theiwrite Write the program after the CPU module has stopped Reexecute after the CPU module is in a status where the mode request can be executed Check whether the model of the used CPU module is correct or not Write the program after setting the CPU module to STOP 40A0H A block No outside the range was specified Check the setting contents and make a correction SFC device A number of blocks that exceeds the range was specification specified error The instruction code that cannot be handled o 4 ja gt 34 4 a le a 5 Sa FA 2 15 on 2 je Qa S 3 2 SC o E O GG gt a 3 2 Z E Di n Cc D au a 2 a GE EN D 8 E i 5 3 2 bi o EI bo fo o T E 5 bd O gt S 3 5 2 a sa c O gt e 5 Check the number of settings and make a correction Check the setting contents and make a correction he wrong drive was specified SFC file related The specified program does not exist error heck the setting contents and make a correction heck the specified file name and make a correction A step No that is outside the range was Check the setting contents and make a correction specifie
298. r to prevent the battery from consuming 19 Batter Backup battery for use of program memory standard RAM and power failure y compensation function 1 1 When normally connecting a cable to the USB connector or RS 232 connector clamp the cable to prevent it from coming off due to the dangling moving or carelessly pulling of the cable Q6HLD R2 type RS 232 Connector Disconnection Prevention Holder is available as a clamp for RS 232 connector CPU module Q6HLD R2 RS 232 cable 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 3 Switch Operation After Writing in Program This section explains the switch operation to be performed after a program is written using GX Developer 1 When program was written with CPU module in STOP status 1 a To setto RUN status with device memory data cleared e Move the RESET L CLR switch to the RESET position once and return it to the original center position e Set the RUN STOP switch to the RUN position e The CPU module is placed in the RUN status RUN LED Turns on b To set to RUN status with device memory data not cleared held e Set the RUN STOP switch to the RUN position e The RUN LED flickers e Set the RUN STOP switch to the STOP position e Set the RUN STOP switch to the RUN position again e The CPU module is placed in the RUN status RUN LED Turns on 2 When a program is written while CPU module is running online change 2 The RUN STOP switch and RES
299. rall extension length of 13 2m 43 31ft 3 When using an extension cable do not bind it together with the main circuit high voltage and heavy current line or do not lay down them closely to each other 4 When setting the No of the expansion stages set it in the ascending order so that the same No is not set simultaneously by two extension base units 5 When Q50B Q6LB and QA1S6LB types of extension base units are mixed first connect the Q50B Q6LB type and then connect the QA1S6LB type When setting the No of the extension stages set it from Q50B Q6LB in order Although there are no particular restrictions in the order of the installation of the Q501B and Q6LB refer to Section 6 6 for usability 6 Connect the extension cable from OUT of the extension cable connector of the base unit to IN of the extension base unit on the next stage 7 If 65 or more modules are installed an error will occur 8 When the GOT is bus connected it occupies one extension stage and one slot 9 The High Performance model QCPU processes the GOT as a 16 point intelligent function module Hence connecting one GOT decreases 16 points available for the base unit 10 Q61SP cannot be used for the power supply module Use Q61P A1 Q61P A2 Q62P Q63P or Q64P for the power supply module 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q b If the slim type main base unit Q30SB is used Slim type main base unit Q35SB 0 1 2 3 4 4
300. ram memory for boot in the parameter so that boot is started after the program memory is cleared Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter number and correct Check the space remaining in the memory card QCPU function Ver B or later Confirm the file register and parameter Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Read the individual information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the program corresponds to the numerical values there program location and correct Check to ensure that the designated file has not been write protected 1 Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter device allocation setting and the program file device allocation correspond to the numerical values there file name and correct if necessary 2 If PLC parameter device setting is changed batch write the parameter and progr
301. rcuit external to the PLC that keeps the entire system safe even when there are problems with the external power supply or the PLC module Otherwise trouble could result from erroneous output or erroneous operation 1 Outside the PLC construct mechanical damage preventing interlock circuits such as emergency stop protective circuits positioning upper and lower limits switches and interlocking forward reverse operations 2 When the PLC detects the following problems it will stop calculation and turn off all output in the case of a In the case of b it will stop calculation and hold or turn off all output according to the parameter setting Note that the A1S series module will turn off the output in either of cases a and b All outputs of AnS Series Module will be switched off in the following cases a The power supply module has over current protection equipment and over voltage protection equipment b The PLC CPUs self diagnosis functions such as the watch dog timer error detect problems In addition all output will be turned on when there are problems that the PLC CPU cannot detect such as in the I O controller 3 Output could be left on or off when there is trouble in the outputs module relay or transistor So build an external monitoring circuit that will monitor any single outputs that could cause serious trouble When overcurrent which exceeds the rating or caused by short circuited load flows in the o
302. rd may be corrupted Hence before resuming operation always format the memories using GX Developer After formatting the memories write the memory contents backed up prior to storage to each memory The following table indicates the relationships between the battery and battery backed memories Battery Q6BAT or Q7BAT of E Battery Built in Memory Card QCPU Module Programmemoy O Le y O CPU module Standard RAM a Standard Standard ROM _ SC backup not needed Memory card paas card Battery backup not needed ATA ATAcard o o Battery backup not needed O Battery backed X Not battery backed Format the battery backed memories in the above table using GX Developer before resuming operation Refer to the GX Developer manual for the memory formatting operation POINTS Before storing the PLC always back up the contents of each memory 10 14 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 TROUBLESHOOTING This section describes the various types of trouble that occur when the system is operated and causes and remedies of these troubles 11 1 Troubleshooting Basics In order to increase the reliability of the system not only highly reliable devices are used but also the speedy startup of the system after the occurrence of trouble becomes an important factor To start up the system speedily the cause of the trouble must be located and eliminated correctly The basic three points that must be followed in the troub
303. re fabricated according to the contents of this manual to the above regulation is not guaranteed Each manufacturer who fabricates such device should make the final judgement about the application method of the Low Voltage Directive and the product compatibility 8 2 1 Standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC The standard applied for MELSEC Q series PLC is EN61010 1 safety of devices used in measurement rooms control rooms or laboratories The MELSEC Q series PLC modules which operate at the rated voltage of 50VAC 75VDC or above are also developed to conform to the above standard The modules which operate at the rated voltage of less than 50VAC 75VDC are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 8 2 2 MELSEC Q series PLC selection 1 Power supply module There are dangerous voltages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the power supply modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary 2 I O module There are dangerous voltages voltages higher than 42 4V peak inside the I O modules of the 100 200VAC rated I O voltages Therefore the CE marked models are enhanced in insulation internally between the primary and secondary The I O modules of 24VDC or less rating are out of the Low Voltage Directive application range 3 CPU module memory card base unit Using 5VDC circuits inside the above modules are out of the Low V
304. ribed below Always observe the items noted as precautions A1S61P A1S62P Not usable A1S63P x1 Use the CE marked 24VDC panel power equipment Always ground the LG and FG terminals after short circuiting them x1 If sufficient filter circuitry is built into the 24VDC external power supply module the noise generated by A1S63P will be absorbed by that filter circuit so a line filter may not be required Filtering circuitry of version F or later of A1S63P is improved so that a external line filter is not required 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE 8 1 6 Others 1 MELSEC Q Ferrite core A ferrite core has the effect of reducing radiated noise in the 30MHz to 100MHz band It is not required to fit ferrite cores to cables but it is recommended to fit ferrite cores if shield cables pulled out of the enclosure do not provide sufficient shielding effects It should be noted that the ferrite cores should be fitted to the cables in the position immediately before they are pulled out of the enclosure If the fitting position is improper the ferrite will not produce any effect In the CC Link system however ferrite cores cannot be fitted to cables Noise filter power supply line filter A noise filter is a component which has an effect on conducted noise It is not required to fit the noise filter to the power supply line but fitting it can further suppress noise The noise filter has the effect of reducing conduc
305. rmatting procedure refer to the Operating Manual of the GX Developer POINTS Do not format ATA card using other than GX Developer If it is formatted using format function of Windows the ATA card may not be usable ith set ina CPU module 2 Installation of SRAM card battery A power interrupt hold on battery is furnished with the SRAM card you purchased Before using the SRAM card install the battery POINTS Even if the battery is installed on the CPU module if a battery is not installed on the SRAM card the memory of the SRAM card will not be backed up Ensure to install the battery on the SRAM card Also if the battery is installed on the SRAM card but the CPU module has no battery the program memory standard RAM and latch devices of the CPU module are not backed up Similarly ensure to install the battery on the CPU module 3 Kind of file which can be stored on memory card Please refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals of section 6 1 for the kind of the file which can be stored on each memory card 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 4 The Names of The Parts of The Memory Card The names of the parts of the memory card are described below Descriptions Connector area connected to the CPU module Used to set the lithium battery for data backup of the SRAM memory SRAM card only Switch for fixing the battery holder to the memory car
306. ry card and then set the parameter s valid drive in the standard ROM with the CPU module s dip switches e Standard ROM SW2 ON SW3 ON c The parameters and programs will be booted from the standard ROM to the program memory when the PLC is switched on to enable actual operations 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE 5 1 Specification 5 1 1 Power supply module specifications This section gives the specifications of the power supply modules item 10 10 10 30 VE 100 to 120VAC eet 200 to 240VAC mo 100 to 240VAC so 24VDC es 85 to 132VAC 170 to 264VAC 85 to 264VAC 15 6 to 31 2VDC Input frequency Le DUR E HH S S gt o Within 5 refer to section 5 1 3 BE Max input apparent power OVA Max inputpower Pe Rated output current avoe AC External outputvotage a 00 Overcurrent 6 6A or more 3 3A or more 6 6A or more protectione1 aan EA rmore TCT Overvoltage 5VDC 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 65 or more Allowable momentary power failure Lt Within 10ms 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft primary and 5VDC Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across inputs and 10MQ or more by LG FG across outputs and FG LG 10MQ or more by insulation insulation resistance resistance tester tester By noise simulator of e By noise simulator of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 500Vp p noise voltage Noise durability to 60Hz noise frequency 1 us noise width
307. s hereinafter Failure found to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi occurs during use of the product within the gratis warranty term the product shall be repaired at no cost via the dealer or Mitsubishi Service Company Note that if repairs are required at a site overseas on a detached island or remote place expenses to dispatch an engineer shall be charged for Gratis Warranty Term The gratis warranty term of the product shall be for one year after the date of purchase or delivery to a designated place Note that after manufacture and shipment from Mitsubishi the maximum distribution period shall be six 6 months and the longest gratis warranty term after manufacturing shall be eighteen 18 months The gratis warranty term of repair parts shall not exceed the gratis warranty term before repairs Gratis Warranty Range 1 The range shall be limited to normal use within the usage status usage methods and usage environment etc which follow the conditions and precautions etc given in the instruction manual user s manual and caution labels on the product 2 Even within the gratis warranty term repairs shall be charged for in the following cases 1 Failure occurring from inappropriate storage or handling carelessness or negligence by the user Failure caused by the user s hardware or software design 2 Failure caused by unapproved modifications etc to the product by the user 3 When the Mitsubishi product is assembled into a u
308. s 0 72years shr control number OWA 5 11784hr 13872hr 2 es d e Ee 5 2400hr 23660hr R 2880hr 31540hr T OB 0 49years 4 5years 10 7 10 7 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION 10 8 MELSEC Q b CPU module whose serial number s first 5 digits are 04011 or earlier Battery life Energization SRAM card Time Ratio Guaranteed value Value in actual use ei MIN TYP After SM52 is energized Guaranteed time after alarm occurrence Q2MEM 1MBS 690hr 6336hr Manufacturing 0 0 07years 0 72years control number y y OOA po RK B 100 11784hr 13872hr Q2MEM 2MBS j 1 34years 1 58years 1 The power on time ratio indicates the ratio of PLC power on time to one day 24 hours When the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 x2 The manufacturing management number is given on the SRAM card rear label see below FRR EOE BSE CAUTION RUT AyD EAR Do not subject to mechanical shock mim BSA KICSGSiILCLNC E Do not expose to extreme temperrature Manufacturing control number Remember that the SRAM card consumes battery power even when the battery is connected to the CPU module and the power is turned ON When the battery low special relay SM52 turns on immediately change the battery If an alarm has not yet occurred it is recommended to replace the battery periodically according to the condit
309. s error _ K Sai D1602 arene Diagnosis error le Stores each of the BCD two digits occurrence time Ve Refer to SD1 to SD3 for the storage status time D4609 SD1 SD1601 SD2 gt SD1602 SD3 gt SD1603 Error Error e Stores the error comment information individual information SE Each D1604 Information information classification code New classification _ classification e Refer to SD4 for the storage status END D1605 D1606 e Stores the common information for the error code e Refer to SD5 to SD15 for the storage status Error common Error common SD5 gt SD1605 SD6 gt SD1606 SD7 gt SD1607 S Each information information SD8 SD1608 SD9 gt SD1609 SD10 SD1610 END SD11 SD1611 SD12 gt SD1612 SD13 SD1613 Diagnosis error D1600 Diagnosis error No SEE REEL D1612 SD14 gt SD1614 SD15 gt SD1615 D1613 D1614 D1615 Stores the individual information for the error code Refer to SD16 to SD26 for the storage status Error individual Error individual SD16 SD1616 SD17 gt SD1617 SD18 SD1618 information information D19 SD1619 SD20 SD1620 SD21 SD1621 SD22 gt SD1622 SD23 SD1623 SD24 SD1624 SD25 gt SD1625 SD26 SD1626 D1625 D1626 D1650 Switch status CPU module e Stores the CPU module switch status S Each New switch status e Refer to SD200 for the storage status SD1650 SD200 END e Stores the CPU module s LED status CPU module Ve Shows 0 when
310. s resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the No 3 CPU is canceled Comes ON when the No 3 CPU is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when reset of the No 4 CPU is canceled Comes ON when the No 4 CPU is resetting including the case where the PLC is removed from the base The other PLCs result in MULTI CPU DOWN error code 7000 Goes OFF when the No 1 CPU is normal including a continuation error e Comes ON when the No 1 CPU is during a stop error S Status change QCPU function Ver B 11 46 11 TROUBLESHOOTING Special Relay List Continued ree OFF No 2 CPU normal ON No 2 CPU during stop error OFF No 3 CPU normal ON No 3 CPU during stop error OFF No 4 CPU normal ON No 4 CPU during stop error No 2 CPU error No 4 CPU error Goes OFF when the No 2 CPU is normal including a continuation error Comes ON when the No 2 CPU is during a stop error Goes OFF when the No 3 CPU is normal including a continuation error e Comes ON when the No 3 CPU is during a stop error Goes OFF when the No 4 CPU is normal including a continuation error e Comes ON when the No 4 CPU is during a stop error MELSEC Q When Set S Status
311. s that products placed on the market must be so constructed that they do not cause excessive electromagnetic interference emissions and are not unduly affected by electromagnetic interference immunity The applicable products are requested to meet these requirements The sections 8 1 1 through 8 1 6 summarize the precautions on conformance to the EMC Directive of the machinery constructed using the MELSEC Q series PLCs The details of these precautions has been prepared based on the control requirements and the applicable standards control However we will not assure that the overall machinery manufactured according to these details conforms to the above mentioned directives The method of conformance to the EMC Directive and the judgment on whether or not the machinery conforms to the EMC Directive must be determined finally by the manufacturer of the machinery 8 1 1 Standards applicable to the EMC Directive The standards applicable to the EMC Directive are listed below 30 M 230 MHz QP 30 dB u V m EN55011 Electromagnetic emissions from the 30 m in measurement range 1 Radiated noise 2 product are measured 230 M 1000 MHz QP 37 dB u V m 30 m in measurement range EN55011 ae ett americas from the 150 k 500 kHz Op 79 dB Mean 66 dB 1 Conducted noise P P 500 k 30 MHz QP 73 dB Mean 60 dB measured Immunity test in which static Ee electricity is applied to the cabinet of 15 k V Aerial discharge Electrostatic immunit
312. s to 65535 s 1 to 65535 1s 10 s If 0 has been set default 10 s is applied For details refer to the manual of each microcomputer program package Detailed error Self diagnosis d g Stores the detail code of cause of an instruction error code detailed error code Stores the first two digits of the head I O number of the I O module which will be dismounted mounted online in BIN value Example Input module X2F0 H2F The DIP switch information of the CPU module is stored in the following format 0 OFF 1 ON b15 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b D9095 e Output module numbers in units of 16 points of which fuses have blown are entered in bit pattern Preset output unit numbers when parameter setting has been performed b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 b SD1100 0 Olt lolojoltyofojojo vco v80 D1101 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D1107 0 HHG DN e fuse blow e Fuse blow check is executed also to module of remote I O station If normal status is restored clear is not performed Therefore it is required to perform clear by user program he output Set the set value of the step transition watchdog timer and the annunciator number F number that will turn on when the watchdog timer times out b15 to b8b7 to b Timer setting 1 to 255 s in seconds F number setting By turning on any of MSM708 to SM1114 th
313. s used ZR 517120 points ZRO to 517119 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary e When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used 1041408 points ZRO to 1041407 No block conversion necessary e When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used 1042432 points ZRO to 1042431 No block conversion necessary Number of use points Ka 2 Q CO o 2 gt bail ze 2 O oO Q E Z 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued Item Lt MEN Remark ww QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Qi2HCPU Q25HCPU Link special relay SB 2048 points SBO to 7FF Link special register SW 2048 points SWO to 7FF Step relay S 6 8192 points SO to 8191 Index register Z 16 points Z0 to 15 Pointer P 4096 points PO to 4095 set parameter values to select usable range ointer of in file pointer shared pointers E The number of device Int pointer i The specified intervals of the system interrupt pointers 128 to 131 can Get fixed nterrupt pointer 3 ER be set with parameters 0 5 to 1000ms 0 5 ms unit Default 128 100ms 129 40ms 130 20ms_ 131 10ms Special relay SM 2048 points SMO to 2047 Special register SD 2048 points SDO to 2047 Function input FX 16 points FXO to F 7 Function output FY 16 points FYO to F 7 Function register FD 5 points FDO to 4 Number of
314. se unit Module connector Install the module onto the Module base unit by pushing the FE yP 9 fixing hole top forward Module fixing projections Make sure that the module is firmly inserted in the base unit Then secure it with the module mounting screw Completion Module mounting screw Base unit te Module Make sure to install the module with the module fixing projection inserted into the module fixing hole using the module fixing screws Do not try to forcibly install the module without inserting the projection into the hole since this may damage the module connector and the module 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION 2 S 2 MELSEC Q b Removal from QA1S60B Remove the module mounting screw and using the bottom Base unit of the module as a support L pull the top of the module Module connector Module 4 toward you Module fixing hole d Lift the module upwards and remove the module fixing projections from the module fixing hole Completion gt POINT To remove the module make sure to remove the module fixing screws and then disengage the module fixing projection from the module fixing hole Do not try to remove the module forcibly since this may damage the module fixing projection 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 4 How to Set Stage Numbers for the Extension Base Unit When u
315. ser s device Failure that could have been avoided if functions or structures judged as necessary in the legal safety measures the user s device is subject to or as necessary by industry standards had been provided 4 Failure that could have been avoided if consumable parts battery backlight fuse etc designated in the instruction manual had been correctly serviced or replaced 5 Failure caused by external irresistible forces such as fires or abnormal voltages and Failure caused by force majeure such as earthquakes lightning wind and water damage 6 Failure caused by reasons unpredictable by scientific technology standards at time of shipment from Mitsubishi 7 Any other failure found not to be the responsibility of Mitsubishi or the user 2 Onerous repair term after discontinuation of production 1 Mitsubishi shall accept onerous product repairs for seven 7 years after production of the product is discontinued Discontinuation of production shall be notified with Mitsubishi Technical Bulletins etc 2 Product supply including repair parts is not possible after production is discontinued 3 Overseas service Overseas repairs shall be accepted by Mitsubishi s local overseas FA Center Note that the repair conditions at each FA Center may differ 4 Exclusion of chance loss and secondary loss from warranty liability Regardless of the gratis warranty term Mitsubishi shall not be liable for compensation to damages caused by
316. sing two or more extension base units their stage numbers must be set with their stage number setting connectors Extension 1 need not be set since the extension number is factory set to 1 Make this setting in the following procedure 1 The stage number setting connector of the extension base unit is located under the IN side base cover Refer to Section 6 4 for the setting of the extension number setting connector First loosen the upper and lower screws in the IN side base cover and remove the base cover from the extension base unit 2 Insert the connector pin in the required stage number location of the connector PIN1 existing between the IN and OUT sides of the extension cable connector 3 Install the base cover to the extension base unit and tighten the base cover screw Tightening torque 36 to 48N cm 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 5 Connection and Disconnection of Extension Cable 1 Instructions for handling an extension cable e Do not stamp an extension cable e An extension cable must be connected to the base unit when the base cover has been installed After you have set the extension number to the extension base unit reinstall and screw the base cover e When running an extension cable the minimum bending radius of the cable should be 55mm 2 17 inch or more If itis less than 55mm 2 17 inch a malfunction may occur due to characteristic deter
317. t A1SJ71J92 S3 Total of 6 units When GET PUT service is used Interrupt module i Se One unit only 1 A maximum of 4 modules if the network parameters for CC Link are set and controlled by the GX Developer There is no restriction in the number of modules when the parameters are set by the special purpose instructions for the CC Link For details on the CC Link System Master Local Unit that can set parameters with the special purpose instructions refer to the user s manual for the CC Link Master Local module b When the AnS series special function modules shown below are used a limitation is given to an accessible device range e A1SJ71J92 S3 type JEMANET interface module e A1SD51S type intelligent communication Accessible device range Input X Output Y X Y0 to 7FF Internal relay M SE relay L MO to 8191 Link relay B BO to FFF Timer Tt 2047 CO to 1023 DO to 6143 Link register W WO to FFF Annunciator F FO to 2047 c A graphic operation terminal can be used only for the GOT900 series Basic OS matching Q mode and communication driver must be installed The GOT800 series A77GOT and A64GOT cannot be used 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION FOR SINGLE CPU SYSTEM MELSEC Q d The modules shown below cannot be used Module Name MELSECNET 10 network A1SJ71LP21 A1SJ71BR11 A1SJ71QLP21 module A1SJ71QLP21S A1SJ71QLP21GE A1SJ71QBR11 MELSECNET Il B data link A1SJ71AP21 A1SJ71AR21 A1SJ71AT21B module
318. t Power supply Input module e Drive by a limit switch with neon lamp AC input Leakage Power supply e Leakage current due to line capacity of wiring cable Line capacity C of twisted pair wire is approx 100 pF m AC input Leakage Es Input module Power supply e Drive by switch with LED indicator DC input plus common Leakage curent Input module Connect an appropriate resistor which will make the voltage across the terminals of the input module lower than the OFF voltage AC input Input module It is recommended to use 0 1 to 47 UF 47 to 120Q 1 2W for the CR constant e Same as Example 1 e Or make up another independent display circuit e Same as Example 1 e However leakage current is not generated when the power supply is located in the input equipment side as shown below AC input Input module _ Power supply e Connect a register which will make the voltage between the input module terminal and common lower than the OFF voltage as shown below DC input plus common Resistor E Input module A calculation example of a value for a connected resistor is given on the following page 11 40 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Input Circuit Problems and Corrective Actions Continued Condition Cause Corrective Action e Sneak path due to the use of two power e Use only one power supply supplies Connect a sneak path prevention dio
319. t is not handled was executed Command for which a global request cannot be 9 q Check the requested command performed was executed CPU module cannot execute the request contents because it is in system protect The volume of data handled according to the Reduce the volume of data to that which can be specified request is too large processed at the specified request Check the requested remote operation Turn off the CPU module system protect switch The password cannot be deleted Delete the set password The CPU module is BUSY A After the free time has passed reexecute the request The buffer is not vacant The CPU module is running to the request contents cannot be executed The CPU module is not in the STEP RUN status so the request contents cannot be executed Sincs the GPU Module is Noti a STOF status Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status the request contents cannot be executed The specified drive memory does not exist or there is an error The file with the specified file name or file No does not exist The file name and file No of the specified file do Execute after setting the CPU module to STOP status Execute after setting the CPU module to STEP RUN status Check the specified drive memory status Check the specified file name and file No Delete the file and then recreate the file he specified file cannot be handled by a user Do not access the specified file Forcefully execute the
320. t of self SM1008 error ON Error diagnosis T F instruction is e Turned on when O executed e Switched off when SD1124 data is zeroed e Turned on when operation error occurs during execution of application instruction e Remains ON if the condition is restored to normal thereafter SM1012 SM700 Carry flag Get Se GR Carry flag used in application instruction Clears the data memory including the latch range other than special relays and special registers in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1016 is on Clears the unlatched data memory other than special relays and special egisters in remote run mode from computer etc when SM1017 is on Relay which repeats on off at intervals of predetermined scan e When power is turned on or reset is per formed the clock starts with off Set the intervals of on off by DUTY instruction H e Writes clock data from SD1025 to SD1028 to the clock element after the END instruction is executed during the scan in which SM1025 has changed from off to on M9026 SM1026 a Clock data error ple at Switched on by clock data SD1025 to SD1028 error M9027 _ SM1027 Ls M9029 SM1029 K M9030 SM1030 foresee seconds 0 05 1 f seconds 005 __ T econds M9031 SM1031 M9032 SM1032 M9033 SM1033 Ce Clock data display OFF Ignored ON Display Batch processing OFF Batch processing not of data co
321. t pose problems to the output components but may deteriorate the diode built in the load causing burnout etc e Leakage current due to the built in surge e Connect a resistor across the load suppressor If the wiring from the output module to the QY22 load is long be careful since there may be a Load does Output module leakage current due to the line capacity not turn off Resistor Triac teak output eakage curren Example 1 Example 2 11 43 11 43 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 6 Special Relay List 11 44 Special relays SM are internal relays whose applications are fixed in the PLC For this reason they cannot be used by sequence programs in the same way as the normal internal relays However they can be turned ON or OFF as needed in order to control the CPU module and remote I O modules The headings in the table that follows have the following meanings e Indicates whether the relay is set by the system or user and if it is set by the system when setting is performed lt Set by gt S Set by system U Set by user in sequence program or test operation at a GX Developer S U Set by both system and user lt When set gt gt indicated only if setting is done by system Each END Set during each END processing Initial Set only during initial processing when power supply is turned ON or when going from STOP to RUN Status change Set only when there is a change in status Err
322. tation turns to 1 ON e When either Xn1 or XnF of the mounted CC Link module turns OFF the bit of the corresponding station turns to 1 ON e Turns to 1 ON when communication between the mounted CC Link module and CPU module cannot be made New QnA b15 to b9 b8 to bO 8th jett 1st module module module module 4 ka Sg gt Information of Information of Q Stores the number of points currently set for X devices e Stores the number of points currently set for Y devices O Rem e Stores the number of points currently set for M devices i e Stores the number of points currently set for L devices E allocated for L Number of points e Stores the number of points currently set for B devices O Rem allocated for B Number of Device i Stores the number of points currently set for F devices allocation Same as S Initial New parameter Stores the number of points currently set for SB devices O Rem contents i e Stores the number of points currently set for V devices i Stores the number of points currently set for S devices i e Stores the number of points currently set for T device d e Stores the number of points currently set for ST devices i Stores the number of points currently set for C devices located for C 11 77 11 77 n 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Corresponding Set D Correspondin
323. te 256kbyte 256kbyte lcpUsharedmemoy x lz Io Io o Extended life battery SRAMcard x LI LI o Compatibility with 2MbytesRAMcard o o o o Available x N A APPENDIX 3 2 Function comparison Serial No of CPU Module Function Version A Function Version B 02091 02092 03051 04012 04122 05032 Added Function or earlier or later or later orlater orlater or later Automatic write to standard ROM x o EE xe a ee Enforced ON OFF forextenalVO x 12 OU UL OU Oo Ol CT CO Remote passwordseting ss x OO UT Oh UT Oh UT OU CG eege ES EES ES ESESES I O network Interrupt module Ql60 compatibility 1 x o o Oo oO Oo o Compatibility with the multiple CPU system x x o o o Ee HO peeve I EE EE multiple CPU system High steet reng zs x UT x UT x UT ood of o x High speed interrupt x Compatibility with index modification for module designation of dedicated instruction Available x N A For function details refer to the High Performance model QCPU Q mode User s Manual Function Explanation Program Fundamentals App 15 App 15 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 3 3 Added functions and the corresponding GX Developer versions GX Developer SW4D5C GPPW E SE Function SW5D5C GPPW E Version6 Version 7 n deg Version 8 Ne Automatic write to standard Automatic write to standard ROM External I O can be turned EE EEN Remote R
324. te The software version of the initial system may differ from the version indicated by the version information printed on the rear of the case In the self loopback test of the serial communication module the serial communication module writes reads data automatically to make communication checks Higher byte Lower byte Stores the number of empty blocks in the communication request registration area to the remote terminal module connected to the MELSECNET MINI S3 master unit A2CCPU or A52GCPU 11 92 11 ACPU Special Conversion TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Special Register List Continued Special Register after Conversion SD1085 PS ee Number of Number of special D1090 special functions functions modules e modules ouer Loyer SD1091 ea module to be D1094 SD251 replaced DIP switch SD1095 SD200 Ee information D1100 D1101 Special Register for Modification Meaning Register for setting time check value Default value 10s Head I O number of VO O module to be replaced DIP switch information Bit pattern in units of 16 points indicating the modules whose fuses have blown Fuse blown module Step transfer Timer setting valve monitoring timer and the f number at setting time out 11 93 Head I O number of Corresponding Detail etails CPU Sets the time check time of the data link instructions ZNRD ZNWR for the MELSECNET 10 1
325. ted noise of 10 MHz or less The precautions required when installing a noise filter are described below a Do not bundle the wires on the input side and output side of the noise filter When bundled the output side noise will be induced into the input side wires from which the noise was filtered Input side Input side power supply side power supply side Introduction Filter Filter Output side Output side device side aks device side 1 The noise will be included when the 2 Separate and lay the input input and output wires are bundled and output wires b Earth the noise filter earthing terminal to the control cabinet with the shortest wire possible approx 10 cm 3 94 inch Reference Noise Filter FN343 3 01 FN660 6 06 ZHC2203 1 1 Model Name SCHAFFNER SCHAFFNER Rated current Rated voltage 250 V 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 2 Requirement to Conform to the Low Voltage Directive The Low Voltage Directive requires each device that operates with the power supply ranging from 50 to 1000VAC and 75 to 1500VDC to satisfy the safety requirements In Sections 8 2 1 to 8 2 6 cautions on installation and wiring of the MELSEC Q series PLC to conform to the Low Voltage Directive are described We have put the maximum effort to develop this material based on the requirements and standards of the regulation that we have collected However compatibility of the devices which a
326. tem This error code is not an error that is detected by the CPU module self diagnosis function so it is not stored in the special relay SD0 When the request origin is a GX Developer a message or an error code is displayed When the request origin is an intelligent function module or network system an error is returned to the process that was requested APPENDIX 1 1 Error code overall explanation These error codes differs depending on the error No of the location the error was detected The following table shows the relationship between the error detection location and the error code Error detection location Eror Coue Error description reference destination hexadecimal CPU module 4000H to 4FFFH Refer to Appendix 1 2 Intelligent function 70004 to 7FFFH User s manuals of intelligent function module module Q Corresponding MELSECNET H Network System Network system FOOOH to FFFFH Reference Manual App 1 App 1 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDIX 1 2 Description of the errors of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH The error contents of the error codes 4000H to 4FFFH detected by the CPU module and the messages displayed by the GX Developer are shown below Error code Error dh f Error description Countermeasure hexadecimal item 4011H App 2 CPU mode error CPU file related error Check the connection status of the connection cable Sum check error with the CPU module Remote request tha
327. ter installation check them for looseness Poor connections could cause an input or output failure Securely load the memory card into the memory card loading connector After loading check for lifting Lifting can cause a malfunction due to a contact fault Completely turn off the external power supply before loading or unloading the module Not doing so could result in electric shock or damage to the product Do not directly touch the module s conductive parts or electronic components Touching the conductive parts could cause an operation failure or give damage to the module WIRING PRECAUTIONS lt DANGER Completely turn off the external power supply when installing or placing wiring Not completely turning off all power could result in electric shock or damage to the product When turning on the power supply or operating the module after installation or wiring work be sure that the module s terminal covers are correctly attached Not attaching the terminal cover could result in electric shock WIRING PRECAUTIONS CAUTION Be sure to ground the FG terminals and LG terminals to the protective ground conductor Not doing so could result in electric shock or erroneous operation When wiring in the PLC be sure that it is done correctly by checking the product s rated voltage and the terminal layout Connecting a power supply that is different from the rating or incorrectly wiring the product could result
328. ters cannot The SFC program file is one that cannot be designated by the sequence program There are no program files at all Two or more SFC normal programs or control programs have been designated MELSEC Q Corres Error Contents and Cause Corrective Action ponding PU Check and correct the setting of the parameter enabled drive switch Put a boot file in the drive designated by the parameter enabled drive switch Remove memory card after placing the memory card in out switch OFF Turn on the card insert switch after inserting a memory card Format memory card Reformat memory card Check memory card Execute automatic write to standard ROM on the CPU module which is compatible with automatic write to standard ROM Using GX Developer perform write of parameters and programs to standard ROM Change the memory card for the one where automatic write to standard ROM has not been set and perform boot operation from the memory card Read the individual information of the error using peripheral device check to be sure that the parameter drive name and file name correspond to the numerical values there parameter number and correct Create a file created using parameters and load it to the CPU module Change to QnACPU with the function version B Delete the Ethernet parameter heck and correct the parameters boot setting e Delete unnecessary files in the program memory e Choose Clear prog
329. the example shown above 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 2 Calculating Heat Generation by PLC The ambient temperature inside the board storing the PLC must be suppressed to a PLC usable ambient temperature of 55 C For the design of radiation from the storing board it is necessary to know the average power consumption heating value of the devices and instruments stored in the board Here the method of obtaining the average power consumption of the PLC system is described From the power consumption calculate a rise in ambient temperature inside the board How to calculate average power consumption The power consuming parts of the PLC are roughly classified into six blocks as shown below 1 Power consumption of power supply module The power conversion efficiency of the power supply module is approx 70 i e 30 of the output power is consumed by heating As a result 3 7 of the output power becomes the power consumption Therefore the calculation formula is as follows Wpw ER W I5v Current consumption of logic 5 VDC circuit of each module 2 Total power consumption of 5VDC logic section by all modules including CPU module The power consumption of the 5 VDC output circuit section of the power supply module is the power consumption of each module including the current consumption of the base unit Way I5v x 5 W For the power consumption of the motion CPU and PC CPU module refer to the ins
330. time when status latch was conducted SD812 SD813 SD814 SD815 SD816 Patterm x Block number Step No Transition condition No Sequence step No L Sequence step No H D9055 format change S During execution Status latch step Status latch step x Contents of pattern data 1514 to 4 3 2 1 0 Bit number ojo to o oj KE Not in use I SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC block designation present 1 absent 0 SFC transition designation present 1 absent 0 11 86 11 86 11 TROUBLESHOOTING 8 Latch area Name Meaning SD901 SD902 SD901 File name Access file Soe active during name during SD904 power loss power loss 90 SD905 SD905 SD906 SD906 g D911 Kalt Se SD910 Sa sp911 SD912 D914 SD913 D915 SD914 D916 SD915 D917 2 g SD916 RKEY input RKEY input SD917 par SD918 D919 SD919 D920 SD920 D921 SD921 D922 SD922 Ge SD923 SD924 SD925 NIN Jaja S S S njo Kalt D924 D925 n 11 87 Special Register List Explanation Access file Drive where 8 drive number T de i SD900 power was e Stores drive number file was being accessed during power loss y during power interrupted lose Stores file name with extension in ASCII code if file was being accessed during power loss b15 to b8 b7 to DU 2nd character 1st character 4th character 3rd ch
331. tion of the error using the peripheral device range check error step corresponding to its numerical value program Block number designations overlap in SFC program error location and correct the problem Read common information of the error using the peripheral device 4422 Step number designations overlap in SFC program check error step corresponding to its numerical value program error location and correct the problem are not equal instructions in the SFC program is incorrect Read common information of the error using the peripheral device 4502 There was no STEPI instruction in SFC program block check error step corresponding to its numerical value program The step designated by the TSET instruction in the SFC program error location and correct the problem 4503 does not exist 4504 The step designated by the TAND instruction in the SFC program does not exist 4600 The SFC program contains data that cannot be processed R i 2 z gt ead common information of the error using the peripheral device 4601 Exceeds device range that can be designated by the SFC program check error step corresponding to its numerical value program 4602 re Set instruction in an SFC program is preceded by an END Leo location and correct the problem The active step information at presumptive start of an SFC program Read common information of the error using the peripheral device is incorrect check error step corresponding to its numer
332. tion the ground contact point as closely to the sequencer as possible and reduce the length of the grounding cable as much as possible 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 9 6 2 Connecting to the power supply module The following diagram shows the wiring example of power lines grounding lines etc to the main and extension base units Main base unit as 100 110VAC 388 AC HIE Jee Q61P A1 CPU module Xx Fuse V x r IK SC ERR in S LC 24VDC Grp 4O fc k bb RER 1 abd beso okt Heit INPUT 1 HIT lO 100 120VAC vy LV Connect to 24VDC terminals V of UO module that H requires 24VDC internally D Extension base unit V Q68B Extension cable H Q61P A1 uo O Q Sail A of ERR x1 O 100VAC Qf re ie a Can copocopoo JO S 100 120VAC usd wire LL SL Grounding POINTS 1 Use the thickest possible max 2 mm 14 AWG wires for the 100 200 VAC and 24 VDC power cables Be sure to twist these wires starting at the connection terminals To prevent a short circuit should any screws loosen use solderless terminals with insulation sleeves 2 When the LG terminals and FG terminals are connected be sure to ground the wires Do not connect the LG terminals and FG terminals to anything other than ground If LG terminals and FG terminals are connected without grounding the wires the PLC may be susceptible to noise In addition
333. to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Comer e Normal counter default 1024 points CO to 1023 Counter C Interrupt counter maximum 256 points default 0 point set with parameters e When a standard RAM is used 32768 points RO to 32767 The number of points of up to 65536 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 Q12HCPU Q25HCPU The number of points of up to 131072 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 517120 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a SRAM card 2Mbyte is used The number of points of up to 1041408 points can be used by block conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 e When a Flash card 2Mbyte is used When a Flash card is The number of points of up to 1041408 points can be used by block used read only is conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 File register When a Flash card 4Mbyte is used possible The number of points of up to 1042432 points can be used by block The ATA card cannot conversion in increments of 32768 points RO to 32767 GEN e When a standard RAM is used 32768 points ZRO to 32767 65536 points ZRO to 65535 No block conversion necessary Q12HCPU Q25HCPU 131072 points ZRO to 131071 No block conversion necessary e When a SRAM card 1Mbyte i
334. to 5 6 10 6 10 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q When connecting GOT by extension cable that is 13 2 m 43 31ft or longer the bus extension connector box A9GT QCNB is required Since the A9GT QCNB is supplied with 5VDC from the power supply module loaded on the main base unit 29mA must be added to Im as the current consumption of the A9GT QCNB For details of the GOT bus connection refer to the GOT A900 Series User s Manual Connection 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY MELSEC Q 7 MEMORY CARD AND BATTERY This section describes the specifications and handling of the memory card and battery which can be used on the High Performance model QCPU The memory card is necessary for sampling tracing The memory card is also used to handle file registers of more than the number of points that can be stored in the standard RAM Refer to Section 4 1 7 1 Memory Card Specifications The specifications of the memory card which can be used on the High Performance model QCPU adheres to the PCMCIA small PC card On the High Performance model QCPU only one memory card can be installed 1 SRAM card A TI ee ee Memory capacity after format 1011 5 kbyte 2034 kbyte Storable number of files al 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch I bD 3 3mm 0 13inch 15g 2 Flash card Storable numberoffles e H 45mm 1 77inch External dimensions 42 8mm 1 69inch 3 3mm 0 13inch 3 A
335. tor of 1500Vp p noise voltage 1 us noise width and 25 to 60Hz noise Noise durability frequency e Noise voltage IEC61000 4 4 2kV Operation indication LED indication lit at 5VDC output Built in Unchangeable by user Apbiication ERR contact contact switched off opened normally closed contact at an error stop of CPU pP module for CPU module operating status output Rated switching voltage 24VDC 0 5A current Se Minimum switching load 5VDC 1mA outpu p OFF to ON 10ms max ON to OFF 12ms max section Life Mechanical More than 20 million times Electrical More than 100 thousand times at rated switching voltage current No Applicable tightening torque 66 to 89Necm 98mm 3 86inch External 7 EAE 55 2mm 2 33inch dimensions Ip 115mm 4 53inch 0 40kg Applicable solderless terminal RAV1 25 to 3 5 RAV2 to 3 5 5 POWER SUPPLY MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications Item Q61SP Base loading position Slim type power supply module loading slot Applicable base unit Q30SB 10 100 to 240VAC Input power supply 15 85 to 264VAC Within 5 refer to section 4 3 1 Rated output 2A current 24VDC Overcurrent 2 2A or more protection 1 Overvoltage 5 5 to 6 5V protection 2 24VDC Efficiency PO or mee SES or more fail E EE Within 20ms AC100VAC or more perio Across inputs LG and outputs FG 2830VAC rms 3 cycles 2000 m 6562 ft Across inputs and outputs LG and FG separated across
336. truction manuals of the corresponding modules 3 A total of 24 VDC average power consumption of the output module power consumption for simultaneous ON points The average power of the external 24 VDC power is the total power consumption of each module Way 124V X 24 W 4 Average power consumption due to voltage drop in the output section of the output module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WOUT IOUT x Vdrop x Number of outputs x Simultaneous ON rate W loUT Output current Current in actual use A Vdrop Voltage drop in each output module V 5 Average power consumption of the input section of the input module Power consumption for simultaneous ON points WIN IIN xX E X Number of input points x Simultaneous ON rate W JIN Input current Effective value for AC A E Input voltage Voltage in actual use V 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q 6 Power consumption of the power supply section of the intelligent function module WS I5V x 5 l24v x 24 l100v x 100 W The total of the power consumption values calculated for each block becomes the power consumption of the overall sequencer system W Wew W5v W24V WOUT WIN Ws W From this overall power consumption W calculate the heating value and a rise in ambient temperature inside the board The outline of the calculation formula for a rise in ambient temperature inside the board is shown below W OJ T W P
337. turned off 1 when turned on and 2 when S Each D1651 LED N E staus LED status flicking END Si e Refer to SD201 for the storage status SD1651 SD201 CPU module op ration i CPU module e Stores the CPU module operation status Refer to SD203 for S Each New pea operation status the storage status SD1653 gt SD203 END 1 Stores other system CPU module self diagnosis information and system information 2 Shows the special register SD _ _ for the host system CPU module JJJ J JaJa janja Katz el n DH 15 For redundant systems Trucking for Q4AR only D1700 to SD1799 is valid only for redundant systems These are all 0 for standalone systems Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation ere ACPU Bee sp 2 SD1700 Trucking emor trucking Aror Ih Make it the trucking error detection 1 Error New Q4AR detection count detection count occurrence 2 Shows the special register SD _ _ for the host system CPU 11 101 11 101 APPENDICES MELSEC Q APPENDICES APPENDIX 1 Error Code Return to Origin During General Data Processing The CPU module returns an error code to the general data processing request origin when an error occurs and there is a general data processing request form the peripheral equipment intelligent function module or network system If an error occurs App when a general data processing is requested from the peripheral devices intelligent function module and network sys
338. ty of the Q12HCPU or Q25HCPU whose first five digits of serial No are 02091 or earlier is 64K bytes Refer to Section 2 3 for the way to confirm the serial No x 4 The CPU shared memory is not latched The CPU shared memory is cleared when the power is turned on to the PLC or when the CPU module is reset x 5 The memory capacity of the Q02HCPU or QO6HCPU whose first five digits of serial No are 04011 or earlier is 64K bytes Refer to Section 2 3 for the way to confirm the serial No 4 1 4 1 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q Performance Specifications continued EE E Internal relay M Default 8192 points MO to 8191 Latch relay L Default 8192 points LO to 8191 Link relay B Default 8192points BO to 1FFF Default 2048 points TO to 2047 for low high speed timer Select between low high speed timer by instructions The measurement unit of the low high speed timer is set with Timer T parameters Low speed timer 1 to 1000ms ims unit default 100ms High speed timer 0 1 to 100ms 0 1ms unit default 10ms Default 0 point STO to 511 for low high speed retentive timer Switchover between the low high speed retentive timer is set by instructions Retentive timer ST The measurement unit of the low high speed retentive timer is set with Us set with parameters parameters Low speed retentive timer 1 to 1000ms 1ms unit default 100ms High speed retentive timer 0 1
339. uaranteed Actual After SM52 ON Guaranteed Actual After SM52 ON x1 value operation value Guaranteed operation value Guaranteed 7 Ke 4 Hee time after alarm 4 Ce time after alarm occurrence occurrence 3 42 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 42857 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 4 89 years 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 43800 hr 43800 hr 120 T 43800 hr 43800 hr 240 hr 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 43800 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 0 26 years 0 73 years 5 days 0 57 years 1 59 years 10 days 0 38 years 1 04 years 5 days 0 81 years 2 28 years 10 days QO6HCPU ae 0 53 years 1 46 years 5 days 1 14 years 3 19 years 10 days 0 89 years 2 44 years 5 days 1 90 years 5 00 years 10 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 5 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 10 days 0 14 years 0 48 years 2 days 0 33 years 1 10 years 4 days 0 20 years 0 68 years 2 days 0 47 years 1 58 years 4 days Q25HCPU 0 28 years 0 96 years 2 days 0 66 years 2 21 years 4 days 0 47 years 1 60 years 2 days 1 10 years 3 69 years 4 days 43800 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 43800 hr 5 00 years 5 00 years 2 days 5 00 years 5 00 years 4 days 1 The power on time ratio indicates the ratio of PLC power on time to one day 24 hours When the total power on time is 12 hours and the total power off time is 12 hours the power on time ratio is 50 2 The guaranteed value is a value at the storage ambient te
340. ule information differs from that registered at power on are detected the numbers of those Bit pattern in VO modules are entered in bit pattern units of 16 points f the VO numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D1404 indicating the numbers are stored ojjan jn D1405 modules with Also detects I O module information VO module b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi b sete gh verification errors 21406 verification 0 No VO D9116 oloioioioioioloioioig E D1407 error ee 7 A D1408 verification D9117 0 0 0 0 jaw O0 0 0 0 0 0 errors hanay NNA han Leclerc 1 O verification 09123 xv 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 n ojojo New to New error present Indicates an I O module verification error e Not cleared even if the blown fuse is replaced with a new one This flag is cleared by error resetting operation 13 For redundant systems Host system CPU information 1 for Q4AR only D1510 to SD1599 are only valid for redundant systems They are all set to 0 for standalone systems Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation SE ACPU Hee DT Set the basic period 1 second units use for the process Basic period ge period control instruction using floating point data ome Floating points data SD1501 SD1500 Process control Process control instruction detail instruction detail error code error code e Shows the detailed
341. unconnected become 0 Device number e Corresponding station error Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 to 16 ions or Bit b8 b7 L9 L8 L25 L24 L41 L40 L57 L56 b15 L16 b14 L15 L31 L47 L63 b13 L14 L30 L46 L62 b12 L13 L29 L45 L61 b11 L12 L28 L44 L60 b10 L11 L27 L43 L59 b9 L10 L26 L42 L58 b6 L7 L23 L39 L55 b5 L6 L22 L38 L54 b4 L5 L21 L37 L53 b2 L3 t19 L35 L51 SD1202 SD1203 D1241 SD1242 If a local station goes down during the operation contents before going down are retained Contents of SD1224 to SD1227 and SD1228 to D1231 are ORed If the corresponding bit is 0 the corresponding bit of the special register above becomes valid e If the own master station goes down the contents before going down are also retained Stores conditions for up to numbers 17 to 32 Forward loop during data link Reverse loop during data link Loopback implemented in forward reverse directions Loopback implemented only in forward direction Loopback implemented only inreverse direction Data link disabled Stores the present path status of the data link e Data link in forward loop Master station Forward loop Data link in reverse loop Reverse loop station 5 Forward loop Reverse loop 11 95 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Spec
342. urg Phone 375 0 17 22 75 704 Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 7 812 147 20 55 e mail tehnikon belsonet net e mail intehsis mdl net e mail consys consys spb ru Getronics b v BELGIUM Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Electrotechnical RUSSIA Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com Control Systems Donauweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com Systems Siberia Partizanskaya St 27 Office 306 RU 121355 Moscow Phone 7 095 416 4321 Fax 7 095 416 4321 e mail info eltechsystems ru TELECON CO BULGARIA Beijer Electronics AS NORWAY 4 A Ljapchev Blvd Teglverksveien 1 BG 1756 Sofia N 3002 Drammen Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8 Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 359 0 2 97 4406 1 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail e mail info beijer no INEA CR d o o CROATIA MPL Technology Sp zo o POLAND Drvinje 63 ul Sliczna 36 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 e mail PL 31 444 Krakow Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakow mopl pl AutoCont CZECH REPUBLIC Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e
343. use injury When using any radio communication device such as a cellular phone or a PHS phone keep them away from the controller at least 25 cm 9 85 inch or it may cause a malfunction Turn the power off when installing or removing the modules Trying to install or remove the module while the power is on could damage the module or result in erroneous operation Before touching the module always touch grounded metal etc to discharge static electricity from human body Failure to do so may cause the module to fail or malfunction Do not drop or impact the battery installed to the module Doing so may damage the battery causing battery liquid to leak in the battery Do not use the dropped or impacted battery but dispose of it In order that you can use the PLC in normal and optimal condition at all times this section describes those items that must be maintained or inspected daily or at regular intervals 10 1 10 1 10 MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION MELSEC Q 10 1 Daily Inspection The items that must be inspected daily are listed below Daily inspection Inspection Item Judgment Criteria Check that fixing screws 1 Installation of base unit jare not loose and the Bes EE be installed Seier tighten the cover is not dislocated WW Check that the module is Installation of I O not dislocated and the unit The unit fixing hook must be engaged and Securely engaged module fixing hook is engaged installed securely
344. ut RKEY notregistered Goes ON at registration of keyboard input registration flag ON Keyboard input OFF if keyboard input is not registered registered Instruction execution 11 54 11 54 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 9 A to Q QnA conversion correspondences Special relays SM1000 to SM1255 are the relays which correspond to ACPU special relays M9000 to M9255 after A to Q QnA conversion All of these special relays are controlled by the system so that users cannot turn them ON OFF in the program If users want to turn these relays ON OFF the program should be modified to use QCPU QnACPU special relays For SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 however if a user can turn ON OFF some of special relays M9084 and M9200 through M9255 before conversion the user can also turn ON OFF the corresponding relays among SM1084 and SM1200 through SM1255 after the conversion For details on the ACPU special relays see the user s manuals for the individual CPUs and MELSECNET or MELSECNET B Data Link System Reference Manuals The processing time may be longer when converted special relays are used with QCPU Uncheck A series CPU compatibility setting within the PC system setting in GX Developer parameters when converted special relays are not used REMARK The following are additional explanations about the Special Relay for Modification column When a special relay for modification is provided the device number should be changed to
345. utput module for a long time it may cause smoke or fire To prevent this configure an external safety circuit such as fuse Build a circuit that turns on the external power supply when the PLC main module power is turned on If the external power supply is turned on first it could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation When there are communication problems with the data link refer to the corresponding data link manual for the operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation operating status of each station Not doing so could result in erroneous output or erroneous operation 9 LOADING AND INSTALLATION MELSEC Q D DANGER When connecting a peripheral device to the CPU module or connecting a personal computer or the like to the special function module to exercise control data change on the running PLC configure up an interlock circuit in the sequence program to ensure that the whole system will always operate safely Also before exercising other control program change operating status change status control on the running PLC read the manual carefully and fully confirm safety Especially for the above control on the remote PLC from an external device an immediate action may not be taken for PLC trouble due to a data communication fault In addition to configuring up the interlock circuit in the sequence program corrective and other actions to be taken as
346. value is 16448 4040H Stores the local station number other than the host which is Stores conditions for up to numbers 1 Jin error to 16 Device Bit eae number 515 b14 b13 b12 b11 b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bo Stores conditions SD1252 L16 L15 L14 L13 L12 L11 L10 L9 L8 L7 L6 L5 L4 L3 L2 L1 SD1253 for up to numbers SD1253 L32 L31 L30 L29 L28 L27 L26 L25 L24 L23 L22 L21 L20 L19 L18 L17 SD1254 L48 L47 L46 L45 L44 L43 L42 L41 L n L39 L38 L37 L36 L35 L34 L33 ar Stores conditions D1255 L64 L63 L62 L61 L60 L59 L58 L57 L56 L55 L54 L53 L52 L51 L50 L49 SD1254 The bit corresponding to the station number which is in error becomes 1 Example When local station 12 is in error b11 of SD1252 SD1255 becomes 1 and when SD1252 is monitored its value is 2048 800 11 Fuse blown module Set by Corresponding Number Name Meaning Explanation When ACPU Die set D i D1300 The numbers of output modules whose fuses have blown are D9100 D1301 input as a bit pattern in units of 16 points D9101 D1302 If the module numbers are set by parameter the parameter set D9102 D1303 Bit pattern in units numbers are stored 7 D9103 D1304 of 16 points SE VE s blown fuse condition at remote station output D9104 D1305 i Se je b15b14b13b12b11b10 b9 b8 b7 b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 bi
347. ve memory Or reexecute write after changing the corresponding drive memory Check the specified drive memory Or re erase after replacing the corresponding drive memory The monitor condition registration CPU module Reexecute monitor after the monitor by the other system area is already being used by another equipment has completed Or increase the system area piece of equipment of the program memory using the format with option Registration failed Do not conduct monitor detail condi tions from the specified equipment Or reexecute monitoring after deleting the monitor detail conditions of the other equipment The number of simultaneous file accesses file locks from multiple places exceeded 10 locks from multiple places to 10 or less Online here is a problem with the specified contents registration The device allocation information differs from error the parameter Or check the data A keyword that differs from the keyword set in the specified driver memory has been specified he specified monitor file cannot be obtained _ Conduct monitor after obtaining the monitor file Registration deletion cannot be conducted E S Reexecute the command after the request from the because the specified command is being Sxec t d other equipment has been completed The conditions have already been reached by Check the monitor conditions the device match Or reconduct monitor registration and execute monitor aE Man NOS ips EE nee
348. ve switch QCPU function Ver B or later x1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 6 This can only be detected in the redundant system standby system 11 26 11 26 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q Error Code List Continued Common Individual Operating eg Spon Error Messages Information Information LED LEDStatus LED Status L of Diagnostic Timing 2210 BOOT ERROR i i Flicker Stop At power ON At reset Stop 78 2300 ICM OPE ERROR i i Flicker On Continue le e is inserted or Stop oy ICM OPE ERROR i j Flicker On Continue Anen me moy arg is inserted or 2400 FILE SET ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker At power ON At reset 2401 FILE SET ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker At power ON At reset 2402 2410 2411 FILE OPE ERROR File name drive name Program error location Flicker ON Continue When instruction is executed 2412 2413 2500 2501 CAN T EXE PRG File name drive name Flicker At power ON At reset 2502 2503 2504 At power ON Reset STOP RUN PARAMETER ERROR File name drive name Parameter number Flicker 2302 E E 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored x2 The CPU operation status when an error occurs can be set at the parameters LED display will change accordingly 11 27 11 27 11 TROUBL
349. vious control system S Initial New system latch latch mode mode SM1512 Start mode when CPU OFF Initial start e Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is hot S Initial New is started ON Hot start start when the redundant system is started up Operation status when OFF Initial start e Turns on when the CPU module operation mode is hot D f Initial N SM15313 CPU is started ON Hot start start when the redundant system is actually start up Ee ow SM1514 Operation mode when OFF Initial start e Turns on when the Operation is hot start when the CPU S Initial New CPU is switched ON Hot start module operation is switched for a redundant system 1515 Output hold mode OFF Output reset urns on when the output mode during a stop error is S New ON Output hold output hold Each END Operation system OFF Control system Ve Turns on when the CPU module operation system status is S Status SM1516 New status ON Standby system the standby system change OFF Power supply on startup Turns on when the CPU module is started up by the ON Operation operation system switch system switch je Reset using the user program starup S Status change U oa EA be Q U an om a Ei Pi 5 Q a ia Ki e When this relay is turned OFF the start of tracking is OFF Batch operation delayed until it is executable if the tracking memory is Tracking execution fede being used at END mode ON Carryover
350. ware fault Therefore change the System RAM fault in the CPU module faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative e Take noise reduction measures QCPU e Reset the CPU module and RUN it again function CPU shared memory fault in the CPU module If the same error is displayed again this suggests a CPU module Ver B hardware fault Therefore change the faulty module Alternatively or later contact your nearest Mitsubishi representative 1200 The circuit that performs CPU internal index is not operating properly This suggests a CPU module hardware fault Therefore change the 1201 Internal CPU module hardware logic does not operate normally faulty module Alternatively contact your nearest Mitsubishi 1202 The circuit that executes sequence processing in the CPU module __ representative does not operate properly 1203 The operation circuit that conducts index modification in the CPU module is not operating properly 1204 The hardware logic in the CPU us not operating properly Suny ne EE the The operation circuit that conducts sequence processing in the CPU H 1205 in not operating properly representative 1206 The DSP operation circuit in the CPU is not operating properly Check FUSE LED of the output modules and replace the module whose LED is lit e Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and replace the fuse at the output module corresponding to the numerical
351. was allocated to a location reserved for a CPU module or vice versa 3 A general purpose switch was set to the module with no general purpose switches In parameter I O allocation settings a special function module was allocated to a location reserved for an I O module Or the opposite has happened 13 or more A series special function modules except for the A1SI61 that can initiate an interrupt to the CPU module have been installed 2101 13 or more special function modules not counting the A 1S I61 capable of sending an interrupt to the CPU module have been installed 7 or more A1SD515S have been installed 2102 7 or more serial communication modules excludes A 1S J71QC24 have been installed 1 2 or more QI60 A1SI61 modules are loaded in a single CPU system 2 2 or more QI60 A1SI61 modules are set to the same control CPU in a multiple CPU system 3 2 or more A1SI61 modules are loaded in a multiple CPU system Reset the parameter I O allocation setting to conform with the actual status of the special function modules MELSEC Q Corres ponding CPU QCPU function Ver B or later Corrective Action Change the High Performance model QCPU of function version A for the High Performance model QCPU of function version B Read the common information of the error using the peripheral device and check and or change the module that corresponds to the numerical value module number there Alternatively
352. was completed niormally in automatic Set the parameter enable drive to standard ROM switch power on BOOT eae ae again and perform boot operation from standard ROM or later 10000 In the multiple CPU system an error occurred in the CPU module Use the software package of the corresponding CPU module to other than the Process CPU High Performance model QCPU check the details of the error that occurred x 1 Characters in parentheses indicate the special register numbers where individual information is being stored 11 38 11 38 11 TROUBLESHOOTING MELSEC Q 11 4 Canceling of Errors The High Performance model QCPU can perform the cancel operation for errors only when the errors allow the CPU module to continue its operation To cancel the errors follow the steps shown below 1 Eliminate the cause of the error 2 Store the error code to be canceled in the special register SD50 3 Energize the special relay SM50 OFF gt ON 4 The error to be canceled is canceled After the CPU module is reset by the canceling of the error the special relays special registers and LEDs associated with the error are returned to the status under which the error occurred If the same error occurs again after the cancellation of the error it will be registered again in the error history When multiple enunciators F detected are canceled the first one with No F only is canceled 1 When the error is canceled with the error c
353. y Friday Saturday Clock data SD213 Clock dat Eeer day of week e The day of the week is stored as BCD code at SD213 as shown below b15 Example Friday 0005H Day of week Sunday Always set 0 Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday SD207 SD208 SD209 11 75 11 TROUBLESHOOTING n D220 D221 D222 D223 LED display data D225 D226 D227 Jo R ojojo a D240 No of extension bases A Q base differentiation n n n g N N Head I O number for replacement MELSECNET 10 H information Special Register List Continued E e LED display ASCII data 16 characters stored here b1 to b8 bi to bO D220 15th character from the right 16th character from the right D221 13th character from the right 14th character from the right S S Display indicator SD222 11th character from the right 12th character from the right data SD223 S S S S 9th character from the right 10th character from the right D224 D225 D226 D227 7th character from the right 8th character from the right 5th character from the right 6th character from the right 3rd character from the right 4th character from the right 1st character from the right 2nd character from the right 0 Automatic mode F Base mode 5 e Stores the base mode Initial 1
354. y 3 The storage ambient temperature is 20 to 75 C if the system includes the AnS series modules 4 The operating ambient humidity and storage ambient humidity are 10 to 90 RH if the system includes the AnS series modules 5 Do not use or store the PLC under pressure higher than the atmospheric pressure of altitude Om Doing so can cause a malfunction When using the PLC under pressure please contact your sales representative 3 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS MELSEC Q MEMO 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE MELSEC Q 4 HARDWARE SPECIFICATION OF THE CPU MODULE 4 1 Performance Specification The table below shows the performance specifications of the CPU module Performance Specifications Item Remark QO02CPU QO2HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Control method Repetitive operation of stored program Direct I O is possible by I O control mode Refresh mode direct I O specification DXO DYD Relay symbol language logic symbolic language Programming language MELSAP3 SFC MELSAP L Function block Sequence control dedicated language Structured Text ST Processing speed 0 079 us 0 034 us Ee Sequence instruction a DO D1 0 237 us 0 102 us FT Total number of instructions So 4 excluding intelligent function module dedicated instructions Constant scan Function for setting the scan timer to fixed 0 5 to 2000 ms configurable in increments of 0 5 ms settings x Program 2 Program memory 28k st
355. y 2 the equipment Power line 2kV Digital I O 24 V or higher 1 kV EN50081 2 1995 EN61000 4 4 Immunity test in which burst noise is EN61131 2 Fast transient burst noise gt 2 SECH tote power ne and signa Digital UO 24 V or less gt 250 V Analog I O signal lines gt 250 V 1996 sai AM Immunity test in which field is 10 V m 26 1000 MHz S irradiated to the product 80 AM modulation 1 kHz modulation 2 EN61000 4 12 Immunity test in which a damped Damped oscillatory wave oscillatory wave is superimposed on immunity the power line Power line Digital I O 24 V or higher x1 QP Quasi peak value Mean Average value 2 The PLC is an open type device device installed to another device and must be installed in a conductive control panel The tests for the corresponding items were performed while the PLC was installed inside a control panel 8 EMC AND LOW VOLTAGE DIRECTIVE MELSEC Q 8 1 2 Installation instructions for EMC Directive The PLC is open equipment and must be installed within a control cabinet for use This not only ensures safety but also ensures effective shielding of PLC generated electromagnetic noise 1 Control cabinet a b Use a conductive control cabinet When attaching the control cabinet s top plate or base plate mask painting and weld so that good surface contact can be made between the cabinet and plate c To ensure good electrical contact with the c
356. y Q50B and currents consumed by the I O intelligent function modules loaded on the Q50B The symbols including I 11 to I7 vary with the modules loaded on the extension base unit For details of the symbol refer to the user s manuals of the module used 6 8 6 8 6 BASE UNIT AND EXTENSION CABLE MELSEC Q List for Calculating Voltage Drops Occurring at Extension Cables in System Consisting of Extensions 1 to 7 QSOB Voltage Drop at Extension Cable on Corresponding Extension Unit Sum Total of Voltage Loading Drops to IN Connector Position of OSDIB V Extension Jay 14 Wi age 1 SS z ae v V1 Extension Extension pg R1 11 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 R3 I3 14 R4 14 P f fvevtevenvarva ig fight R2 12 13 14 15 R3 13 14 15 R4 14 15 R5 15 f TI avave Extension R1 1 12 13 14 R2 12 13 14 15 V V 1 V2 V3 V4 V5 stage 6 BE 16 E EE lt e Extension RI 1 2 13 14 Ra 2 13 14 5 IB Ee VaV14V2 V3 V44V5 stage 7 EE G SI R4 I4415 16 17 R5 I5 16 17 R6 16 17 R7 17 VEN The voltage supplied to IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension reaches 4 75 VDC or higher on the condition that the sum total of voltage drop to IN connector of Q50B V is 0 15V or lower 2 When the Q6LIB is connected between the O3 Band the Q5LIB a Selection condition 4 75VDC or higher should be supplied to the IN connector of the Q50B in the final extension b How to calculate voltage to IN connector The 5
357. y is ON Selects the device status when the stopped CPU is run after the sequence program or SFC program has been modified when the SFC program exists Select the device status at the time of switching from STOP to program write to RUN All devices except the ie step relay Select whether the low speed execution type program will be executed in the asynchronous mode or in the synchronous mode e Asynchronous mode this relay is turned OFF Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is performed continuously within the excess U END time e Synchronous mode this relay is turned ON Mode in which the operation of the low speed execution type program is not performed continuously and operation is performed from the next scan if there is excess time Indicates whether the normal SFC program is being executed or not Used as an SFC control instruction execution interlock Instruction execution Ze QCPU S Status serial No Indicates whether the program execution management change 04122 or SFC program is being executed or not later Used as an SFC control instruction execution interlock e The status of the intelligent function module access instruction executed immediately before is stored This data is overwritten when the intelligent function module access instruction is executed again e Used by the user in a program as a completion bit S Status change 11 48 11 TROUBLESHOO

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

RELEVE DE CONCLUSIONS DE LA REUNION DU 28 DECEMBRE  Ellise Stainless Electric Cookware  Série OREGON - Sportshop.fr  ClickTronic 1m MP3 Audio  MIL-P3800 Series Print Servers  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file